GFZ-62884EN B-62884EN

GE Fanuc CNC
Open CNC Ladder Editing Package
Operator’s Manual

Presented By: CNC Center

For Product Needs Please Visit:
http://www.cnccenter.com/
OR Email:
sales@cnccenter.com
OR Call:
1-800-963-3513
GE Fanuc CNC Manuals www.cnccenter.com
 GE Fanuc Automation

Computer Numerical Control Products

Open CNC
Ladder Editing Package

Operator's Manual

GFZ-62884EN/01 September 1996

 GFL-001
Warnings, Cautions, and Notes
as Used in this Publication

Warning
Warning notices are used in this publication to emphasize that hazardous voltages, currents,
temperatures, or other conditions that could cause personal injury exist in this equipment or
may be associated with its use.
In situations where inattention could cause either personal injury or damage to equipment, a
Warning notice is used.

Caution
Caution notices are used where equipment might be damaged if care is not taken.

Note
Notes merely call attention to information that is especially significant to understanding and
operating the equipment.

This document is based on information available at the time of its publication. While efforts
have been made to be accurate, the information contained herein does not purport to cover all
details or variations in hardware or software, nor to provide for every possible contingency in
connection with installation, operation, or maintenance. Features may be described herein
which are not present in all hardware and software systems. GE Fanuc Automation assumes
no obligation of notice to holders of this document with respect to changes subsequently made.

GE Fanuc Automation makes no representation or warranty, expressed, implied, or statutory

with respect to, and assumes no responsibility for the accuracy, completeness, sufficiency, or
usefulness of the information contained herein. No warranties of merchantability or fitness for
purpose shall apply.

©Copyright 1996 GE Fanuc Automation North America, Inc.

All Rights Reserved.
B–62884EN/01 Table of contents
1. GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.1 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1.2 THE MAJOR FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1.2.1 The Overview of Ladder Editing Package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1.2.2 Supported PMC Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
1.2.3 Sequence Program Creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
1.3 ABOUT PMC PROGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
1.3.1 PMC Programming Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
1.3.2 About Symbol & Comment Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

om
2. CONFIGURATION AND INSTALLATION OF PACKAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
2.1 OPERATING ENVIRONMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
2.2 PACKAGE CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
2.3 INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

r.c
2.3.1 Registering the Software in the Windows [Programs] Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
2.3.2 Installing the Software to Invoke from the DOS Command Prompt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
2.4 DIRECTORY CONFIGURATION AFTER INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
2.5 CONFIG.SYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

e
2.6 FILE CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
2.6.1 File System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
2.6.2 The Constitution of Source Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

3.1
nt
3. OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
STARTING THE LADDER EDITING PACKAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
30
31
ce
3.2 OVERVIEW OF OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
3.2.1 Menu Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
3.3 COMMON SYSTEM OPERATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
nc

3.4 ON–LINE FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

3.4.1 Overview of the On–Line Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
3.4.2 File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
3.4.3 Diagnose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
3.4.4 Input/Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
.c

3.4.5 Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

3.4.6 Examples of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
3.5 OFF-LINE FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
w

3.5.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

3.5.2 Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
3.5.3 Printout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
w

3.5.4 Compilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

3.5.5 Decompilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
3.5.6 Input/Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
w

3.5.7 Setting Program Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220

3.5.8 Mnemonic Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
3.5.9 Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
3.5.10 Selecting On-Line Function from Off-Line Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236

4. ERROR MESSAGE LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

4.1 A : INITIAL MENU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
4.1.1 Fatal Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
4.1.2 Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
4.2 B : TITLE EDITING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240

i
 Table of contents B–62884EN/01

4.2.1 Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240

4.3 C : I/O MODULE EDITING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
4.3.1 Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
4.3.2 Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
4.4 D : SYSTEM PARAMETER EDITING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
4.4.1 Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
4.5 E : LADDER/STEP SEQUENCE EDITING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
4.5.1 Fatal Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
4.5.2 Error (at Editing Ladder Diagram) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
4.5.3 Error (at Editing Step Sequence) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

om
4.5.4 Warning (at Editing Ladder Diagram) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
4.6 F : SYMBOL & COMMENT EDITING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
4.6.1 Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
4.7 G : MESSAGE EDITING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
4.7.1 Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248

r.c
4.8 H : PRINTOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
4.8.1 Fatal Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
4.8.2 Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
4.8.3 Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
4.9 I : COMPILE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251

e
4.9.1 Fatal Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
4.9.2 Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251

4.10
4.9.3 nt
Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
J : DECOMPILATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.10.1 Fatal Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
255
256
256
ce
4.10.2 Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
4.10.3 Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
4.11 K : MNEMONIC CONVERSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
4.11.1 Fatal Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
4.11.2 Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
nc

4.11.3 Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262

4.12 L : INPUT/OUTPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
4.12.1 Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
4.12.2 Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
.c

4.13 N : ON–LINE MONITOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271

4.13.1 Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
w

APPENDIX
A. FUNCTIONS SPECIFIC TO INDIVIDUAL PMC MODELS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
w

A.1 SYSTEM PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282

A.1.1 Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
w

A.1.2 Examples of Mnemonic Files (Single–Format) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283

A.2 LINK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284

B. AUTOMATIC COMPILATION AND DECOMPILATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288

C. CHANGE OF EACH SETTING FILE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290

C.1 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION FILE “%%% FLSET. CNF” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291

ii
B–62884EN/01 Table of contents

D. CONVERSION OF SEQUENCE PROGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293

D.1 DIFFERENCES FROM FAPT LADDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
D.2 CONVERSION FROM FAPT LADDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
D.3 CONVERT THE PMC TYPE OF SEQUENCE PROGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
D.3.1 Converting by System Parameter Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
D.3.2 Conversion Using a Signal Address Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
D.3.3 Using Data in a Sequence Program for Another Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
D.4 TRANSFER FROM P–G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
D.4.1 Function for Transferring Data between the P–G and PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302

om
E. STANDARD SYMBOL DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308

F. TOOL FOR CHANGING MESSAGE DATA (CHGMES) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309

G. CAUTIONS FOR USING THE O/S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315

r.c
H. DATA TRANSFER CABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316

e
I. INQUIRY FORM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318

nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w

iii
B–62884EN/01 1. GENERAL

1 


om
er.c
nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w

1
1. GENERAL B–62884EN/01

1.1 Thank you for purchasing Ladder Editing Package.

OVERVIEW Ladder Editing Package is a programming system for developing
FANUC PMC sequence programs.
This software is designed to operate on the FANUC OPEN CNC and
supports both the Japanese and English languages. For details of the
operating conditions, see Chapter 2.

Personal
Name Specification Remarks
computer

FANUC OPEN CNC Ladder Editing A08B-9201-J510 Japanese and

om
Package English are both
supported

The development of a sequence program on a personal computer,

operating independently of the FANUC OPEN CNC, requires the use of
the sequence program development software listed below. For details,

r.c
refer to the relevant manuals.

Name Operator’s manual

FAPT LADDER FAPT LADDER Operator’s Manual (B–66131E)

e
FAPT LADDER–II FAPT LADDER–II Operator’s Manual (B–66184EN)
nt
This manual explains procedures required to install, activate, and operate
this software about that are specific to the system designed for use with
personal computers.
ce
For PMC operations and how to create PMC sequence programs, refer to
the manuals listed below.
[FANUC PMC-MODEL PA1/PA3/RA1/RA2/RA3/RB/RB2/RB3/RB4
/RB5/RB6/RC/RC3/RC4/NB/NB2 Programming manual (LADDER
nc

language) ] B-61863E

Inquiry form
If you have any questions after reading this operator’s
.c

manual and the manuals listed above, use the inquiry form
attached at Appendix I to consult us the questions.
w
w
w

2
B–62884EN/01 1. GENERAL

The following abbreviations are used in this manual.

1) For PMC models

Abbreviations PMC Models

PMC-R Series
· PMC-RA3 FANUC PMC-MODEL RA3
· PMC-RB3 FANUC PMC-MODEL RB3
· PMC-RB4 FANUC PMC-MODEL RB4
· PMC-RB5 FANUC PMC-MODEL RB5
· PMC-RB6 FANUC PMC-MODEL RB6
· PMC-RC3 FANUC PMC-MODEL RC3

om
· PMC-RC4 FANUC PMC-MODEL RC4

2) Others

Abbreviations Name

r.c
OPEN CNC FANUC OPEN CNC
MMC–IV FANUC MMC–IV
HSSB High Speed Serial Bus

MS-DOS and PC-DOS are both referred to simply as DOS, unless it

e
is necessary to distinguish between the two operating systems.

nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w

3
1. GENERAL B–62884EN/01

1.2
THE MAJOR
FUNCTIONS

1.2.1 The Ladder Editing Package is a software package that enables the use of
The Overview of the following PMC functions and sequence program development
functions on the OPEN CNC.
Ladder Editing
<Ladder Editing Package functions>
Package
1) Sequence program input, display, editing, and output

om
2) Sequence program monitoring/debugging
– Signal status monitoring
– PMC status monitoring
– Ladder monitoring/editing
– Alarm display

r.c
– Cross reference display
3) PMC parameter setting/display
4) Sequence program execution/termination
5) Writing to flash ROM

e
6) Sequence program printout
nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w

4
B–62884EN/01 1. GENERAL

1.2.1.1
Function Overview OPEN CNC

Machine
CNC / PMC DI/ DO

On–line functions

om

Sequence program monitoring/debugging

Sequence program execution/termination

Sequence program transfer

PMC parameter setting/display

r.c
Floppy disk

e
Ladder editing
package

nt Keyboard
Input/editing
ce
Printer
nc

Drawing

Hard disk
.c

Fig.1.2.1.1 Function Overview

w

1.2.1.2 A variety of OPEN CNC system configurations are described below.

OPEN CNC System 1) System with a FANUC NC board, built into a commercially
available personal computer
Configurations
w

[Overview]
w

FANUC NC board
→ Personal
computer Machine
Incorporated

Fig.1.2.1.2(a)

5
1. GENERAL B–62884EN/01

[Program backup destination]

PMC program memory [hard disk] of the personal computer
2) System with a personal computer board (MMC–IV), built into
the CNC
[Overview]

CNC with MMC–IV

Machine

om
Fig.1.2.1.2(b)

[CRT/MDI operation]

r.c
When using this system with the CRT/MDI panel, assign those
keys that are not available on the CRT/MDI panel as described
below. For details, refer to the “FANUC MMC–IV Operator’s
Manual (B–62494EN).”

e
Key Correspondence

Full keyboard CRT/MDI

nt
Ctrl Custom
ce
Tab System

Alt Alter
nc

Back Can
Space

Esc HELP
.c

Note
The CRT/MDI keys cannot be used to start a system by
means of Japanese input. To enter comments in Japanese,
w

use the full keyboard.

w

[Program backup destination]

PMC flash memory
w

3) System in which the CNC is connected to a commercially

available personal computer via the high–speed serial bus

6
B–62884EN/01 1. GENERAL

[Overview]

CNC
High–speed
Personal serial bus
computer Machine

Fig.1.2.1.2(c)

om
[Program backup destination]
PMC flash memory
4) System in which the CNC is connected to a FANUC intelligent
terminal via the high–speed serial bus
[Overview]

r.c
Intelligent
terminal CNC
High–speed

e
serial bus
Machine

nt Fig.1.2.1.2(d)
ce
[CRT/MDI operation]
See Item 2) above.
[Program backup destination]
nc

PMC flash memory

1.2.2
.c

Supported PMC 1) Supported PMC models

Functions The following PMC models are supported:
– PMC–RA3
w

– PMC–RB3
– PMC–RB4
w

– PMC–RB5
– PMC–RB6
– PMC–RC3
w

– PMC–RC4
2) Supported functions for each PMC model
Table 1.2.2 lists the supported functions for each PMC model. For
details of the functions, refer to the sections indicated in the
“Reference section” column.

7
1. GENERAL B–62884EN/01

Table 1.2.2 Functions Supported for Each PMC Model

PMC model
RB4 RB6 RC4
Function RA3 RB3 RB4 (STEP RB5 RB6 (STEP RC3 RC4 (STEP
Reference SEQ) SEQ) SEQ)
section

Step sequence 1.3


f

f

f

program 3.5.2

On–line functions 3.4 ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆

om
Off–line functions 3.5 f f f f f f f f f f

Input/ PMC f f f f f f f f f f
output
out ut
device Handy File 3.5.6 f f f f f f f f f f

Memory card ∆ ∆ f f f f f ∆ f f

r.c
Link function Section A.2 in






f f f
Appendix A

f : Usable
: Not usable

e
∆ : May be usable (Whether the functions are supported varies with the series and editions of the PMC and CNC.
For details, refer to the PMC programming manual.)

1.2.3
nt
ce
Sequence Program
Creation
nc
.c
w
w
w

8
B–62884EN/01 1. GENERAL

Start control system development

Determine control targets (machine, CNC)

Determine control operation specifications

(calculation of number of DI/DO points, control scale determination)

om
Determine interface specifications (DI/DO assignment)

Create sequence program (design, address map determination, coding)

r.c
Sequence program input, editing, debugging, and printing

Off–line functions
On–line functions

e
YES
New?
NO nt

Ladder diagram monitoring/editing

Ladder diagram editing
Mnemonic
editing
ce

Signal monitoring

NO NO NO
Debugging Debugging
completed? completed?
nc

YES YES
YES
Compile (link)
Print?

Decompile
.c

NO

Sequence program printing

w

End

End
w

In on–line mode, programming/monitoring can be performed during communication with the PMC. In
off–line mode, programming is performed on the OPEN CNC without communication. Other PMC pro-
gramming systems (for use with personal computers) are FAPT LADDER and FAPT LADDER–II. For
w

details, refer to the following manuals:

– FAPT LADDER Operator’s Manual (B–66131E)
– FAPT LADDER–II Operator’s Manual (B–66184EN)

Fig.1.2.3 Sequence Program Creation

9
1. GENERAL B–62884EN/01

1.3
ABOUT PMC
PROGRAM

1.3.1 The ladder method is most of ten used for programming the sequence
PMC Programming control governed by a PMC. This method was derived from relay-panel
control circuits. Since it has been in use for years, many sequence
Method engineers are already familiar with it.
The greater the number of functions implemented by the PMC, the larger

om
and the more complicated the sequence program becomes. And it is hard
to describe such program for ladder method.
To overcome this problem, step sequence method programming has been
introduced.
(1) What is the step sequence method ?

r.c
The step sequence is one of the method for programming a sequence
control governed by a programmable controller, this method features
the direct representation of the control flow on a flow chart. Each
block of processing is described as a subprogram, using the ladder
method. Therefore it provides an easy-to-understand visualized flow

e
of the processes and is well-suited to the control of entire process.
See 1.2.2 Supported PMC Functions for the machines are able to use the
nt
step sequence.
For the details of the step sequence method, refer to the following manual.
[3.5.2.2.(3) STEP SEQUENCE EDITING]
ce
(2) The configuration of a sequence program
A sequence program consists of the following 5
kinds of program unit ;
nc

· The 1st level of ladder

· The 2nd level of ladder
· The 3rd level of ladder
· Subprograms of ladder
.c

· Subprograms of step sequence

w
w
w

10
B–62884EN/01 1. GENERAL

LEVEL 1 ( LADDER)

LEVEL 2 ( LADDER)

LEVEL 3 ( LADDER)

Sub Program P1 (Step Sequence)

om
Sub Program P2 (LADDER)

Sub Program P3 (LADDER)

r.c
Sub Program Pn (Step Sequence)

(3) Data flow

e
Ladder Editing Package

Source program
nt
ce
Ladder 1st level
Mnemonic Mnemonic program
Ladder 2nd level
conversion A mnemonic program without
nc

Ladder 3rd level step sequence

Subprogram P1

Subprogram P2
.c

↓
Compilation/Decompilation
↓
w

Object code

Memory card format file

w
w

CNC

11
1. GENERAL B–62884EN/01

1.3.2 You can assign names or add notes to I/O signals, internal relays, and can
About Symbol & add notes to a sequence program.
They are generally called “symbol & comment data”.
Comment Data
(1) The definition of terms
The definition of terms are shown below to distinguish between some
symbol & comment data.

Terms Definition and uses Display

Symbol Name assigned

om
X0.0 INPUT
uniquely to each
relay/coil,
to be used in place of
PMC address.
Relay comment Text assigned to
X0.0 Y0.0
relays/coils to

r.c
explain them.
RELAY X COIL Y
COMMENT COMMENT
Coil comment Text assigned to coils
Y0.0
to explain them.

e
HERE IS COIL
COMMENT

nt
Net comment Text assigned
between ladder nets
to explain them.
(* HERE IS NET *)
(* COMMENT *)
ce
(2) Symbol & comment specification list
(a) For input signal and internal relay

Specification Symbol Relay comment Coil comment

nc

Available ASCII characters ASCII characters ASCII characters

characters (lower-case Japanese Japanese
alphabetic kana/kanji kana/kanji
characters not characters characters
.c

allowed)
Maximum cha. 16 byte 16 byte 30 byte
Maximum 20,000 entries 20,000 20,000
w

number (Note) (Note) (Note)

Duplicated Not allowed Allowerd Allowerd
definition
w

Note
w

Free area size of hard disk drive, EMS and XMS on personal
computer may restrict them.

12
B–62884EN/01 1. GENERAL

(b) For ladder sequence program

Specification Net comment

Available characters ASCII characters
Japanese kana/kanji characters
Line feed
Steps to occupy 2 step/Net comment
Maximum characters/line 64 characters/line
4095 characters/Net comment (Note 1)
Maximum lines 100 lines/Net commennt (Note 1)

om
Maximum number About 20,000 Net comments (Note 2)

Notes
1. The limitation which is reached first becomes the limitation for the

r.c
Net comment.
2. Number of characters in each Net comment effects on maximum
number of Net comments. Free area size of hard disk drive, EMS
and XMS on personal computer may further restrict them.

e
nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w

13
2. CONFIGURATION AND INSTALLATION OF
PACKAGE B–62884EN/01

2 CONFIGURATION AND INSTALLATION OF PACKAGE

om
e r.c
nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w

14
 2. CONFIGURATION AND INSTALLATION OF
B–62884EN/01 PACKAGE

2.1 To use this software, configurations of hardware and software are required
as follows.
OPERATING
ENVIRONMENT Computer FUNUC OPEN CNC
CPU 386SX or higher
OS · Microsoft Windows 95 (Note 1)
· DOS Version 5.0/V or later (to activate Japanese/
English system)
· DOS Version 5.0 or later (to activate English system)
Device driver · Extended Drivers and Librarys.
(For DOS : A02B–0207–K706

om
For Windows : A02B–0207–K726)
· Drivers and Librarys
(For DOS : A02B–0207–K707
For Windows : A02B–0207–K727) (Note 2)
CNC function FANUC OPEN CNC Additional option
· EXTENDED DRIVERS AND LIBRARIES

r.c
FUNCTION (A02B–0207–J800)
· Ladder Editing Package Function
(A02B–0207–J820)
Memory · Conventional memory 520 Kbytes or more (Note 3)
· EMS and/or XMS of 4 Mbytes or more (recommended)

e
(Note 4)
Hard disk 5 Mbytes or more space (Note 5)
nt
Graphic adapter
Printer
VGA or higher
EPSON VP1000 and compatible printers
Japanese language Input system in conormity with MS-KANJI API
(Note6)
ce
input system

Notes
1 When using this saftware under Windows95, Please install
nc

the software by the installation procedure described in

[2.3.1 Registering the software in the Windows [Programs]
menu. ]
2 A device driver tailored to the OPEN CNC system
configuration must be incorporated.
.c

3 Even if the machine has 640 Kbytes memory, the free

memory may be less than 520 Kbytes when an installed
driver, for example, uses a large memory space.
w

The size of free space in memory can be checked with the

DOS command CHKDSK.
4 The quantity of EMS and XMS memory effects on the
w

performance to handle Symbol data and Net comment.

Please prepare enough EMS and XMS memory specically
for Symbol data or Net comment of large number.
w

Moreover, at the system with EMS less than 256 Kbytes, the
maximum number of steps which this software can handle
may be restricted.
Please prepare 256 Kbytes or more EMS if possible.
5 In addition, an space for storing sequence data is required.
6 [NEC PR201H]and[FANUC PRINTER]are also available by
changing system file.
For details, refer to[3.5.3.6 Changing the Printer].

15
2. CONFIGURATION AND INSTALLATION OF
PACKAGE B–62884EN/01

About size of Expansion memory to be used :

Expansion memory are used for ladder and symbol & comment data as
an temporary area. Although, Ladder Editing Package runs with no EMS
& XMS, enough size of EMS and/or XMS memory according to the
source program to handle will be necessary for better performance.
(1) Expansion memory
When reading ladder programs, Ladder Editing Package uses EMS
if available. If EMS is not available, Ladder Editing Package uses
conventional memory. When only conventional memory is used, up
to 21840 program steps can be created. When 256KB EMS memory

om
is available, however, up to 32000 program steps can be created. The
size of EMS is 256KB for all PMC models, regardless of the size of
the program to be edited.
(2) Expanded memory for Symbol & Comment data
FAPT LADDER uses EMS and/or XMS memory for Symbol &
Comment data if available.

r.c
When neither of them are available, Ladder Editing Package will
make temporary file on the hard diskdrive, and processing large
number of Symbol & Comment data may be slower.
About 200 Kbytes of EMS & XMS memory are used for every 1,000

e
Symbol data.
(3) Expanded memory for Net comment
ntLadder Editing Package also uses EMS and/or XMS memory, or
temporary file as same as Symbol & Comment data. If neither EMS
nor XMS is prepared, use hard disk.
About 200 to 300 Kbytes of EMS or XMS memory are used for every
ce
1,000 Net coment.
nc
.c
w
w
w

16
 2. CONFIGURATION AND INSTALLATION OF
B–62884EN/01 PACKAGE

2.2 The Ladder Editing Package is distributed on the five system disks listed
below. These disks are of 3.5–inch, 2HD type (1.44MB). Check that none
PACKAGE of the system disks is missing.
CONFIGURATION
(1) Ladder Editing Package (Vol.1)/A08B–9201–J510#ZZ07–1
(2) Ladder Editing Package (Vol.2)/A08B–9201–J510#ZZ07–2
(3) Ladder Editing Package (Vol.3)/A08B–9201–J510#ZZ07–3
(4) Ladder Editing Package (Vol.4)/A08B–9201–J510#ZZ07–4
(5) Ladder Editing Package (Vol.5)/A08B–9201–J510#ZZ07–5

om
e r.c
nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w

17
2. CONFIGURATION AND INSTALLATION OF
PACKAGE B–62884EN/01

2.3 There are two different installaction procedures to install the software.
One is to register the software in the Windows [Programs] menu.The
INSTALLATION other is to invoke this software from the DOS command prompt.

2.3.1 The following describes the installation of this software from floppy disk
Registering the drive A to hard disk drive C.
Software in the (1) Insert Vol. 1 into drive A.
Windows [Programs] (2) Click the [Start] button, then click the [Run…] dialog box.
Menu (3) Enter “A:¥SETUP” in the [Open] box of the [Run] dialog box.

om
Run [ ? ] [
]

Type the name of a program, folder, or document, and Windows will open

r.c
it for you.

Open : A: ¥SETUP ↓

e
Ok Cancel Browse . . .

nt
(4) The message below appears, and the setup program is started.
ce
SETUP
nc

Initializing Setup...
.c
w
w
w

18
 2. CONFIGURATION AND INSTALLATION OF
B–62884EN/01 PACKAGE

(5) Specify the hard disk drive to which the software is to be installed
(Note).

 Ladder Editing Package setup

Welcome to Ladder Editing Package.

Setup will place system files into the following drive.

If you want to install these files in a different disk drive,
select the install disk drive.

om
Install to :

[] c:[C_DRIVE] ↓

Continue Exit Setup

r.c
(6) Specify the OPEN CNC interface type. If the OPEN CNC has already

e
been installed in the personal computer, the installer automatically
identifies the interface type, and the dialog box shown below appears.
ntIf the detected interface type matches that of the Ladder Editing
Package to be installed, click [Ok].
ce
 Ladder Editing Package setup

Interface Type 2 is detected.

Ladder Editing Package for Type 2 will be installed.
nc

Ok Cancel
.c

If the OPEN CNC has not yet been installed in the personal computer,
the dialog box shown below appears. Select the interface type of the
w

OPEN CNC to be installed.

w

 Ladder Editing Package setup

Interface driver is not detected.

ÔÔÔÔÔ
w

Whitch type Interface driver are you want to use ?

ÔÔÔÔÔ
Interface Type
F Interface Type 1
f Interface Type 2

Ok Cancel

19
2. CONFIGURATION AND INSTALLATION OF
PACKAGE B–62884EN/01

(7) Select the language of the messages to be installed. The size of the
files to be installed and the amount of free space available on the hard
disk to which the software will be installed are displayed. If there is
sufficient free space for the installation, click [Ok].

 Ladder Editing Package setup

ÔÔÔÔÔÔ
Select language of message to be installed.

ÔÔÔÔÔÔ
Install Language

om
F English only
f Japanese only
f English and Japanese

ÔÔÔÔÔ
Disk information
C:

r.c
Ok
Required space: 7808K

Cancel
Available space: 128000K

e
nt
(8) Select a display color type according to the display unit to be used.
After selecting a display color type, click [Test] to check the display
appearance. If the colors are displayed correctly, click [Ok].
ce
 Ladder Editing Package setup
nc

ÔÔÔÔ
Select color type.

ÔÔÔÔ Color type

F COLOR
.c

f MONO 1
f MONO 2
w

Ok Test Cancel
w
w

20
 2. CONFIGURATION AND INSTALLATION OF
B–62884EN/01 PACKAGE

(9) The dialog box shown below appears during installation. Insert the
requested floppy disk, then click [Ok].

 Ladder Editing Package setup

Please insert the following disk (or type the new directory),

and then press <Enter>.

Disk 2(Ladder Editing Package Vol.2) Floppy

disk

om
to be in-
A:¥
serted

Ok Cancel

r.c
(10)Upon the completion of installation, the Ladder Editing Package is
registered in the [Programs] menu.

e
Note
nt
The configuration of the directory in which the Ladder
Editing Package has been installed cannot be modified.
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w

21
2. CONFIGURATION AND INSTALLATION OF
PACKAGE B–62884EN/01

2.3.2 The following describes the installation of the Ladder Editing Package
Installing the Software from floppy disk drive A to hard disk drive C.
to Invoke from the DOS (1) Insert Vol. 1 into drive A.
Command Prompt (2) Enter “A:¥INSTALL” at the DOS command prompt.

> A : ¥INSTALL

(3) The installer is started, and the title screen appears. Select [Continue].

om
(4) Enter the hard disk drive to which the software is to be installed
(Note).

r.c
Enter disk drive name to install the
Ladder Editing Package:

Install to C :

e
nt Ok Quit
ce
Fig.2.3.2(a)

(5) Specify an OPEN CNC interface type. If the OPEN CNC is already
installed in the personal computer, the interface type is automatically
nc

identified by the installer, and the dialog box shown below appears.
After checking that the interface type detected by the installer is
correct, select [Ok].
.c

Interface Type 1 is detected.

Ladder Editing Package for Type 1 will be installed.
w

Ok Quit
w
w

Fig.2.3.2(b)
If the OPEN CNC is not installed in the personal computer yet, the
dialog box shown below appears. Select the interface type
corresponding to the OPEN CNC to be installed.

22
 2. CONFIGURATION AND INSTALLATION OF
B–62884EN/01 PACKAGE

The Interface driver has not been detected.

Which Interface driver will be used?

F Interface Type 1
f Interface Type 2

Ok Quit

om
Fig.2.3.2(c)

(6) Select an installation message language.

r.c
Select language of message to be installed.

e
nt English and Japanese

Japanese only
ce
English only
nc

Fig.2.3.2(d)
.c

(7) To set the display color, the dialog box shown below appears. The
dialog box color can be changed by selecting an appropriate display
color option with the and keys. Select a color option that
w

is appropriate for the display unit.

w

Select color type.

w

F COLOR
f MONO1
f MONO2

Ok Quit

Fig.2.3.2(e)

23
2. CONFIGURATION AND INSTALLATION OF
PACKAGE B–62884EN/01

(8) The selected options are displayed. After checking that the desired
options are selected, select [Yes]. The installation is started.

Install drive : C: ¥FANUC¥LEP

Interface : Type 1
Language : English only

Are you sure to start installation?

om
Yes No

r.c
(9) When the installation terminates normally, the message shown below
appears.

e
Installation is done.

nt Exit
ce
Fig.2.3.2(f)
nc

Note
The configuration of the installation destination directory
cannot be modified.
.c
w
w
w

24
 2. CONFIGURATION AND INSTALLATION OF
B–62884EN/01 PACKAGE

2.4 The Ladder Editing Package is installed by the installer under the
directory configuration indicated below. The user can freely select the
DIRECTORY hard disk drive to which installation is to be performed, but cannot modify
CONFIGURATION the directory name.
AFTER
INSTALLATION C:¥FANUC

LEP : Ladder Editing Package system

JPN : Japanese message data for the Ladder Editing
Package system

om
ENG : English message data for the Ladder Editing
Package system

CNC : OPEN CNC system (separate system)

: Basic operation package (separate system)

r.c
BOP

(1) Message file directory

According to the message language selection made at installation, the
installer creates the subdirectories listed below to enable the installation of

e
the message files.
a. When the Japanese message option was selected
nt C:¥FANUC¥LEP
JPN : Japanese message data for the Ladder
Editing Package
ce
b. When the English message option was selected
C:¥FANUC¥LEP
ENG: English message data for the Ladder
nc

Editing Package
c. When the Japanese and English message option was selected
C:¥FANUC¥LEP
JPN : Japanese message data for the Ladder
.c

Editing Package
ENG: English message data for the Ladder
Editing Package
w

(2) Work directory

As a work directory, the following subdirectory is created automatically.
A program used on–line is stored under this directory, and can be edited
w

off–line.
C:¥FANUC¥LEP
PMC0000 : Work directory
w

25
2. CONFIGURATION AND INSTALLATION OF
PACKAGE B–62884EN/01

2.5 To use the system, make the following modifications to the

CONFIG.SYS file.
CONFIG.SYS
(1) When the system is used under Windows 95 (when Windows 95 is
installed in C:¥WINDOWS)
DEVICE=¥WINDOWS¥ANSI.SYS
DEVICE=¥WINDOWS¥EMM386.EXE
When the system is used under Windows 95, the Japanese input
system is not specified in the CONFIG.SYS file. The specification
method depends on the Japanese input system being used. When
using the system from the MS–DOS prompt, both the Japanese input

om
system registered in Windows and that of the DOS version can be
used. In MS–DOS mode, only the DOS–version Japanese input
system can be used. Additions or modifications to the settings of the
Windows Japanese input system can be made by modifying the
Language item of Keyboard Properties, after double–clicking the
Keyboard icon on the Control Panel. The DOS version Japanese
input system can be installed by using the ADDDRV command. For

r.c
details of the installation method, see DOSIME.BAT under the
COMMAND directory of Windows and DOSIME.SYS under the
root directory of the start–up disk.
(2) When the system is used under DOS (In the following example, DOS

e
is already installed in C:¥DOS.)
DEVICE=C:¥DOS¥ANSI.SYS
nt DEVICE=C:¥DOS¥EMM386.EXE
DEVICE=C:¥DOS¥MSIME.SYS
DEVICE=C:¥DOS¥MSIMEK.SYS
ce
(a) ANSI.SYS (required)
The display mode and attributes of the display unit are set. This
setting cannot be omitted.
(b) EMM386.EXE
nc

This device driver enables the use of expansion memory as EMS

memory. When using another EMS driver, refer to the relevant
manual for details of the setting required in CONFIG.SYS.
(c) MSIME.SYS/MSIMEK.SYS
This device driver enables the use of MS–KANJI API for
.c

Japanese–language input. When using another Japanese

language input system, refer to the relevant manual for details of
the setting required in CONFIG.SYS.
w
w
w

26
 2. CONFIGURATION AND INSTALLATION OF
B–62884EN/01 PACKAGE

Notes
1 All of the above device drivers are provided as standard with
Windows 95/MS–DOS. The specification of switches and
parameters may be required for the above settings. For
details, refer to the windows 95/the MS–DOS on–line help
or the relevant manual.
2 When using a memory card, refer to the manual provided
with the memory card for details of the setting required in
CONFIG.SYS.

om
3 Some device drivers may adversely affect the Ladder
Editing Package. If a problem is anticipated, specify only
ANSI.SYS in CONFIG.SYS. Omit the specification of the
other device drivers. When only ANSI.SYS is specified,
Ladder Editing Package will support only English, but allows
any contention with other device drivers to be identified

r.c
quickly. Recognized conflicts are listed in Appendix G.

e
nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w

27
2. CONFIGURATION AND INSTALLATION OF
PACKAGE B–62884EN/01

2.6
FILE
CONFIGURATION

2.6.1 The files constituting system are described below.

File System (1) Customizable files
Some functions can be customized by the user. These functions
include setting of the format for printing created ladder programs, and
communication port setting based on the RS-232C standard.

om
For these functions, the associated data is held in text-format files,
which can be directly edited by the user. These files are listed below.
(a) Printing (For details, see Section 3.5.3.5.)
· AMROFTRP.DAT
· CROSSINF.DAT
· *.INF

r.c
(b) Communications (For details, see Section 3.5.6.1.)
· FLIO_AT.DAT
(c) Compile/decompile (For details, see Section 3.5.7.3.)
· OPTION.CNF

e
(d) Entire system
· FLMNE.DAT (For details, see Section 3.5.8.7.)
· FLVIEW.DAT (For details, see Section 3.5.9.)
nt
(2) Other files
(a) README.TXT/READMEJ.TXT
These text files contain important information that became
ce
available after the manual was printed.
Use this information in combination with the manual. Note that
READMEJ.TXT contains Japanese text, while README.TXT
contains English text.
(b) *.JPN/*.ENG
nc

A file having either of the above extensions contains most of the

messages (menus, displayed instructions, and error indications)
to be displayed or printed by the system. The location of such a
file is described in Section 2.4.
.c

(c) FLMNE.ERR
The results (including errors) of mnemonic conversion are
written into this text file.
w

(d) *.EXE
A file having this extension is an executable file. Such files are
not handled by the user.
w

(3) Files that are not installed

The files under subdirectory ¥APPENDIX on Volume 5 are not
installed by the installer. These files are listed below.
w

(a) Printing (For details, see Section 3.5.3.6.)

· AMROFTRP.ESC
· AMROFTRP.PR
(b) Standard symbols (For details, see Appendix E.)
· F16&18-M. SYM
· F16&18-T. SYM
· PM-D.SYM
· PM-H.SYM
· FS0M-CNV. SYM
· FS0T-CNV. SYM
· PM-C_CNV. SYM

28
 2. CONFIGURATION AND INSTALLATION OF
B–62884EN/01 PACKAGE

(c) Message conversion tools (For details, see Appendix F.)

· _CHGMES.EXE

2.6.2 A sequence program, which is object of editing and printing, is called

The Constitution of source program and managed by storing in files below.
Source Program J in case of named “C:¥DATA¥SAMPLE” as source program

C:¥
data¥

om
· SAMPLE.ERR execution result file (Note 1)
· SAMPLE.MAP map file (Note 1)

SAMPLE¥

r.c
· CONTROL Source program managing file
· SYSPARAM System parameter data file
· TITLE Title data file
· XSYMBOL.xxx Symbol & Comment data file (Note 2)

e
· MESSAGE Message data file
· IOMODULE I/O module data file
nt · LEVEL1. #LA
· LEVEL2. #LA
· LEVEL3. #LA
1st level ladder data file
2nd level ladder data file
3rd level ladder data file (Note 3)
ce
· Pyyy. #LA Sub-program ladder data file (Note 4)
· Pzzz. #SS Sub-program step sequence data file(Note 4)
· NETCMT.xxx Net comment data file (Note 2)
· MCARD Memory card format data file
nc

Notes
1. Contain source program compile/decompile results and map
information. These files are not included in a source program, but
.c

are named in accordance with the name of the source program.

These files are stored under the directory one level above the
source program storage directory.
w

2. ”xxx” is number of multi file managing.

3. Only for using LEVEL-3 ladder.
w

4. ”yyy”, ”zzz” is number of sub-program.

w

29
3. OPERATION B–62884EN/01

3 OPERATION

om
e r.c
nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w

30
B–62884EN/01 3. OPERATION

3.1
STARTING THE 1 Starting the Ladder Editing Package from the DOS command line
LADDER EDITING (1) Move to the drive and directory where the system software of the
Ladder Editing Package is installed.
PACKAGE
(2) Key in “FLADDER Enter .”
Example:Starting the Ladder Editing Package when the package
is installed under the ¥FANUC¥LEP directory of drive
C.

om
A : ¥>C : Enter

C : ¥>CD ¥FANUC¥LEP Enter

C : ¥FANUC¥LEP>FLADDER Enter

r.c
(3) The on–line functions are activated as soon as the Ladder Editing
Package is started.

e
DOS prompt

nt Start (command name FLADDER)

ce
On–line functions Off–line functions
End
End
nc

Note
If “Interface Type 1” is selected at installation, the Ladder
Editing Package will not operate normally if the package is
.c

started from the Windows DOS prompt. If “Interface Type

1” is selected at installation, first terminate Windows, then
start the Ladder Editing Package from the DOS command
w

line.
w

2 Starting the Ladder Editing Package from Windows

(1) To start the system software of the Ladder Editing Package when
the package is installed under Windows, double–click the
w

corresponding icon. Once the Ladder Editing Package has been

started, the on–line functions are activated.

31
3. OPERATION B–62884EN/01

(Reference)

OPEN CNC, DOS/Windows, Ladder Editing Package,

extended driver/library

Install DOS/Windows

om
Incorporate device driver (Modification
of CONFIG.SYS and AUTOEXEC.BAT)

r.c
Install extended driver/library disk or driver library disk installation,
and incorporate driver

e
Install Ladder Editing Package

nt Start Ladder Editing Package

ce
Operate Ladder Editing Package
nc

NO
End?
.c

YES

Termination of Ladder Editing Package

w

Fig.3.1 Flow of Operations Required to Start the Ladder Editing Package

w

3 Terminating the Ladder Editing Package

w

The Ladder Editing Package can be terminated in either of the

following two ways.
(1) Select [Exit] from the pull–down menu for [1.File] of the on–line
functions.
See Section 3.4 for an explanation of on–line function menu
selection.
(2) Select [Exit] from the off–line function menu.
See Section 3.5 for an explanation of off–line function menu
selection.

32
B–62884EN/01 3. OPERATION

3.2
OVERVIEW OF
OPERATION

3.2.1 The menu screens displayed by the system are structured as shown below.
Menu Structure

om
Start

1
On–line function File Save PMC parameter
Restore PMC parameter

r.c
Off–line function (1) See Fig. 3.2.1(b)

MS–DOS
Exit
2

e
Diagnose Ladder monitoring/On–line editing
Signal trigger/Ladder debug
Signal status
nt PMC parameter
PMC alarm status
PMC status
Timer
Counter
Keep relay
Data table control
ce
RUN/STOP the program Data table
Signal Trace
Signal Analysis
System information
3
nc

I/O Load program

Store program
Backup program
4 Commu-
.c

Communication
nication
w

Fig.3.2.1(a) Menu Structure (1)

w
w

33
3. OPERATION B–62884EN/01

F1
(1) Off–line function EDIT Title
Ladder diagram/
F2 Step sequence
PRINT Title Symbol & comment
Parameter Message
F3 Symbol I/O module
COMPILE Ladder diagram System parameter
Step sequence
F4 I/O module

om
DECOMPILE Message
Cross reference list
F5 Bit address map
I/O FA writer
PMC writer
F6 PMC

r.c
PROGRAM Handy File
OPTION SET–UP Memory card
Backup
ROM format file
F7

e
MNEMONIC EDIT Source program → mnemonic file
Mnemonic file → source program
F8 nt UTILITY
Execute user batch files
Dos
Floadat
View result
F9
ce
ON–LINE Linker
FUNCTION

F10
END
nc

Fig.3.2.1(b) Menu Structure (2)

.c
w
w
w

34
B–62884EN/01 3. OPERATION

3.3 The operations described below are common operations.

COMMON SYSTEM (1) Function keys
When the menu items shown below are displayed in reverse video,
OPERATIONS the user can select the desired menu item by pressing the
corresponding function key.

1 EDIT 2 PRINT 3 COMPIL 4 DECOMP 5 I/O 6 SET–UP 7 MNEEDT 8 UTILTY 9 ONLINE 10 END

[F1] [F2] [F3] [F4] [F5] [F6] [F7] [F8] [F9] [F10]

(2) Escape key

om
The escape key Esc has the same effect as selecting [END] with the
function key. The escape key terminates the current screen then
returns the display to the previous screen in the menu hierarchy.
(3) Cursor keys
The cursor keys , , , and are used to move the

r.c
cursor to select input items.
When two or more cursors can be used on a single screen, the second
or subsequent cursor can be moved by pressing the Shift key together

e
with the or key.

(4) Scroll keys

nt Page Page
The scroll keys Down and Up display the next page and the previous
page, respectively.
ce
(5) [INS] key
This key switches between the overwrite mode <O> and insert mode
<I>.
(6) [TAB] key
nc

When multipul keys are displayed, press Tab key and select one
button.
(7) Status line
A status line is displayed at the top of the screen.
.c

Main menu PMC–RB3 <O> [C : ¥FLADDER ]

w

Current
Item name PMC Model directory name
w

Edit mode (Overwrite/insert)

Note
w

The indications on the key tops may slightly vary from the
descriptions of this manual, depending on the personal
computer used.

(8) Pop–up menu

When the following pop–up menu appears, the desired process can
be selected using any of the three methods described below.

35
3. OPERATION B–62884EN/01

The file already exists.

F1 Update
F2 Quit
F3 Append

1) Cursor movement
To select an item, press the cursor key or , such that
the item to be selected is displayed in reverse video. Then,
pressing the Enter key selects that item.

om
2) Function key
A function key is indicated at the left of each item. To select an
item, press the corresponding function key.
3) Command name
An uppercase letter in (usually, the initial of) an item name is the

r.c
command name. In the above case, pressing the letter key U ,

Q , or A can select the Update, Quit, or Append command,

respectively.

e
(9) Pull–down menus
On some screens, the following menu bar is displayed along the top
ntof the screen

I1. File 2. Diagnose 3. I/O 4. Communication

ce
Function number.
function name Icon for
PMC status indication
(See the section explan-
nc

ing how to start the on–

line functions.)

Pressing the Alt key displays the pull–down menu for I1. File
.c

The pull–down menu for a function can also be displayed by pressing

the Alt key and the corresponding function number simultaneously.
w

I1. File 2. Diagnose 3. I/O 4. Communication

File save
w

Exit
w

Using the cursor keys, position the highlight to the desired item on
a function’s pull–down menu. A menu item with an arrow mark ( )
at its right edge has its own pull–down menu, which can be displayed
by pressing the key.

The target screen is displayed by pressing the Enter key after

positioning the highlight to a desired menu item.

36
B–62884EN/01 3. OPERATION

3.4
ON–LINE FUNCTIONS

3.4.1
Overview of the
On–Line Functions

3.4.1.1 The on–line functions are used to perform ladder and signal status

om
Outline monitoring, display, and modification on the OPEN CNC screen.
[Menu structure]
(1) [1.File] menu
With this menu, the user can write to and read from a file on hard disk
or floppy disk, switch between functions, and terminate processing.

r.c
(2) [2.Diagnose] menu
With this menu, the user can display the PMC status and perform
editing for PMC status display.
(3) [3.I/O] menu

e
With this menu, the user can write programs to and read programs
from the PMC.
nt
(4) [4.Communication] menu
With this menu, the user can establish communications for PMC
status display and PMC operation.
ce
Ladder Editing Package PMC
1) Starting the Ladder Editing Package
2) Loading programs from the PMC (automatic)
nc

[When programs have already been loaded]

A comparison is automatically made between the PMC programs
and those which have already been loaded.
<When a mismatch is found> Sequence program
.c

– Program load operation (RAM)

– Program store operation
4) Power ON
– Continuation or end
w

Sequence program
3) Sequence program (F–ROM)
3) Ladder monitoring
(RAM)
w

4) On–line functions 4) 3)
– Diagnosis
w

– I/O (Program load/store, writing to

F–ROM)
– Communication (with the PMC)
– Off–line function selection
File

– Relay comment
– Net comment

Fig.3.4.1.1 Overview of On–Line Functions

37
3. OPERATION B–62884EN/01

3.4.1.2
Starting the On–Line The use of the on–line functions is automatically enabled when the system
Functions is started. Alternatively, the use of the on–line functions can be selected
in off–line mode. For an explanation of on–line function selection in
off–line mode, see Section 3.5.
(1) Moving to the ladder monitoring screen
To move from an on–line function to the ladder monitoring screen,
follow the procedure given below. On the ladder monitoring screen,
select the desired function from the pull–down menu or press the

om
corresponding function key.
[Moving to the ladder monitoring screen]
Reference section
1) Starting the system/on–line function selection
2) Work program compilation/decompilation See Appendix B.

r.c
(started only when required)
↓
3) Communication with the PMC See Section 3.4.5.
(automatic)
↓

e
4) Monitoring method selection
nt (started only when required)
– Program load operation See Section 3.4.4.1.
– Program store operation See Section 3.4.4.2.
↓
ce
5) Ladder monitoring
Subprogram screen display (automatic)
↓ See Section
Subprogram selection 3.4.3.1.
nc

↓
Ladder monitor screen display

Each screen is explained below. For details, see the related section.
.c

(a) Work program compilation

If a source program that was edited off–line has not yet been
compiled, the following message appears.
w

Source program has updated. Compile it ? (Y/N)

w

If an on–line function is to be used for an edited program, enter

Y. For details, see Appendix B.
(b) Work program decompilation
w

If a source program that was acquired with the off–line I/O

function has not yet been decompiled, the following message is
displayed.

Memory card format file has been updated. Decompile it ? (Y/N)

If an on–line function is to be used for a program acquired with

the I/O function, enter Y. For details, see Appendix B.

38
B–62884EN/01 3. OPERATION

(c) Communication with the PMC

Selecting “ON–LINE FUNCTION” causes the online monitor
screen (“SET COMMUNICATION” dialog box) to appear as
shown below. Communication with the PMC starts
automatically.

1. File 2. Diagnose 3. I/O 4. Communication

Communication

om
Status

Start

Cancel

r.c
Try to connect with PMC ... 0000 0000

F7 F8 F9 F10
Splist Search Symbol Setting

e
Fig.3.4.1.2 (a)
nt(d) Selecting a monitoring method
When communication with the PMC starts normally, the
program is compared with that held on the PMC. If the programs
ce
do not match, the dialog box shown below appears.
Select a desired function.
[LOAD] : A program is loaded from PMC memory
and the program is overwritten.
nc

[STORE] : The program is stored to the PMC. The

program replaces the program already on
the PMC.
[CONTINUE] : The ladder monitor screen appears, but the
program already on the PMC is not
.c

replaced. Note that ladder monitor

display is not performed correctly.
[END] : The on–line function terminates.
w
w
w

39
3. OPERATION B–62884EN/01

N : E–3160 Selected program is not same.

Load Load from PMC program memory.

Store Store to PMC program memory.

om
Disregard Disregard difference.

Qiut Quit On –Line function.

r.c
Fig.3.4.1.2 (b)

e
Note
If the program does not match the program on the PMC the
nt
dialog box shown above appears. This occurs, for example,
when a single program is modified by means of off–line
editing.
When the on–line monitor function is started for a program
ce
that is loaded or stored, the dialog box does not appear.
Instead, the subprogram selection screen appears
immediately.
nc

(e) Loading from the PMC

After communication with the PMC starts normally, the “SET
COMMUNICATION” dialog box closes automatically and the
“LOAD FROM PMC” dialog box is opened in its place.
.c
w

Load Program

Transfer data type

w

F LADDER f ALL

0% 100%
w

Exec Abort Cancel

Fig.3.4.1.2 (c)

40
B–62884EN/01 3. OPERATION

(f) Displaying the “SUBPROGRAM” dialog box (Ladder monitor

function)
Once a program is loaded from the PMC, the “SUBPROGRAM”
dialog box for the ladder monitor function appears. Specify the
subprogram to be monitored in the dialog box as described
below:

Note
The on–line monitoring function of a step sequence
program is not supported.

om
[Operation]
1) Position the cursor to the desired subprogram by pressing the
or key.

r.c
2) Press the Enter key.
3) The ladder diagram for the selected subprogram appears.

Sub–program list

e
ntLEVEL 1
LEVEL2
P00001 (OPEN RIGHT DOOR) MOVE RIGHT DOOR TO LIMIT–SWIIT–R1
P00002 (OPEN LEFT DOOR) MOVE LEFT DOOR TO LIMIT–SWIIT–L1
ce
S P00010 (GRIP WORK PIECE) PICK UP A WORK ON THE STAND
P00011 (PUT WORK PIECE) PUT DOWN A WORK
P00021 (CLOSE RIGHT DOOR) MOVE RIGHT DOOR TO LIMIT–SWTH–R2
P00022 (CLOSE LEFT DOOR) MOVE LEFT DOOR TO LIMIT–SWTH L2
nc

Ok Cancel
.c

Fig.3.4.1.2 (d)
w

(2) Displaying the PMC status (icon)

The on–line function indicates the current PMC statuses, using icons
at the right end of the status line.
w

(a) Display positions and types of icons

w

Displayed position
of icon

1. File 2. Diagnose 3. I/O 4. Communication

1) 2) 3)

Fig.3.4.1.2 (e)

41
3. OPERATION B–62884EN/01

1) PMC alarm status

The following icon indicates whether the PMC is in the alarm
state.

Yellow : Alarm exists on PMC

Gray : Alarm not exists on PMC

om
Fig.3.4.1.2 (f)

2) Ladder execution status

r.c
The following icon indicates whether a ladder program is
running.

e
nt Program on
PMC is running.
Program on
PMC is stopped.
ce
Fig.3.4.1.2 (g)
nc

3) PMC communication status

The following icon indicates whether a communication link
with the PMC is established.
.c
w

Communication Communication
w

is active. is not active.

w

Fig.3.4.1.2 (h)

42
B–62884EN/01 3. OPERATION

3.4.2
File

3.4.2.1 While communicating with PMC, PMC parameters can be saved to a file.
Saving PMC Parameter To use this function while running a ladder program, turn the CNC to
EDIT mode. If not running, you can use this function at any time.
(1) Menu position
Pull down [1.File] menu, and select [Save PMC parameter] on the

om
menu.

1. File

Save PMC parameter

r.c
Restore PMC parameter
Off-Line Function
MS DOS
Exit

e
Fig.3.4.2.1 (a)

nt
(2) Dialog box view
ce
— Save PMC parameter

File name

C:\DATA\PMC_PRM Input a
nc

saving
file name.
0% 100%
.c

Exec Abort Cancel

w

Execute saving Abort saving Close dialog box

Fig.3.4.2.1 (b)
w

(3) Operation
At first, specify the saving file name. ‘PMC_PRM’ is initially
w

displayed as a default file name.

It is possible to change the saving directory and the file name.
(a) Select [Exec]
PMC parameter is saved and the dialog box closes.
(b) Select [abort] (during a file saving)
Saving is stopped.
(c) Select [Cancel]
PMC parameter is not saved and the dialog box closes.

43
3. OPERATION B–62884EN/01

(4) Message
Message Meaning and countermeasure
File already exists. Same file name exists.
Overwrite? Select [Yes] to overwrite.
Select [No] to cancel saving.

3.4.2.2 While communicating with PMC, PMC parameters can be restored from
Restoring PMC a file.
To use this function while running a ladder program, turn the CNC to

om
Parameter
EMERGENCY
STOP and set PWE(CNC parameter) to “1” on the CNC.
If not running, you can use this function at any time.
(1) Menu position
Pull down [1.File] menu, and select [Restore PMC parameter] on the

r.c
menu.

1. File

e
Save PMC parameter

nt Restore PMC parameter

Off-Line Function
MS DOS
Exit
ce
Fig.3.4.2.2 (a)

(2) Dialog box view

nc

— Restore PMC parameter

File name
.c

C:\DATA\PMC_PRM Input a
restoring
file name.
w

0% 100%
w

Exec Abort Cancel

w

Execute restoring Abort restoring Close dialog box

Fig.3.4.2.2 (b)

(3) Operation
At first, specify a restoring file name.“PMC_PRM” is initially
displayed as a default file name.
It is possible to change the restoring directory and the file name.

44
B–62884EN/01 3. OPERATION

(a) Select [Exec]

PMC parameter is restored and the dialog box closes.
(b) Select [Abort] (during a file saving)
Restoring is stopped.
(c) Select [Cancel]
PMC parameter is not restored and the dialog box closes.

3.4.2.3 The Off-Line function can be selected from the On-Line function. For
Selecting Off–Line details, see “3.5 Off-Line Function”.

om
Function from On–Line (1) Menu position
Function To use “Off-Line Function”, pull down [1. File] menu, and select
[Off-Line Function] on the menu.

r.c
1. File

Save PMC parameter

Restore PMC parameter
Off-Line Function

e
MS DOS
Exit

nt Fig.3.4.2.3
ce
3.4.2.4 An MS–DOS command can be executed without terminating on–line
MS–DOS mode.
(1) Menu position
nc

To use MS–DOS, select [1.File] from the pull–down menu, then

select MS–DOS. (The MS–DOS prompt appears.)
The user can return to on–line mode by executing the EXIT command
from the MS–DOS prompt.
.c

1. File
w

Save PMC parameter

Restore PMC parameter
Off-Line Function
w

MS DOS
Exit
w

Fig.3.4.2.4

45
3. OPERATION B–62884EN/01

3.4.2.5 This function is used to finish On-Line Function.

Exit (1) Menu position
Pull down [1. File] menu, and select [Exit] on the menu.

1. File

Save PMC parameter

Restore PMC parameter

om
Off-Line Function
MS DOS
Exit

Fig.3.4.2.5(a)

r.c
(2) Dialog box view

e
Are you sure you want to exit ?

nt Ok Cancel
ce
Fig.3.4.2.5(b)

(3) Operation
nc

(a) Push [OK] button.

1) Online function ends.
2) When there are any modifications which have not been
preserved by F7 [UPDATE] on the online editor, this “File
.c

save” operation is canceled. And the following dialog box

appears.
w

Ladder diagram has been modified

w

Sure to quit ?
w

Yes No

Fig.3.4.2.5(c)

[Yes]: The modifications by on-line editor is canceled and On-Line

Function ends.
[No] : Cancel to [Exit].

46
B–62884EN/01 3. OPERATION

3.4.3 [2. Diagnose] menu contains the menu items as shown below.
Diagnose
2. Diagnose

Ladder Monitor for “Ladder Monitor” /“Online Editor” window

Signal Status for “Signal status” window
PMC Parameter for sub-menu of “PMC Parameter” windows
PMC alarm status for “PMC alarm message” dialog box

om
PMC Status for “PMC Status” window
RUN/STOP the program for “RUN/STOP the program” dialog box
Signal Trace for “Signal Trace” dialog box
Signal Analysis for “Signal Analysis” dialog box
System Information for “System Information” dialog box

r.c
3.4.3.1 To select the ladder monitor screen, select [2. Diagnose] to display a pull-down
menu, then select [Ladder Monitor].

e
Ladder Monitor
For [Ladder Monitor], both the ladder monitor function and on-line edit
function can be used.
nt
ce
3.4.3.1.1 (a) Configuration of the ladder monitor screen
The ladder monitor screen is shown below.
Ladder monitor On the ladder monitor screen, signal statuses are indicated as shown
below.
1) Displaying signal statuses
nc

STATUS : OFF
(Thin line)
.c

STATUS : ON
w

(Thick line)
w
w

47
3. OPERATION B–62884EN/01

ÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔ
ÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔ
1. File 2. Diagnose 3. I/O 4. Communication

ÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔ
Ladder Monitor !!!!!!!!!!!!!!
Signal Status
[LEVEL1] NET 00001–00006

ÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔ
PMC Parameter
D000 PMC alarm status R0000.1

Ô
ÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔ
PMC Status
RUN/STOP the program

Ô
ÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔ
D000 Signal Trace R0000.0
Signal Analysis
System Information

SUB 1
END1

om
SUB 2
END2

SUB 64
END

F7 F8 F9 F10
SpList Search Symbol Seting

r.c
Shift +

e
S+F8
S–Set

Fig.3.4.3.1.1(a)
nt
(b) Ladder monitor function
The table below lists the operations performed by the ladder monitor
function.
ce
Operation group Function Key to be used Reference
Cursor movement Moving the cursor up or
down
nc

Moving the cursor to the

Home
beginning of the ladder
program
Moving the cursor to the
End
end of the ladder program
.c

Moving the cursor to the

previous page 
w

Moving the cursor to the


next page

SpList Listing subprograms and F7 : [SpList] (c)

w

selecting a subprogram
Search Searching for data F8 : [Search] (d)
w

Entering the search data (d)

Shift + F8

Symbol Displaying the symbol or F9 : [Symbol] (e)

comment defined at a
specified address
Setting Switching between ladder F10 : [Setting] (f)
monitor and on-line
editing, switching
between symbol display
and comment display

48
B–62884EN/01 3. OPERATION

(c) Selecting a subprogram (F7 [SpList])

A ladder program is monitoried and edited in units of subprograms.
This function is uesd to list existing subprograms and to select the
subporgram to be displayed.

Note
The on–line monitoring function of a step sequence program is not
supported.
The subprogram of a step sequence program is not selected.

om
1) Subprogram list display screen
Pressing F7 [SpList] causes a window to be displayed, as shown
below. Select the program to be displayed by pressing a cursor
Page Page
key or the Up , Down keys then the Enter key.

r.c
Sub–program list

LEVEL 1

e
LEVEL2
P00001 (OPEN RIGHT DOOR) MOVE RIGHT DOOR TO LIMIT–SWIIT–R1

ntP00002 (OPEN LEFT DOOR)

S P00010 (GRIP WORK PIECE)
P00011 (PUT WORK PIECE)
MOVE LEFT DOOR TO LIMIT–SWIIT–L1
PICK UP A WORK ON THE STAND
PUT DOWN A WORK
P00021 (CLOSE RIGHT DOOR) MOVE RIGHT DOOR TO LIMIT–SWTH–R2
ce
P00022 (CLOSE LEFT DOOR) MOVE LEFT DOOR TO LIMIT–SWTH L2
nc

Ok Cancel

Fig.3.4.3.1.1(b)
.c

2) Display information
The following information appears on the subprogram screen.
w

Ladder (No mark)

w

Step Sequence
(S mark)

ÔÔÔ
LEVEL 1
w

ÔÔÔ
LEVEL2
P00001 (OPEN RIGHT DOOR) MOVE RIGHT DOOR TO LIMIT–SWIIT–R1

ÔÔÔ ÔÔ
P00002 (OPEN LEFT DOOR) MOVE LEFT DOOR TO LIMIT–SWIIT–L1

ÔÔ
ÔÔÔÔÔ
S P00010 (GRIP WORK PIECE) PICK UP A WORK ON THE STAND

ÔÔ ÔÔ
Sub–program No. Symbol
ÔÔ
Coil comment

Fig.3.4.3.1.1(c)

49
3. OPERATION B–62884EN/01

(d) Searching for data (F8 [SEARCH])/Entering the search data ( Shift +
F8 )
1) Searching for data (F8 [SEARCH])
A search for a net starts when the F8 key is pressed after the
search data has been entered.
If the F8 key is pressed without specifying any search data, a
search is made for the data set specified in 2) below, ”Entering

om
search data” (see (b)).
A search can be made for several types of data, as described
below:
D Address/symbol
Searching for an address: “address” + F8

r.c
Example) “X0000.0”+ F8

Searching for a symbol: “symbol” + F8

Example) “SYMBOL1”+ F8

e
D Functional instruction number/name
nt Searching for a number: “S”+“functional–
instruction–number”+ F8

Example) “S1”+ F8
ce
Searching for a name: “functional–instruction–
name” + F8
nc

Example) “END1”+ F8

D Net number: “net–number”+ F8

Example) “10”+ F8
.c

2) Entering search data ( Shift + F8 )

Data for which a search is to be made by means of operation 1),
w

described above, can be registered. To repeatedly search for

identical data, use this function. While this function is active, the
following dialog box appears.
w

To position the cursor to another item, press the Tab key. To

change the setting, press the or key.

w

50
B–62884EN/01 3. OPERATION

Search

Search Data : Data Kind

F ADDR/SYMBOL
X0000. 0 f WRT–COIL
f FUNCTION
f NET–NO

om
OK Cancel

r.c
Fig.3.4.3.1.1(d)

D SEARCH DATA Enter the search data:

address, symbol, net number, functional instruction

e
name, functional instruction number (number only,
without S)
nt D DATA TYPE Select the type of the search data.
(e) Displaying a symbol (F9 [SYMBOL])
This function displays the symbol or comment defined at a specified
ce
address. When F9 is pressed, the following dialog box appears.
nc

Symbol & Comment Display

Address [ ] Relay Comment [ ]

.c

Symbol [ ] Coil Comment [ ]

w

OK Cancel
w

Fig.3.4.3.1.1(e)
w

D ADDRESS : Enter the address of the symbol or

comment to be displayed.
D SYMBOL : The symbol at the specified address
is appears.
D RELAY COMMENT : The relay comment at the specified
address appears.
D COIL COMMENT : The coil comment at the specified
address appears.

51
3. OPERATION B–62884EN/01

(f) Setting a function (F10 [SET])

This function includes the following:
D LADDER MODE:
Switching between ladder monitor and on–line editing.
For details of the on–line function, see (2), “On–line
editing” in this section.
D SYMBOL & COMMENT DISPLAY:
Selecting the address display mode in ladder monitoring
or on–line editing
Three types of data can be displayed: address, symbol,
and relay comment.

om
D FUNCTION PARAMETER:
Selecting whether the parameters of functional
instructions are to be displayed
When the F10 key is pressed, the dialog box shown below appears:

r.c
To move the cursor to another item, press the Tab key. To change

the setting, press the or key.

e
Display setting
nt Ladder Mode
F Ladder Monitor f Online Editor
ce
f Signal Trigger f Debug Ladder

Symbol & Comment Display

F Symbol
f Address
nc

f Relay Comment
f Symbol & Address
OK
f Relay Comment & Address
f Relay Comment & Symbol
.c

Function Paramareter Cancel

V Display
w

Fig.3.4.3.1.1(f)
w
w

52
B–62884EN/01 3. OPERATION

3.4.3.1.2 To select the “Online Editor” screen, select [Ladder monitor] from the [2.
On–line editing Diagnose] pull–down menu, then press F10 : [Setting]. The “Display
setting” dialog box appears. In the dialog box, select [Online Editor].

Display setting

Ladder Mode
f Ladder Monitor F Online Editor

om
f Signal Trigger f Debug Ladder

Symbol & Comment Display

F Symbol
f Address
f Relay Comment
f Symbol & Address

r.c
f Relay Comment & Address OK
f Relay Comment & Symbol

Function Paramareter Cancel

V Display

e
nt Fig.3.4.3.1.2(a)

(a) Configuration of the on–line edit screen

ce
The configuration of the on–line edit screen is as shown below:
nc
.c
w
w
w

53
3. OPERATION B–62884EN/01

1. File 2. Diagnose 3. I/O 4. Communication

Online Editor

[LEVEL1] NET 00001–00006

X0000.0 Y0000.0

X0000.1 X0000.2 Y0000.1

X0001.0 Y0000.2
(S)
X0001.1 Y0000.2
(R)

om
SUB 1
END1

SUB 2
END2

SUB 64

r.c
END

X0000.0 ←(*1)

e
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10
(S) Functn Update Search Symbol Seting

nt Shift +
ce
S+F1 S+F2 S+F3 S+F7 S+F8
(R) Undo S–SET

Ctrl +
nc

C+F1N C+F2L C+F3 C+F4 C+F5 C+F6 C+F7

etIns inIns ElmIns Select Cut Copy paste

Fig.3.4.3.1.2(b)
.c

1) Key input line display(*1)

The most recently entered contact or coil is displayed. If the
display of an address and a contact or coil is selected, pressing
w

the Enter key causes a single contact or coil to be set in the ladder
diagram.
w

(b) On–line editing

On–line editing operations (1)
w

Operation
Function Key to be used Reference
group
Input mode Insert mode (C) 1)
Insert
modification Enabling/Cancelling
Insert mode (C) 2)
Delete
Enabling/Cancelling

Contact/coil input (d) 1)

F1
input

54
B–62884EN/01 3. OPERATION

Operation
Function Key to be used Reference
group
Contact/coil input (d) 2)
input Shift + F1

input (d) 3)
F2

input (d) 4)
Shift + F2

(S)
input (d) 5)
F3

om
(R)
input (d) 6)
Shift + F3

Selecting a contact/coil , (d) 7)

Tab

r.c
Shift + Tab

Changing an address (d) 8)

only “address” + Enter

e
Entering a contact/coil (d) 9)
Enter

nt
Functional Entering a
instruction input instruction
functional functional–

+
instruction–number

F6
(d) 10)
ce
Line connection “ ” input (e) 1)
F4

“ ” input (e) 2)
F5
nc

Line deletion “ ” deletion (e) 1)

Delete mode + F4

“ ” deletion (e) 2)
Delete mode + F5
.c

Net, line, Inserting a net (f) 1)

Ctrl + F1
element
w

insertion
Inserting a line (f) 2)
Ctrl + F2
w

Inserting a element (f) 3)

Ctrl + F3
w

Cut and paste Specifying a range (g) 1)

function Ctrl + F4

Cutting a net (g) 2)

Ctrl + F5

Copying a net (g) 3)

Ctrl + F6

Pasting a net (g) 4)

Ctrl + F7

55
3. OPERATION B–62884EN/01

On–line editing operations (2)

Operation
Function Key to be used Reference
group
Cursor Moving the cursor up or (h) 1)
,
movement down

Moving the cursor to the (h) 2)

,
left or right

Moving the cursor to the (h) 3)

beginning of the ladder Home

program

om
Moving the cursor to the (h) 4)
end of the ladder End

program
Moving the cursor to the Page
(h) 5)
previous page Up

r.c
Moving the cursor to the Page (h) 6)
next page Down

Search Searching for data F8 : [Search] See (1),

“Ladder
Entering the search data

e
Shift + F8 monitor.”

Symbol Displaying the symbol or F9 : [Symbol] See (1),

nt
Setting
comment defined at a
specified address
Switching between F10 :[Setting]
“Ladder
monitor.”
See (1),
ce
ladder monitor and “Ladder
on–line editing, switching monitor.”
between symbol display
and comment display,
etc.
nc

Others Updating the ladder F7 : [UPDATE] (i) 1)

program
Restoring the ladder (i) 2)
program to the state Shift + F7

existing prior to editing

.c

(c) Changing the input mode

To change the input mode on the edit screen, use the following keys.
w

The current input mode is displayed at the bottom right corner of the
screen. When nothing is displayed, it indicates that overwrite mode
is selected (default).
w

1) Insert mode
Key : Insert
w

Function : When a contact or coil is entered in this mode,the

contact or coil is inserted at the cursor position.
Cancel : Press the Insert key in insert mode.
2) Delete mode
Key : Delete

Function : When the line connect function is used in this

mode,data at the cursor position is deleted.

56
B–62884EN/01 3. OPERATION

Cancel : Press the Delete key in delete mode.

(d) Input Contact/Coil

To input a contact or coil, register the input element in the key input
line, then press the Enter key.
The registered element is added to the ladder diagram. The following
keys are used for this operation:
[Keys used for registration]
1) Set

om
Key : F1

Function : Set at the input line.

An addressed is input to the key input line by entering
an address and pressing the F1 key.

r.c
2) Set
Key : Shift + F1

e
Function : Set at the input line.
An addressed is input to the key input line by entering
nt an address and pressing the
3) Set
Shift and F1 keys.
ce
Key : F2

Function : Set at the input line.

An addressed is input to the key input line by entering
nc

an address and pressing the F2 key.

4) Set
Key : Shift + F2
.c

Function : Set at the input line.

An addressed is input to the key input line by entering
w

an address and pressing the Shift and F2 keys.

5) Set (S)
w

Key : F3

Function : Set (S) at the input line.

w

An addressed (S) is input to the key input line by entering

an address and pressing the F3 key.
6) Set (R)

Key : Shift + F3

Function : Set (R) at the input line.

An addressed (R) is input to the key input line by entering
an address and is pressing the Shift and F3 keys.

57
3. OPERATION B–62884EN/01

7) Select Contact/Coil
Key : Tab , Shift + Tab

Function : Select Contact/Coil at the input line.

Tab changes Contact/Coil in the input line to the

forward direction. Shift + Tab changes reverse.

The contacts and coils are displayed in the order
indicated below:

om
[ ] [ / ]

r.c
[ ] [ ]

e
nt [ ÁÁ (S) ] [ ÁÁ
(R) ]
ce
8) Change address only
Key : ‘address’+ Enter
nc

Function : Change address on ladder diagram without changing

input line.
The contact or coil at the cursor position is modified.
[Input Key]
.c

9) Input Contact/Coil
Key : Enter
w

Function : Write Contact/Coil which is set at input line to ladder

diagram.
(e) Connect/delete line
w

1) Input ‘___’
Key : F4
w

Function : Input horizontal line. If in the delete mode, delete

Contact/Coil or horizontal line.
2) Entering “|”
Key : F5

Function : A vertical line is entered to the right of the cursor

position. In delete mode, a vertical line is deleted.

58
B–62884EN/01 3. OPERATION

(f) Inserting a net, line, or element

1) Inserting a net
Key : Ctrl + F1 [Netlns]
Function : Inserts a single blank net after the net at the cursor
position.
2) Inserting a line
Key : Ctrl + F2 [Lilns]
Function : Inserts a single blank line under the line to which the

om
cursor is positioned.
3) Inserting an element
Key : Ctrl + F3 [Elmlns]
Function : Inserts a single blank element at the cursor position.

r.c
(g) Cut and paste function
1) Specifying a range
Key : Ctrl + F4 [Select]

e
Function : Specifies the range to be cut or copied. The range is
specified by means of the following procedure:
nt i) Position the cursor to the first net in the desired
range.
ce
ii) Press the Ctrl and F4 keys. (SEL is displayed
at the bottom right corner of the screen.)
iii) Position the cursor to the last net in the desired
range.
nc

Cutting and copying of a specified net range is

explained in 2) or 3) below.
Cancel : Press the Ctrl and F4 keys in range mode.
.c

2) Cutting a net
Key : Ctrl + F5 [Cut]
w

Function : Cuts a net. When a net range is specified, the

specified net range is cut. The cut portion is saved in
w

the buffer for subsequent pasting.

3) Copying a net
w

Key : Ctrl + F6 [Copy]

Function : Copies a net into the buffer for subsequent pasting.
When a net range is specified, the specified range is
copied.
4) Pasting a net
Key : Ctrl + F7 [Paste]
Function : Writes a net that was previously cut or copied and
saved into the buffer.

59
3. OPERATION B–62884EN/01

(h) Cursor
1) Move cursor Up/Down
Key : ,

Function : Up/Down cursor, When press at the top of the

screen or press at the bottom of the screen, the

screen scrolls.
2) Move cursor to Left/Right

om
Key : ,

Function : Move cursor to the left/light. When pressing at

the left end of the screen, the cursor moves to one line

r.c
above and right end. When pressing at the right
end of the screen, the cursor moves one line below and
left end.
At the top.bottom of the screen, the screen scrolls.

e
3) Move to the top of ladder

nt Key : Home

Function : Move cursor to the top of ladder.

4) Move cursor to the bottom of ladder
ce
Key : End

Function : Move cursor to the bottom of ladder.

5) Previous page
nc

Page
Key : Up

Function : Go to the previous page.

.c

6) Next page
Page
Key : Down
w

Function : Go to the next page.

(i) Others
1) Update
w

Key : F7
w

Function : Update the modification to the ladder diagram on

PMC.

Note
When the [UPDATE] function is used, the ladder program
on the PMC is modified.
Before executing this function, check whether modification
of the ladder program is permitted.

60
B–62884EN/01 3. OPERATION

2) Undo
Key : Shift + F7

Function : Restore ladder diagram just before the last update

F7 .

Note
Applying the [Undo] function causes the effects of editing
since the last update to be lost.

om
3.4.3.1.3 (1) Outline of Signal Trigger Function
Signal trigger function The ladder monitor display is stopped when the specified signal

r.c
changes. And the signal state of the ladder can be confirmed.
(2) Operations
(a) Selection of Signal Trigger Screen
Please select “Signal Trigger” of Ladder Mode by “Displaying

e
setting” dialog (F10 key) of the Ladder Monitor screen.

nt Display setting
ce
Ladder Mode
f Ladder Monitor f Online Editor
F Signal Trigger f Debug Ladder

Symbol & Comment Display

nc

F Symbol
f Address
f Relay Comment
f Symbol & Address
f Relay Comment & Address OK
f Relay Comment & Symbol
.c

Function Paramareter Cancel

V Display
w
w
w

61
3. OPERATION B–62884EN/01

1. File 2. Diagnose 3. I/O 4. Communication

Signal Trigger
[LEVEL1] NET 00001–00006

X0000.0 X0000.1 X0000.2 X0000.3 X0000.4 X0000.5 X0000.6 Y0000.1 COMM

ENT–
G0500.3 R0900.0

X0010.7 Y0065.7

ÔÔÔ
X0012.5 Y0014.2

ÔÔÔ

om
SUB 1
END1

ÔÔÔ
ÔÔÔ
SUB 2
END2

TRIGGER * MODE:ON : X0000.0 : 0 : 65535/65535 * 1996/05/07 15:00:00

r.c
ÔÔ
F1 F2 F3 F7 F8 F9 F10
Exec Trgsrc Trgprm Splist Search Symbol seting

Stop

[Display of setting trigger]

e
” TRIGGER * MODE:ON : X0000.0: 0 :0000/12345 * 1995/12/20 13:20:59 ”

nt Stop time
COUNT:Trigger checking count
(default 1)
ce
POINT:Trigger checking point (default 0)
0 – the top of the 1st level (Default)
1 – after END1 execution
2 – after END2 execution
3 – after END3 execution
nc

ADR: Trigger setting address

ON:Rising edge detection
OFF:Falling edge detection

Fig.3.4.3.1.3 (a) Screen of Signal Trigger Function

.c

(b) Setting of signal trigger parameter

“Trigger Parameter” dialog is displayed by pressing the
w

F3“Trgprm”.
w
w

62
B–62884EN/01 3. OPERATION

[Trigger Parameter DIALOG]

Trigger Parameter

Address X1000.0

Check–Point
F Level1

om
f END1
f END2
f END3

Count 65535

r.c
Trigger–Mode
f ON
F OFF

e
OK Cancel Init
nt
ce
Please set the following items by “Trigger Parameter” dialog.
1) Address: Trigger address (Symbol is possible.)
2) Check Point: Trigger check point
LEVEL1(Default) the top of the 1st level (Default)
nc

END1 after END1 execution

END2 after END2 execution
END3 after END3 execution
3) Count: Trigger count(1 to 65535)
4) Trigger Mode: Trigger condition
.c

ON Rising edge detection

OFF Falling edge detection
When [Init] is selected, parameter and the display data are
w

initialized.
Please select [OK] when setting is completed.
w

Please select [Cancel] or press the Esc key when you cancel
setting.
(c) Starting or stopping signal trigger function
w

Please press F1“Exec” or “Stop” in Fig.3.4.3.1.3 (a).Screen of

Signal Trigger Function.
(d) Search of the instruction when the trigger condition was satisfied
Please press F2“T.Srch”.
The instruction when the trigger condition was satisfied is
displayed in blue.

63
3. OPERATION B–62884EN/01

3.4.3.1.4 (1) Outline of function

Ladder debugging Using this function, Step Operations and Stop Operations listed
below are possible. Step Operations are to execute ladder by
function specified step (single instruction, single net, and specified block).
Stop Operations are to stop the execution of ladder when specified
condition becomes true.
(1) Step Operation to execute one instruction from current position.
(2) Step Operation to execute one net (one circuit) from current
position.

om
(3) Step Operation to execute from current position to specified
contact or coil instruction.
(4) Stop Operation to execute from the first step and stop the
execution at specified contact or coil instruction.
(5) Stop Operation to stop the execution of ladder by a trigger of

r.c
signal condition. (Optionally, a trigger counter can be specified.)
(6) Stop Operation to stop the execution of ladder after executing one
scan. (Optionally, a scan counter can be specified.)

e
Warning
When executing or stopping a ladder program, special care
nt
is necessary. If this function is applied incorrectly, the
machine may act unpredictably.
Avoid using this function if personnel are present near the
ce
machine.

(2) Operations
(a) Selection of Ladder Debugging Screen
nc

Please select “Ladder Debug” of Ladder Mode by Displaying

setting dialog (F10) of the Ladder Monitor screen.
.c

Display setting

Ladder Mode
w

f Ladder Monitor f Online Editor

f Signal Trigger F Debug Ladder
w

Symbol & Comment Display

F Symbol
f Address
w

f Relay Comment
f Symbol & Address
f Relay Comment & Address OK
f Relay Comment & Symbol

Function Paramareter Cancel

V Display

64
B–62884EN/01 3. OPERATION

1) Step Operation to execute one instruction from current position.

1. File 2. Diagnose 3. I/O 4. Communication

Ladder Debug
[LEVEL1] NET 00001–00006

X0000.0 X0000.1 X0000.2 X0000.3 X0000.4 X0000.5 X0000.6 Y0000.1 COMM

ENT–
G0500.3 R0900.0

X0010.7 Y0065.7

om
ÔÔÔÔ
X0012.5 Y0014.2

ÔÔÔÔ
SUB 1
END1

ÔÔÔÔ
ÔÔÔÔ
SUB 2
END2

r.c
ACC : 1 STACK : 0000 0000 SF:0 ZF:1 OF:0

F1 F2 F3 F4 F7 F8 F9 F10
Step B.Srch Dbgprm Sync.B Splist Search Symbol Seting

e
[Displaying of Step]
nt ” ACC=1

ACC
STK=0000 0011 OF=0 SF=0 ZF=1 ”

: result of operation
ce
STK : contents of stack ( 1 byte )
OF : overflow ( 0=NO, 1=YES )
SF : sign ( 0=NO, 1=YES )
ZF : zero ( 0=NO, 1=YES )
nc

2) Step Operation to execute one net (one circuit) from current posi-
tion.
.c

ACC : 1 STACK : 0000 0000 SF:0 ZF:1 OF:0

F1 F2 F3 F4 F7 F8 F9 F10
Step B.Srch Dbgprm Sync.B Splist Search Symbol Seting
w

3) Step operation to execute from current position to specified contact

w

or coil instruction.
w

ACC : 1 STACK : 0000 0000 SF:0 ZF:1 OF:0

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F7 F8 F9 F10
Exec B.Srch Dbgprm Sync.B B.Strt Splist Search Symbol Seting
(Stop)

Fig.3.4.3.1.4 (a) Screen of Step Operation

65
3. OPERATION B–62884EN/01

1) Stop operation to stop the execution of ladder when a trigger condi-

tion specified by signal becomes true.

1. File 2. Diagnose 3. I/O 4. Communication

Ladder Debug
[LEVEL1] NET 00001–00006

X0000.0 X0000.1 X0000.2 X0000.3 X0000.4 X0000.5 X0000.6 Y0000.1 COMM

ENT–
G0500.3 R0900.0

om
X0010.7 Y0065.7

ÔÔÔÔ
X0012.5 Y0014.2

ÔÔÔÔ SUB 1

ÔÔÔÔ
END1

ÔÔÔÔ
SUB 2

r.c
END2

TRIGGER * MODE:ON : X0000.0 : 0 : 00000/65535 * 1995/12/20 13:20:59

ÔÔÔ F1 F3 F7 F8 F9 F10

ÔÔÔ
Exec Dbgprm Splist Search Symbol Seting

e
(Stop)

nt
[Display of setting trigger]

” TRIGGER * MODE:ON : X0000.0: 0 :0000/12345 * 1995/12/20 13:20:59 ”

ce
Stop time
COUNT:Trigger checking count
(default 1)
POINT:Trigger checking point (default 1)
0 – the top of the 1st level (Default 0)
nc

1 – after END1 execution

2 – after END2 execution
3 – after END3 execution

ADR: Trigger setting address

.c

ON:Rising edge detection

OFF:Falling edge detection
w

2) Stop operation to stop the execution of ladder after executing a scan.

w

SCAN COUNTER : 00000/65535 1995/12/20 13:20:59

F1 F3 F7 F8 F9 F10
Exec Dbgprm Splist Search Symbol Seting
w

(Stop)

[Display of setting scan]

” SCAN COUNT : 00000/00003 1995/12/20 13:20:59 ”

Stop time

COUNT:Scan checking count

Fig.3.4.3.1.4 (b) Screen of Stop Function of Break with Condition

66
B–62884EN/01 3. OPERATION

(b) Setting of Ladder Debug Parameter

Ladder Debug Parameter DIALOG is displayed by pressing
F3“Dbgprm”.

[Ladder Debug Parameter DIALOG]

Ladder Debug Parameter

Ladder Debug Mode

F Step f Break Control

om
Step Break Control

Mode Mode
F Element F Trigger f Scan
f Net
f Block

r.c
Address X1000.0
V Sub–program
Check–Point
F Level1 f END2

e
f END1 f END3

nt Count

Trigger–Mode
65535
ce
F ON f OFF
nc

OK Cancel Init
.c

Please set the following items by “Ladder Debug Parameter”

dialog.
Step operations . . . . 1), 2), 3)
w

Stop function of break with condition . . 1), 4), 5), 6), 7), 8)
1) Ladder Debug Mode
w

Ladder Debug Mode

F Step f Break Control
w

Step : Step operations (Default)

Break Control : Stop function of break with condition

67
3. OPERATION B–62884EN/01

2) Step/Mode

Step
Mode
F Element
f Net
f Block

om
Element : Step Operation to execute one instruction
from current position. (Default)
Net : Step Operation to execute one net (one circuit)
from current position.
Block : Step operation to execute from current

r.c
position to specified contact or coil
instruction.
3) Step/Sub–Program

e
Ô ÔÔ
Step

ntÔ V Sub–Program
ÔÔ
ce
(No–Check) : The step operations in Sub–Program
is not displayed.
nc

X (Check) : The step operations in Sub–Program

is displayed.
* When “b) Step/Mode” is “Element” or “Net”, it is possible
to set this item.
.c

4) Break Control/Mode
w

ÔÔ ÔÔ
Break Control

Mode
w

F Trigger f Scan
w

Trigger : Stop operation to stop the execution of ladder

when a trigger condition specified by signal
becomes true. (Optionally, a trigger counter can
be specified to stop after the trigger becomes true
specified times.)
Scan : Stop operation to stop the execution of ladder
after executing a scan. (Optionally, a scan
counter can be specified to stop after executing
specified times of scans.)

68
B–62884EN/01 3. OPERATION

5) Break Control/Address

ÔÔ ÔÔ
Break Control

ÔÔ Address X1000.0
ÔÔ
Address : Trigger setting address

om
* When “d) Break Control/Mode” is “Trigger”, it is possible
to set this item.
6) Break Control/Check point

r.c
ÔÔ ÔÔ
Break Control

Check–Point
F Level1 f END2
f END1 f END3

e
nt LEVEL1 : the top of the 1st level
END1
END2
: after END1 execution
: after END2 execution
ce
END3 : after END3 execution
* When “d) Break Control/Mode” is “Trigger”, it is possible
to set this item.
7) Break Control/Count
nc

ÔÔ ÔÔ
Break Control
.c

Default=1
Count 65535
w

Count : Trigger Count or Scan Count(1 to 65535)

8) Break Control/Trigger Mode
w

ÔÔ ÔÔ
Break Control
w

Trigger–Mode
F ON f OFF

ON : Rising edge detection

OFF : Falling edge detection
* When “Break Control/Mode” is “Trigger”, it is possible
to set this item.

69
3. OPERATION B–62884EN/01

When [Init] is selected, Parameter of Ladder Debugging

Function is initialized.
Please select [OK] when setting is completed.
Please select [Cancel] or press the Esc key when you cancel
setting.
(c) Execution of step operation
1) Step Operation to execute one instruction from current
position.
Setting of Ladder Debug Parameter Dialog

om
Ladder Debug Mode : Step
Step–Mode : Element
Sub–Program : No Check or Check

* Setting other than the above–mentioned item are invalid.

r.c
When F1“Step” is pressed, the execution of step operation is
started.

ACC : 1 STACK : 0000 0000 SF:0 ZF:1 OF:0

e
F1 F2 F3 F4 F7 F8 F9 F10
Step B.Srch Dbgprm Sync.B Splist Search Symbol Seting

nt
Step Operation to execute one instruction
ce
2) Step Operation to execute one net (one circuit) from current
position.
Setting of Ladder Debug Parameter Dialog
nc

Ladder Debug Mode : Step

Step–Mode : Net
Sub–Program : No Check or Check
.c

* Setting other than the above–mentioned item are invalid.

When F1“Step” is pressed, the execution of step operation is
started.
w

ACC : 1 STACK : 0000 0000 SF:0 ZF:1 OF:0

w

F1 F2 F3 F4 F7 F8 F9 F10
Step B.Srch Dbgprm Sync.B Splist Search Symbol Seting
w

Step Operation to execute one net (one circuit) from current position.

3) Step operation to execute from current position to specified

contact or coil instruction.(Block operation)

70
B–62884EN/01 3. OPERATION

Setting of Ladder Debug Parameter Dialog

Ladder Debug Mode : Step

Step–Mode : Block

* Setting other than the above–mentioned item are invalid.

If F5“B.Strt” is pressed after the cursor is moved, the cursor
position becomes a position where the block operation
begins.
The block operation begins from the instruction which is

om
stopping now when the block operation begins without
specifying the beginning position. (If the step operation or
the block operation is never done after the Ladder Debug
Screen is displayed, the top of LEVEL1 becomes a beginning
position.)

r.c
ACC : 1 STACK : 0000 0000 SF:0 ZF:1 OF:0

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F7 F8 F9 F10
Exec B.Srch Dbgprm Sync.B B.Strt Splist Search Symbol Seting
(Stop)

e
Cursor position becomes a beginning position of block operation.
nt When F1“Exec” is pressed, the execution of block operation
is started from the beginning position to the cursor position.
While executing block operation, block operation is stopped
ce
by pressing F1“Stop”

ACC : 1 STACK : 0000 0000 SF:0 ZF:1 OF:0

nc

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F7 F8 F9 F10
Exec B.Srch Dbgprm Sync.B B.Strt Splist Search Symbol Seting
(Stop)
.c

Executing (/Stopping) block operation

4) Search of the instruction at which the execution is currently

stopped
w

Please press F2“B.Srch”.

The instruction at which the execution is currently stopped
is displayed in BLUE.
w

ACC : 1 STACK : 0000 0000 SF:0 ZF:1 OF:0

w

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F7 F8 F9 F10
Exec B.Srch Dbgprm Sync.B B.Strt Splist Search Symbol Seting
(Stop)

Search of the instruction at which the execution is stopped

5) Transfer the current status of input signals to the synchronous

buffer

71
3. OPERATION B–62884EN/01

F4“Sync.B” is used to transfer the current status of input

signals to the synchronous buffer so that succeeding
instructions could operate on refreshed inputs when the
execution is continued from current position.

Notes
Normally, transferring to the synchronous buffer is
automatically performed at the beginning of the 2nd level
ladder.

om
ACC : 1 STACK : 0000 0000 SF:0 ZF:1 OF:0

F1 F2 F3 F4 F7 F8 F9 F10
Step B.Srch Dbgprm Sync.B Splist Search Symbol Seting

r.c
Press F4“Sync.B”

SYNCHRONOUS BUFFER TRANSFER COMPLETED

ACC : 1 STACK : 0000 0000 SF:0 ZF:1 OF:0

e
F1 F2 F3 F4 F7 F8 F9 F10
Step B.Srch Dbgprm Sync.B Splist Search Symbol Seting
nt(d) Execution of stop function of break with condition
1) Stop operation to stop the execution of ladder when a trigger
ce
condition specified by signal becomes true.
Setting of Ladder Debug Parameter Dialog
nc

Ladder Debug Mode : Break Control

Break–Mode : Trigger
Address : Trigger address
Check–Point : Level1 or END1 to 3
Count : 1 to 65535
.c

Trigger–Mode : ON or OFF

* Setting other than the above–mentioned item are invalid.

w

When F1“Exec” is pressed, the execution of stop operation

(trigger) is started.
While executing stop operation (trigger), stop operation
w

(trigger) is stopped by pressing F1“Stop”

TRIGGER * MODE:ON : X0000.0 : 0 : 00000/65535 * 1995/12/20 13:20:59

w

F1 F3 F7 F8 F9 F10
Exec Dbgprm Splist Search Symbol Seting
(Stop)

Starting (/Stopping) the execution of stop operation (trigger)

2) Stop operation to stop the execution of ladder after executing

a scan.

72
B–62884EN/01 3. OPERATION

Setting of Ladder Debug Parameter Dialog

Ladder Debug Mode : Break Control

Break–Mode : Scan
Count : 1 to 65535

* Setting other than the above–mentioned item are invalid.

When F1“Exec” is pressed, the execution of stop operation
(scan) is started.
While executing stop operation (scan), stop operation (scan)

om
is stopped by pressing F1”Stop”

SCAN COUNTER : 00000/65535 1995/12/20 13:20:59

F1 F3 F7 F8 F9 F10
Exec Dbgprm Splist Search Symbol Seting

r.c
(Stop)

Starting(/Stopping) the execution of stop operation (scan)

e
3.4.3.2 “Signal Status” window displays the status of signals on PMC in real
nt
Signal Status Window time. You can examine the signal status of any PMC address, and you can
also change the signal status on this window.
(1) Menu position
ce
To activate “Signal Status” window, pull down [2. Diagnose] menu,
and select [signal Status] on the menu.
nc

2. Diagnose

Ladder Monitor
Signal Status
.c

PMC Parameter
PMC alarm status
PMC Status
RUN/STOP the program
w

Signal Trace
Signal Analysis
System Information
w

(2) Window view

w

When [SIGNAL STATUS] is selected, the window shown below

appears.

73
3. OPERATION B–62884EN/01

(a) Window view without symbols :

Signal Status

R00000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 : 01
R00001 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 : 80
R00002 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 : 00
R00003 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 : 1C
R00004 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 : 00

om
R00005 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 : 00
R00006 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 : AA
R00007 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 : 55
R00008 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 : 00
R00009 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 : 00

r.c
Fig.3.4.3.2 (a)

(b) Window view with symbols :

e
Cursor Bit Symbols

nt
Ô
Signal Status

Ô
ce
WORK1 –OFF– –ON–

Ô R00000

R00001
0

1
0

0
0

0
0

0
0

0
0

0
0

0
1

0
:

:
01

80
nc

R00002 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 : 00
TOOL1
R00003 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 : 1C

Ô
.c

R00004 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 : 00

PMC Address Hexadecimal expression Ô

w

Byte symbol

Fig.3.4.3.2 (b)
w
w

F4 F8 F10
Symbol Search Wrt On

or or

F4 F10
Adress WrtOff

Fig.3.4.3.2 (c)

74
B–62884EN/01 3. OPERATION

(3) Operations
Operations on the signal status window is described.
Basic operation Function
Cursor keys Move cursor.
Page Page Move address area on window.
Up / Down

Skip to next/previous kind of address.

Tab / Shift + Tab

om
Enter Alternate signal status. Enter key turns the signal

status ON which was OFF, and turns OFF which

was ON. Enter key is effective only when the

write-protection is unlocked.

r.c
Display/Hide symbols.
[Symbol]/[Adress] F4

Search address (‘address’ can be symbol).

‘address’+[Search] F8

e
Unlock write-protection/Re-protect. When the
[Wrt On]/[WrtOff] F10
protection is effective the cursor is yellow, and
nt
Warning
becomes red when unlock.
ce
Signal status changes and PMC parameter changes should
always be made with extreme care. Signal status changes
and PMC parameter changes can have serious and
unforeseen results on a control system, and on the process
to which it applies, if they are improperly used. It is
nc

recommended that these functions not be used with people

near the equipment.
.c

Note
Attempts to change some signal statuses may fail. At an
address to which sequence programs, the CNC, MMC, I/O
w

Link and other external I/O devices write repeatedly, the

signal status cannot be changed. (The CNC repeatedly
w

writes to F addresses, the MMC to M addresses, and

external I/O devices to X addresses.
w

(4) Message
Message Meaning and countermeasure
Sure to modify ? You tried to change signal status although
write-protected. If the attempt is intended, answer
[Yes]. Otherwise, answer [No] to cancel change.

75
3. OPERATION B–62884EN/01

3.4.3.3 “PMC Parameter” sub-menu consists of the menu items for the windows
PMC Parameter below.
1) Timer window
2) Counter window
3) Keep relay window
4) Data table control window
5) Data table window
To display the “Parameter” submenu, display the [2. Diagnose]

om
pull-down menu, then select [PMC Parameter] from the menu.
The submenu can be displayed by pressing the or key with the
cursor positioned to [PMC Parameter].

r.c
2. Diagnose

Ladder Monitor
Signal Status

e
PMC Parameter
PMC alarm status Timer
PMC Status
nt RUN/STOP the program
Signal Trace
Signal Analysis
System Information
Counter
Keep relay
Data table control
Data table
ce
Warning
nc

When changing a signal status or PMC parameter, extreme

care is necessary. If the function for modifying the signal
status or PMC parameter is applied incorrectly, the machine
may act unpredictably. Avoid using the function if personnel
.c

are present near the machine.

w

Note
If you can not write PMC parameter, it might be protected.
For the detail, please refer PMC programing manual.
w

(1) Timer window

w

“Timer” window displays the contents of PMC Timer address. You

can examine the contents of PMC “Timer” address, and you can also
change the values for TMR instruction.
(a) Menu position
To active “Timer” window, pull down [2. Diagnose] menu, and
select [PMC Parameter] on the menu. Then sub-menu appears
which contains item [Timer] which activates “Timer” window.

76
B–62884EN/01 3. OPERATION

2. Diagnose

Ladder Monitor
Signal Status
PMC Parameter
PMC alarm status Timer
PMC Status Counter
RUN/STOP the program Keep relay
Signal Trace Data table control
Signal Analysis Data table

om
System Information

(b) Window view

1) Window view without symbols:

r.c
Timer

1. T00000 600000 11. T00020 0

e
2. T00002 0 12. T00022 0
3. T00004 0 13. T00024 0
4. T00006 0 14. T00026 0
nt 5.
6.
7.
8.
T00008
T00010
T00012
T00014
0
0
0
0
15.
16.
17.
18.
T00028
T00030
T00032
T00034
0
0
0
0
ce
9. T00016 1000 19. T00036 0
10. T00018 0 20. T00038 0
nc

Fig.3.4.3.3 (a)

2) Window view with symbols:

.c

Cursor

Timer
w

TEN_MINUTES
1. T00000 600000 6. T00010 0
w

2. T00002 0 7. T00012 0
w

3. T00004 0 8. T00014 0
ONE_SECOND
4. T00006 0 9. T00016 1000

5. T00008 0 10. T00018 0

Byte symbol
PMC Address

Fig.3.4.3.3 (b)

77
3. OPERATION B–62884EN/01

3) Function keys:

F4 F8 F10
Symbol Search Wrt On

or or

F4 F10
Adress WrtOff

om
Fig.3.4.3.3 (c)

(c) Operations
The following table lists the operations supported by the
[TIMER] window.

r.c
Basic operation Function
Cursor keys Move cursor.

Page Page Move address area on window.

Up
/ Down

e
Change timer value. Enter new timer value in
‘number’ + Enter
milli–seconds.
nt You can enter new value only when the
write–protection is unlocked.
The valid timer values are :
0–3,145,680 ms for timer No. 1–8
ce
0–523,280 ms for timer No. 9–150
Display/Hide symbols.
[Symbol]/[Address] F4
nc

Search address (‘address’ can be symbol).

‘address’ + [Search] F8
You cannot search any other address than PMC
parameter address, T, C, K, and D, at the “Timer”
window. When C, K or D address is specified to
search, “Timer” window is closed and the special
window for the address is opened with the address
.c

at top of window.
Search timer address by timer number.
‘number’ + [Search] F8
w

Unlock write–protection/Re–protect. When the

[Wrt On]/[Wrt Off] F10
protection is effective the cursor is yellow, and
becomes red when unlocked.
w

(d) Message
Message Meaning and countermeasure
w

Sure to modify? You tried to change timer value although

write–protected.
If the attempt is intended, answer [Yes].
Otherwise, answer [No] to cancel change.

(2) Counter window

“Counter” window displays the contents of PMC Counter address.
You can examine the contents of PMC Counter address, and you can
also change the values for CTR instruction.

78
B–62884EN/01 3. OPERATION

(a) Menu position

To activate “Counter” window, pull down [2. Diagnose] menu,
and select [PMC Parameter] on the menu. Then sub–menu
appears which contains item [Counter] which activates
“Counter” window.

2. Diagnose

Ladder Monitor

om
Signal Status
PMC Parameter
PMC alarm status Timer
PMC Status Counter
RUN/STOP the program Keep relay
Signal Trace Data table control
Signal Analysis Data table

r.c
System Information

(b) Window view

When [COUNTER] is selected, the following window uppears.

e
1) Window view without symbols :

nt Counter
ce
No. Address Preset/Current No. Address Preset/Current
1. C00000 1000 / 347 11. C00040 0/ 0
2. C00004 256 / 129 12. C00044 0/ 0
3. C00008 0/ 0 13. C00048 0/ 0
4. C00012 0/ 0 14. C00052 0/ 0
5. C00016 0/ 0 15. C00056 0/ 0
nc

6. C00020 0/ 0 16. C00060 0/ 0

7. C00024 0/ 0 17. C00064 0/ 0
8. C00028 36 / 0 18. C00068 0/ 0
9. C00032 0/ 0 19. C00070 0/ 0
10. C00036 0/ 0 20. C00076 0/ 0
.c
w

Fig.3.4.3.3 (d)
w
w

79
3. OPERATION B–62884EN/01

2) Window view with symbols:

Cursor

Counter

No. Address Preset/Current No. Address Preset/Current

WORK COUNTER
1. C00000 1000 / 347 6. C00020 0/ 0

om
2. C00004 256 / 129 7. C00024 0/ 0

3. C00008 0/ 0 8. C00028 36 / 0

4. C00012 0/ 0 9. C00032 0/ 0

5. C00016 0/ 0 10. C00036 0/ 0

r.c
Current counter value
Symbol
Preset counter value

e
Counter number and Address

nt 3) Function keys :
Fig.3.4.3.3 (e)
ce
F4 F8 F10
Symbol Search Wrt On
nc

or or

F4 F10
Adress WrtOff
.c

Fig.3.4.3.3 (f)
w

(c) Operations
The table below lists the operations supported by the [COUNTER]
window.
w

Basic operation Function

Cursor keys Move cursor.
w

Page Page Move address area on window.

Up
/ Down

Change timer value. You can enter new value only

‘number’ + Enter
when the write–protection is unlocked.
The valid counter values are :
0–65,535 for binary counter
0–9,999 for BCD counter
Display/Hide symbols.
[Symbol]/[Address] F4

80
B–62884EN/01 3. OPERATION

Basic operation Function

Search address (‘address’ can be symbol).
‘address’ + [Search] F8
You cannot search any other address than PMC
parameter address, T, C, K, and D, at the “Counter”
window. When T, K or D address is specified to
search, “Counter” window is closed and the
special window for the address is opened with the
address at top of window.
Search counter address by timer number.
‘number’ + [Search] F8

Unlock write–protection/Re–protect. When the

om
[Wrt On]/[Wrt Off] F10
protection is effective the cursor is yellow, and
becomes red when unlocked.

(d) Message
Message Meaning and countermeasure
Sure to modify ? You tried to change counter value although

r.c
write-protected. If the attempt is intended, answer
[Yes]. Otherwise, answer [No] to cancel change.

(3) Keep relay window

“Keep relay” window displays the status of PMC Keep relay address.

e
You can examine the signal status of PMC Keep relay address, and
you can also change the status of Keep relays.
nt(a) Menu position
To activate “Keep relay” window, pull down [2. Diagnose] menu,
and select [PMC Parameter] on the menu. Then sub–menu
appears which contains item [Keep relay] which activates “Keep
ce
relay” window.

2. Diagnose
nc

Ladder Monitor
Signal Status
PMC Parameter
.c

PMC alarm status Timer

PMC Status Counter
RUN/STOP the program Keep relay
Signal Trace Data table control
w

Signal Analysis Data table

System Information
w
w

81
3. OPERATION B–62884EN/01

(b) Window view

When “Keep relay” is selected following window is displayed.

Address

Cursor

Keep relay

K00000 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 K00010 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
K00001 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 K00011 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

om
K00002 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 K00012 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
K00003 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 K00013 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
K00004 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 K00014 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
K00005 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 K00015 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
K00006 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 K00016 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
K00007 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 K00017 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

r.c
K00008 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 K00018 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
K00009 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 K00019 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

e
Fig.3.4.3.3 (g)

1) Function Keys :
nt
ce
F8 F10
Search Wrt On

or
nc

F10
WrtOff

Fig.3.4.3.3 (h)
.c

(c) Operations
Basic operation Function
w

Cursor keys Move cursor.

Page Page Move address area on window.

/
w

Up Down

Enter Alternate signal status. Enter key turns the signal

w

status ON which was OFF, and turns OFF which

was ON. Enter key is effective only when the write–

protection is unlocked.

82
B–62884EN/01 3. OPERATION

Basic operation Function

Search address (‘address’ can be symbol).
‘address’ + [Search] F8
You cannot search any other address than PMC
parameter address, T, C, K, and D, at the “Keep
relay” window. When T, C or D address is specified
to search, “Keep relay” window is closed and the
special window for the address is opened with the
address at top of window.
Unlock write–protection/Re–protect. When the
[Wrt On]/[Wrt Off] F10
protection is effective the cursor is yellow, and
becomes red when unlocked.

om
(d) Message
Message Meaning and countermeasure
Sure to modify ? You tried to change signal status although
write-protected. If the attempt is intended, answer
[Yes]. Otherwise, answer [No] to cancel change.

r.c
(e) Data for PMC control software
Keep relay data can not use in sequence program because some
keep relay data are used by PMC control software.
In this manual, the addresses related to the operation of the

e
On-line function are described.
For the detail, please refer PMC programming manual.
(The addresses marked ‘*’ do not effect the operation of the
nt On-line function but used by PMC control software.)

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
ce
K17 DTBLDSP * * MEMINP * * PRGRAM LADMASK
or
K900

#7 DTBLDSP 1 : Can not display data table control data

in PMC parameter.
nc

#4 MEMINP 0 : Can not change signal status.

#1 PRGRAM 0 : Can not activate On-line Editing and
the functions in I/O menu.
#0 LADMASK 1 : Can not display Ladder monitor.
.c

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
K19 * * * * * * * FROM-WRT
w

or
K902

#0 FROM-WRT 1 : Displaying dialog box of program

w

back-up when exiting On-line editing.

(4) Data table control window
“Data table control” window displays the informations of Data
w

groups for PMC Data table address. You can examine the Data group
attributes, and you can also change the attributes on this window.
(a) Menu position
To activate “Data table control” window, pull down [2. Diagnose]
menu, and select [PMC Parameter] on the menu. Then sub-menu
appears which contains item [Data table control] which activates
“Data table control” window.

83
3. OPERATION B–62884EN/01

2. Diagnose

Ladder Monitor
Signal Status
PMC Parameter
PMC alarm status Timer
PMC Status Counter
RUN/STOP the program Keep relay
Signal Trace Data table control
Signal Analysis Data table

om
System Information

(b) Window view

1) Window view with symbols :

r.c
Cursor

Data table control

e
No. Start address Number Type Format Protection

nt 1.
2.
3.
4.
DATA–TAABLE–TOP
D00050
TOOL–TABLE
D00200
8000
10
20
100
byte
word
word
byte
Hex
Dec
Dec
Dec
on
off
off
off
ce
5. BCD–CONV–TABLE 10 word BCD off
nc

Start address/ Data size

symbol of the group Write-protection
Data group number Number of element Data format
.c

Fig.3.4.3.3 (i)
w

2) Function keys:
w

F1 F2 F3 F4 F8 F10
w

New Delete G. Data Symbol Search Wrt On

or or

F4 F10
Adress WrtOff

Fig.3.4.3.3 (j)

84
B–62884EN/01 3. OPERATION

(c) Operations
The table below lists the operations supported by the Data table
control window. Table of the data table control display (1).
Basic operation Function
Cursor keys Move cursor.
Page Page Move address area on window.
Up / Down

Change “Start address” with the cursor on the

‘D-address’+ Enter
item. You can enter new address only when the
write-protection is unlocked. You can omit the

om
leading character ‘D’ of the address.
Change “Number” with the cursor on the item. You
‘number’+ Enter
can enter new number only when the
write-protection is unlocked.
Change “Type”, “Format” and “Protection” with the
Enter
cursor on the item. When the cursor is on “Type” or

r.c
“Format”, small dialog box is displayed to choose
the item. You can change them only when the
write-protection is unlocked.

Table of the data table control display (2).

e
Basic operation Function

nt
[New] F1
Make new data group. [New] duplicates the data
group on the cursor. A hundred data groups can
be created at most.
Delete data group on the cursor. You cannot
ce
[Delete] F2
delete all the data groups because one data group
must exist at least.
Switch to “Data table” window. The data group
[G.Data] F3
which the cursor was on is displayed.
nc

Display/Hide symbols.
[Symbol]/[Adress] F4

Search address (’address’ can be symbol).

‘address’+[Search] F8
You cannot search any other address than PMC
.c

parameter address, T, C, K and D, at the “Data

table control” window. When T, C, K or D address
is specified to search, “Data table control” window
is closed and the special window for the address is
w

opened with the address at top of window.

Search data group by data group number.
‘number’+[Search] F8
w

Unlock write-protection/Re-protect. When the

[Wrt On]/[WrtOff] F10
protection is effective the cursor is yellow, and
becomes red when unlocked.
w

(d) Messages
Message Meaning and countermeasure
Sure to modify ? You tried to change signal status although
write-protected.
If the attempt is intended, answer [Yes].
Otherwise, answer [No] to cancel change.

85
3. OPERATION B–62884EN/01

(5) Data table window

“Data table” window displays the contents of PMC Data table address
according to Data groups defined by Data table control data. You can
examine the contents of Data table, and you can also change the
values of Data table on this window.
(a) Menu position
To activate “Data table” window, pull down [2. Diagnose] menu,
and select [PMC Parameter] on the menu. Then sub-menu
appears which contains item [Data table] which activates “Data
table” window.

om
2. Diagnose

Ladder Monitor
Signal Status
PMC Parameter

r.c
PMC alarm status Timer
PMC Status Counter
RUN/STOP the program Keep relay
Signal Trace Data table control
Signal Analysis Data table

e
System Information

nt(b) Window view

When [Data table] is selected, the following window appears.
1) Window view without symbols :
ce
Data table
nc

Group 1 : D00000 - D07999, 8000 bytes, hexadecimal, protected

D00000 F6 D00010 C0 D00020 00

D00001 FF D00011 FE D00021 D8
D00002 EC D00012 80 D00022 00
.c

D00003 FF D00013 FD D00023 B0

D00004 D8 D00014 00 D00024 00
D00005 FF D00015 FB D00025 00
D00006 B0 D00016 00 D00026 00
w

D00007 FF D00017 F6 D00027 00

D00008 60 D00018 00 D00028 00
D00009 FF D00019 EC D00029 00
w

Fig.3.4.3.3 (k)
w

Data group information:

Group 1 : D0000–D07999, 8000 bytes, hexadecimal, protected

Area of Data group Data format

Number of element Write-protection

Data group number
and data size

86
B–62884EN/01 3. OPERATION

2) Window view with symbols :

Data group information

Data table

Group 1:D00000 - D07999, 8000 bytes, hexadecimal, protected

DAT–TABLE–TOP
D00000 F6 D00005 FF D00010 C0

om
D00001 FF D00006 B0 D00011 FE

D00002 EC D00007 FF D00012 80

D00003 FF D00008 60 D00013 FD

D00004 D8 D00009 FF D00014 00

r.c
Cursor
Symbol
Address

e
Fig.3.4.3.3 (l)

nt 3) Function keys:
ce
F3 F4 F8 F10
C. Data Symbol Search Wrt On

or or
nc

F4 F10
Adress WrtOff
.c

Fig.3.4.3.3 (m)

(c) Operations
The following table lists the operations supported by the [DATA
w

TABLE] window.
Operations supported by [DATA TABLE] window
w

Basic operation Function

Cursor keys Move cursor.
Move address area on window.
w

Page Page
Up
/ Down

Skip to next/previous data group.

Tab / Shift + Tab

Change data value. You can enter new value only

‘number’+ Enter
when the write-protection is unlocked. The valid
data values are :
For details of the values that can be input, see the
table of input data values below.

87
3. OPERATION B–62884EN/01

Basic operation Function

Changes the keep relay signal status. Pressing
Enter

the Enter key toggles the signal status between off

and on. The Enter key is enabled only in the write

enabled state.
Switch to ”Data table control” window.
[C.Data] F3
The displayed data group is displayed at top of the
window.

om
Display/Hide symbols.
[Symbol]/[Adress] F4

Search address (‘address’ can be symbol).

‘address’+[Search] F8
You cannot search any other address than PMC
parameter address, T, C, K and D, at the “Data
table” window. When T, C or K address is specified

r.c
to search, “Data table” window is closed and the
special window for the address is opened with the
address at top of window.
Search data group by data group number.
‘number’+[Search] F8

e
Unlock write-protection/Re-protect. When the
[Wrt On]/[WrtOff] F10
protection is effective the cursor is yellow, and
nt Data table
becomes red when unlocked.
ce
byte word double-word (dword)
Decimal -128 to 127 -32,768 to 32,767 -2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647
BCD 0 to 99 0 to 9,999 0 to 99,999,999
Hexadecimal 00 to FF 0000 to FFFF 00000000 to FFFFFFFF
nc

(d) Messages
Message Meaning and countermeasure
Sure to modify ? You tried to change data table value although
.c

write-protected.
If the attempt is intended, answer [Yes].
Otherwise, answer [No] to cancel change.
w
w
w

88
B–62884EN/01 3. OPERATION

3.4.3.4 The “PMC ALARM MESSAGE” dialog box displays a PMC alarm
PMC Alarm Status message.
(1) Menu position
To activate “PMC alarm message” dialog box, pull down [2.
Diagnose] menu, and select [PMC alarm status] on the menu.

2. Diagnose

om
Ladder Monitor
Signal Status
PMC Parameter
PMC alarm status
PMC Status
RUN/STOP the program

r.c
Signal Trace
Signal Analysis
System Information

e
(2) Window view
When [PMC alarm status] is selected, the following dialog box
ntappears.

PMC alarm message

ce
ALARM NOTHING
nc
.c

OK
w

Fig.3.4.3.4 (a)
w

(3) Operation
Press Enter , Space or . key to close “PMC alarm message” dialog
w

box.
(4) Messages
The alarm messages same as PMC’s are displayed in this window.
See the manual of PMC for detail of the messages.
For details of messages, refer to the following manual:
“FANUC PMC MODEL PA1/PA3/RA1/RA2/RA3/RB/RB2/
RB3/RB4/RB5/RB6/RC/RC3/RC4/ NB/NB2 Ladder
Language Programming Manual” (B–61863E)

89
3. OPERATION B–62884EN/01

3.4.3.5 “PMC Status” window displays the status of program on PMC.

PMC Status Window (1) Menu position
To activate “PMC Status” window, pull down [2. Diagnose] menu,
and select [PMC Status] on the menu.

2. Diagnose

Ladder Monitor

om
Signal Status
PMC Parameter
PMC alarm status
PMC Status
RUN/STOP the program
Signal Trace
Signal Analysis

r.c
System Information

(2) Window view

e
When “PMC Status” is selected, following window is displayed

nt Status

Series/Edition
ce
****/** Series/Edition of PMC
****/** Series/Edition of ladder Editing Card

PMC TYPE
nc

PMC-*** Connected PMC type

SCAN TIME
CUR 0ms Current scan time
MAX 0ms Maximum scan time
.c

MIN 0ms Minimum scan time

Date/Time
w

00/00/00 Month/Date/Year
00:00:00 Hour:Minute:Second
w

Fig.3.4.3.5 (a)
w

90
B–62884EN/01 3. OPERATION

3.4.3.6 The program execution status can be changed from “RUNNING” to

Executing or Stopping a “STOP” or from “STOP” to “RUNNING”.
Program (1) Position of menu
To display the [RUN/STOP the program] dialog box, display the [2.
Diagnose] pull–down menu, then select [RUN/STOP the program]
from the menu.

2. Diagnose

om
Ladder Monitor
Signal Status
PMC Parameter
PMC alarm status
PMC Status

r.c
RUN/STOP the program
Signal Trace
Signal Analysis
System Information

e
(2) Displaying the dialog box
ntWhen [RUN/STOP the program] is selected, the dialog box shown
below appears.
(a) Program running state
ce
While a program is being executed, the following dialog box
appears.
nc

STOP the program

.c
w

Yes No
w

Fig.3.4.3.6 (a)

[YES] : Stop the program.

w

[NO] : Closes the dialog box without stopping the program.

(b) Program stop state
While a program is in the stop state, the following dialog box
appears.

91
3. OPERATION B–62884EN/01

RUN the program ?

Yes No

om
Fig.3.4.3.6 (b)

[YES] : Executes the ladder program.

[NO] : Closes the dialog box without executing the ladder

r.c
program.

Warning
When executing or stopping a program, special care is

e
necessary. If a program is applied incorrectly, the machine
may act unpredictably.
nt
Avoid using the function if personnel are present near the
machine.
ce
3.4.3.7 (1) Outline of Signal Trace Function
Signal Trace Function This function checks the signal history which cannot be checked in
nc

the status display. Using one–byte or two byte addressing, the

function records a state when the signal changes. In two–byte
addressing, discontinuous address can be set.
(2) Operations
.c

(a) Selection of Signal Trace Screen

Please select “Signal Trace” from the menu of “2.Diagnose”.
w

2. Diagnose
w

Ladder Monitor
Signal Status
PMC Parameter
w

PMC alarm status

PMC Status
RUN/STOP the program
Signal Trace
Signal Analysis
System Information

92
B–62884EN/01 3. OPERATION

Signal Trace

X0000(01111111)
No. 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Value

0000 F F F F F F f F FDH
0001 f f F f F F f F 2DH
³0002 f F F f f f f F 60H
0003 f f f f f f f f 00H
0004 f f f f f f f f 00H
0005 f f f f f f f f 00H
0006 f f f f f f f f 00H
0007 f f f f f f f f 00H

om
Signal Trace Start Time –:–:– Signal Trace End Time –:–:–

ÔÔ
F1 F3
EXEC PARAM
STOP

r.c
³ @@@The latest data, f @@@OFF , F @@@ ON

Page Page
The display of trace data can be scrolled by , , Up , and Down key

Fig.3.4.3.7 Screen of signal trace function

e
(b) Setting of signal trace parameter
nt “Signal Trace Parameter” dialog is displayed by pressing the
F3“Param” key.
ce
[Signal Trace Parameter DIALOG]

Signal Trace Parameter

nc

MODE
f 1 BYTE
f 2 BYTES (Consecutive Address)
F 2 BYTES (Two Address not Consecutive)
.c

ADDRESS 1 ADDRESS 2
F PMC ADDRESS f PMC ADDRESS
f PHY ADDRESS F PHY ADDRESS
w

X0000 FFE480
w

7654 3210 7654 3210

MASK 1111 1111 MASK 1111 1111

w

V MAX DISPLAY OK Cancel

Please set the following items by “Signal Trace Parameter”

dialog.

93
3. OPERATION B–62884EN/01

1) MODE . . . . . . . . . Sets a mode used for reading signals

2) ADDRESS 1,2 . . . Sets address type, trace address and
mask data

Address type
– PMC address (symbol is also
acceptable)
– Physical address

Trace address
Sets address at which a signal is
traced by specifiedaddress type.

om

Mask data
Sets a masked bit or bits (signals can
be read with unnecessary bits
masked)

r.c
Notes
When the trace address type is specified as a physical
address, if an illegal memory address is specified to execute
the trace, a system error may occur. About the legal range
of a physical address which can be specified, a knowledge

e
of programming PMC by C language is needed.
Refer to “PROGRAMMING MANUAL(C LANGUAGE)/
nt
B–61863E–1” and operate carefully not to specify an illegal
memory address.
ce
3) MAX DISPLAY . . . The screen display size can be
changed.
(No check) –
nc

Half screen display (8 lines)

X (Check) –
All screen display (20 lines)
.c

Please select [OK] when setting is completed.

Please select [Cancel] or press Esc key when you cancel
setting.
w

(c) Starting or stopping signal trace function

Please press F1“EXEC” or “STOP” in Fig. 3.4.3.7 Screen Of
Signal Trace Function.
w

(d) Automatic tracing function at power on

When the trace parameters have been specified and bit 5 of keep
w

relay K17 or K900 has been set to 1, the trace automatically starts
at power on.

94
B–62884EN/01 3. OPERATION

3.4.3.8 (1) Outline of Signal Analysis Function

Signal Analysis Function The changes in a PMC ladder signal can be traced on the specified
trigger conditions. Displaying the results of tracing signals on a time
axis enables checking the relationship between the signals.
D Maximum number of signals traced at the same time : 16
D Maximum sampling period : 10 sec
D Sampling interval : 8 msec
(2) Operations

om
(a) Selection of Signal Analysis Screen

2. Diagnose

Ladder Monitor

r.c
Signal Status
PMC Parameter
PMC alarm status
PMC Status
RUN/STOP the program

e
Signal Trace
Signal Analysis
System Information
nt
ce
Signal analysis

Sampling Time : 10 (sec) Condition : Trigger–ON

Trigger Address : *ESP Trigger Mode : ABOUT
nc

R0901.0

R0901.1

R0901.2
.c

R0901.3

512 1024(msec)
w

Start Time 1996/01/30 10:11:12 Stop Time 1996/01/30 10:11:22

ÔÔÔ F1 F2 F3 F6 F10

ÔÔÔ
w

Exec T.Srch Sgnprm Exchg SgnSet

STOP

Fig.3.4.3.8 Screen of Signal Analysis Function

w

(b) Setting of Analysis Parameter

Analysis Parameter dialog is displayed by pressing F3“Sgnprm”.

95
3. OPERATION B–62884EN/01

[Analysis Parameter DIALOG]

Analysis Parameter

Sampling Time 10 (sec) Trigger Address *ESP

Condition Trigger–Mode
f Start f AFTER

om
F Trigger–ON F ABOUT
f Trigger–OFF f BEFORE
f ONLY

Signal–Address

1: X0000.0 5: R0900.0

r.c
2: X0000.1 6: R0900.1

3: X0000.2 7: R0900.2

e
4: X0000.3 8: R0900.3

nt OK Cancel Init
ce
nc

(Next Page)

Signal–Address
.c

9: X0000.4 13: R0900.4

10: X0000.5 14: R0900.5

w

11: X0000.6 15: R0900.6

12: X0000.7 16: R0900.7

w
w

Please set the following items by “Analysis Parameter” dialog.

1) Sampling Time . . . Specify the maximum trace time in a
range of 1 to 10 sec.
2) Trigger Address . . Specify a trigger address from which the
tracing starts on the PMC address.
A symbol name can be used.

96
B–62884EN/01 3. OPERATION

3) Condition . . . . . . . Specify the conditions at which the

tracing starts.
0 : When F1“Exec” key is pressed.
1 : When F1“Exec” key is pressed
and the trigger address signal rises.
2 : When F1“Exec” key is pressed
and the trigger address signal falls.

Notes
1 Condition 1 and 2 are effective when a trigger address is

om
specified.

4) Trigger Mode . . Sampled data for up to 10 seconds is

stored in the trace buffer.
A signal is stored in the buffer within 8 ms.

r.c
0 : AFTER
In this mode, signal status are
obtained in the period specified in
the SAMPLING TIME from the
time when the trigger conditions

e
are satisfied.
1 : ABOUT
nt In this mode, signal status are
obtained in the period specified in
the SAMPLING TIME with the
time at the middle when the trigger
ce
conditions are satisfied.
2 : BEFORE
In this mode, signal status are
obtained in the period specified in
nc

the SAMPLING TIME before the

trigger conditions are satisfied.
3 : ONLY
In this mode, the signal states are
.c

obtained only when the trigger

conditions are satisfied.
w

Notes
2 Trigger mode 1 is effective when condition 1 is set.
Trigger mode 2 is effective when condition 2 is set.
w

5) Signal Address . . . Specify up to 16 addresses at which the

w

tracing is performed with PMC

addresses or symbol names.
Please select [OK] when setting is completed.
Please select [Cancel] or press the Esc key when you cancel
setting.
When [Init] is selected, parameter and trace data of Signal
Analysis Function is initialized.
(c) Setting of Signal Analysis Screen
Analysis setting dialog is displayed by pressing F10“SgnSet”.

97
3. OPERATION B–62884EN/01

[Analysis setting DIALOG ]

Analysis setting

Scale
f 8 msec
F 16 msec
f 32 msec

Address/Symbol

om
F Symbol
f Address

Display–Mode
V Max Display

r.c
Scroll–Mode
V Scale(msec/Times)

OK Cancel

e
nt Please set the following items by “Analysis setting” DIALOG.
1) Scale . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the time division.
ce
When displaying the signal waveform,
the time division can be changed.
8 –––– 8 msec/divisions
16 –––– 16msec/ ”
32 –––– 32msec/ ”
nc

2) Address/Symbol . . Displaying symbols for trigger and

trace addresses When symbols are
defined for trigger and trace addresses,
the symbols and addresses are
.c

displayed.
3) Display Mode . . The screen display size can be changed.
Max Display :
w

(No check) –
Half screen display (four points)
w

X (Check) –
All screen display(eight points)
w

4) Scroll Mode . . . The unit of a right and left scroll can be

changed.
(No check) ––
Scrolls in each graduation
X (Check) ––
Scrolls in each page
Please select [OK] when setting is completed.

98
B–62884EN/01 3. OPERATION

Please select [Cancel] or press the Esc key when you cancel
setting.
(d) Starting or stopping of data sampling
Please press F1“Exec” or “Stop” in Fig.10.1.Screen of Signal
Analysis Function.
(e) Displaying traced data by specifying period
Enter a period in ms in which traced data is to be displayed.
Pressing F2“T.SRCH” key displays the trace data.
(Example) Entering 800, then pressing F2“T.SRCH” key
displays the waveform from 512 ms to 1024 ms.
(f) Exchanging positions at which traced data is displayed.

om
Pressing the F6“Exchg” key moves the cursor to the first traced
address.
Move the cursor to an address to be displayed at different position
with or key and press SELECT key. Move the cursor
to an address to be displayed at the position of the specified

r.c
address and press TO key.
Pressing EXEC key exchanges the positions of the traced data
items.
After TO key is pressed in the above procedure, Only EXEC key
is effective.

e
Pressing CANCEL key restores the exchange trace data to
original positions.
nt
[Changing of Function key]
ce
F6
Exchg
nc

F6 F7
Select Cancel
.c

F6 F7
To Cancel
w

F6 F7
w

Exec Cancel
w

(g) Reading signals automatically at power on

Since parameter and sampling data is stored in nonvolatile
memory, data is retained when the power is turned off.
When the parameters for sampling have been specified and bit 6
of keep relay K17 or K900 have been set to 1, the data sampling
automatically starts at power on.

99
3. OPERATION B–62884EN/01

3.4.3.9 The system software information such as specifications, version, and etc
Display System can be referred.
Information (1) Menu position
To display “System Information” dialog box, pull down [2.
Diagnose] menu, and select [System Information] on the menu

2. Diagnose

om
Ladder Monitor
Signal Status
PMC Parameter
PMC alarm status
PMC Status
RUN/STOP the program

r.c
Signal Trace
Signal Analysis
System Information

e
(2) Displaying dialog box
When [System Information] is selected, the following dialog box
ntappears.
Press Enter , Space or . key to close “System Information” dialog
ce
box.

System Information
nc

Ladder Editing Package

A08B–9201–J510
Version 01.0
Copyright(C) 1996. FANUC LTD
.c

Fig.3.4.3.9 (a)
w

Notes
1 The on–line monitor driver occupies the line while it is
w

operating.
In this state, other input/output functions cannot use the
line.
w

If other input/output functions use the line, it is necessary to

display the abovementioned parameter and stop the
on–line monitor driver.
2 While the on–line monitor driver is operating, the following
functions cannot be used.

[PMCLAD], [I/O], [EDIT], and [SYSPRM] functions on
CRT/MDI.

[EDIT], [SYSTEM PARAM], and [I/O] functions on
DPL/MDI.

100
B–62884EN/01 3. OPERATION

3.4.4 The [3. I/O] menu provides the following options:

Input/Output
3. I/O

Load program 1. For the [Load program] dialog box

Store program 2. For the [Store program] dialog box
Backup program 3. For the [Backup program] dialog box

om
Notes
1 In case of operating NC, the screen display of NC (Position,
etc.) might slow when using input/output functions (Load
from PMC, Store to PMC, etc.).

r.c
There is no problem in the operation of NC. It is
recommended to using input/output functions while NC is
not operating.
2 When screen made by C language executor is displayed,
the communication speed decreases. It is recommended

e
to use input/output functions after moving to other screens
(Position, etc.).
nt
ce
3.4.4.1 A program held on the PMC can be transferred to the personal computer.
Loading of Program “LOAD OF PROGRAM” is used to transfer a ladder program from the
PMC to the personal computer when, for example, using the program with
the on–line function.
nc

(1) Menu position

To display the “Load program” dialog box, display the [3. I/O]
pull–down menu, then select [Load PROGRAM] from the menu.
.c

3. I/O
w

Load program
Store program
Backup program
w

(2) Displaying the dialog box

w

Selecting [Load of program] causes the following dialog box to

appear.

101
3. OPERATION B–62884EN/01

Load program

Transfer data type

F LADDER f ALL

0% 100%

Load
program

om
size
Exec Abort Cancel indicator

Abort loading
Execute loading Close dialog box

r.c
Fig.3.4.4.1 (a)

(3) Operation

e
Select a desired button by pressing the Tab key, then press the Enter

key.
ntOnce the program has been loaded normally, the dialog box closes
automatically.
ce
3.4.4.2 A program held by the personal computer is transferred to the PMC.
Storing to the Program Use “Store program” to transfer a ladder program from the personal
computer to the PMC to enable, for example, the use of the program with
nc

the on–line function.

(1) Menu position
To display the “Store program” dialog box, display the [3. I/O]
pull–down menu, then select [Store program] from the menu.
.c

3. I/O
w

Load program
w

Store program
Backup program
w

(2) Displaying the dialog box

Selecting [Store program] causes the following dialog box to appear.

102
B–62884EN/01 3. OPERATION

Store program

Transfer data type

F LADDER f ALL

0% 100%

Loading
program
size

om
Exec Abort Cancel indicator

Abort storing
Execute storing Close dialog box

r.c
Fig.3.4.4.2 (a)

(3) Operation

e
Select a desired button by pressing the Tab key, then press the Enter

key.
nt
Once the program has been stored normally, the dialog box closes
automatically.
ce
Notes
S While “Online Editor” is in progress, a program cannot be
stored to the PMC. To enable storing to the PMC, move to
“Ladder Monitor”.
nc

S If the CNC is turned off after an edited program is stored to

the PMC but before the program is backed up, the results
of editing will be lost. When storing a program to the CNC,
therefore, backup the program (see Section 3.4.4.3).
.c
w

3.4.4.3 A program stored in the PMC or which has been edited with the on–line
Program Backup function need to be backed up so that the program is not lost when the
power to the CNC is turned off.
w

Caution
A program being edited or which is currently stored will be
w

lost if the power to the CNC is turned off before the program
has been backed up. Always back up such a program
before turning off the power to the CNC.

(1) Menu position

To display the program backup dialog box, first display the
pull–down menu for [3.I/O], then select “Backup program”

103
3. OPERATION B–62884EN/01

3. I/O

Load program
Store program
Backup program

(2) Displaying the dialog box

When [Backup program] is selected, a dialog box is displayed

om
according to the backup destination. See Section 1.2.1.2 for
information about the backup destination for each CNC system
configuration.
(a) CNC system on which a program is backed up to PMC flash
memory

r.c
Backup program

Set CNC to “Emergency Stop” status and select EXEC to backup

e
program to F-ROM.

nt Exec Cancel
ce
Executes backup. Closes the dialog
box.

Fig.3.4.4.3 (a)
nc

(b) CNC system on which a program is backed up to PMC program

memory on the personal computer
.c

Backup program
w

Sure to backup the program into the Open–CNC system ?

w

Exec Cancel
w

Executes backup. Closes the dialog

box.

Fig.3.4.4.3 (b)

(3) Operation
1) Click the [Exec] button. The message [Now backup] appears,
and backup is started. Provided backup is completed
successfully, the message “Backup complete” appears.

104
B–62884EN/01 3. OPERATION

2) Close the dialog box by clicking the [Cancel] button or pressing

the Esc key.

Caution
In the case of a CNC system in which programs are backed
up to PMC flash memory, place the CNC in the emergency
stop state before starting backup.

om
3.4.5 This function establishes or disconnects a communication link between
Communication open CNC and PMC. The on–line function can be used only while a
communication link is established.
The communication link is established automatically as soon as the
computer is executed.

r.c
(1) Menu position
To display the “Communication” dialog box, display the [4.
Communication] pull–down menu, then select [Communication]
from the menu.

e
nt 4. Communication

Communication
ce
(2) Displaying the dialog box
(a) Displaying the “Communication” dialog box
nc

Selecting [Communication] causes the following dialog box to

appear:
.c

Communication

status
w
w

Start Start or stop

communica-
tion
w

Close
Cancel communica-
tion dialog
box

Fig.3.4.5 (a)

105
3. OPERATION B–62884EN/01

3.4.6 This section provides the following examples of using the on–line
Examples of Operation function:

3.4.6.1
Monitoring a Ladder (1) Starting the on–line functions
When the system is started, the on–line functions, and
communication are automatically started.

om
1. File 2. Diagnose 3. I/O 4. Communication

Communication

Status

r.c
Start

Try to connect with PMC . . . 0000 0000

e
Cancel

nt F7 F8 F9 F10
Splist Search Symbol Seting
ce
Fig.3.4.6.1 (a)

(2) Program loading

If a match with a program on the PMC is confirmed, the subprogram screen
nc

appears. If no match is found, the dialog box shown below appears. From
the dialog box, select [Load] to load a program from the PMC.
.c

N : E–3160 selected program is not same.

w

Load Load from PMC program memory.

w

Store Store to PMC program memory.

w

Disregard Disregard difference.

Quit Quit On–Line function.

Fig.3.4.6.1 (b)

106
B–62884EN/01 3. OPERATION

(3) Selecting a subprogram

(a) After a program is loaded from the PMC, the “Sub–program list”
dialog box appears as shown below:

Sub–program list

LEVEL 1
LEVEL 2
P00001 (OPEN RIGHT DOOR ) MOVE RIGHT DOOR TO LIMIT–SWTH–R1

om
P00002 (OPEN LEFT DOOR ) MOVE LEFT DOOR TO LIMIT–SWTH–L1
S P00010 (GRIP WORK PEICE ) PICK UP A WORK ON THE STAND
P00011 (PUT WORK PIECE ) PUT DOWN A WORK
P00021 (CLOSE RIGHT DOOR) MOVE RIGHT DOOR TO LIMIT–SWTH–R2
P00022 (CLOSE LEFT DOOR ) MOVE LEFT DOOR TO LIMIT–SWTH–L2

r.c
OK Cancel

e
Fig.3.4.6.1 (c)

nt(b) By pressing the

subprogram to be displayed.
or key, position the cursor to the
ce
(c) Press the Enter key.
(d) The ladder diagram for the specified subprogram is displayed.
(4) Monitoring action of ladder diagram
nc

The “Ladder Monitor” window is displayed as following.

(a) Displaying the “Ladder Monitor” window

1. File 2. Diagnose 3. I/O 4. Communication

Ladder Monitor
.c

[LEVEL1] NET 00001-00006

Ô
w

R0000.1

Ô
D000
R0000.0

ÔÔÔÔ Ô
D000

ÔÔÔÔ
w

SUB 1

ÔÔÔÔ
END
w

F7 F8 F9 F10
SpList Search Symbol Seting

Fig.3.4.6.1 (d)

(b) Monitoring contact and coil status

Contacts and coils are displayed to indicate their status: ON (1)

107
3. OPERATION B–62884EN/01

or OFF (0). They are displayed with thick or thin line according
to their status as follows.
ON (1) OFF (0)

Thick Thin

Thin Thick

Thick Thin

om
Thick Thin

(S) Thick Thin

(R)
Thick Thin

r.c
(c) Moving in the ladder
The area displayed on the window can be moved by
Page Page
cursor-up/down key and Up / Down . Function key F8

[Search] is useful to jump directly to your destination.

e
(d) Searching for a net
To move to a desired position, enter the number of the net to be
nt displayed, its address, or functional instruction number (Sxxx).
Then, press function key F8 [SEARCH].
(e) Opening the “Display setting” dialog box
Pressing function key F10 [SET] causes the “Display setting”
ce
dialog box to appear.

Display setting
nc

Ladder Mode
f Ladder Monitor F Online Editor

Symbol & Comment Display

.c

F Symbol
f Address
f Relay Comment
w

f Symbol & Address

f Relay Comment & Address
f Relay Comment & Symbol
w

Function Parameter OK
j Display
w

Cancel

Fig.3.4.6.1 (e)

(f) Displaying functional instruction parameters

Position the cursor to “Function Parameter” and check
“Display”. Then, press the Enter key to close the “Display

108
B–62884EN/01 3. OPERATION

setting” dialog box. The functional instruction parameters

appear as shown below:

-OFF
RST SUB 36 0002
-
ADDB
TCTRL-1
ACT TCNT-1
[ 12]
0000000001

om
NXT-TCNT
[ 13]

Contents of address

r.c
TCNT-1 Contents of address
NXT-TCNT

Fig.3.4.6.1 (f)

e
(g) Changing the symbol/comment display mode
Open the “Display setting” dialog box again. Position the cursor
nt to “Address” in the “Symbol & Comment Display” field. Press
the Enter key to close the “Display setting” dialog box. The
contact, coil, and functional instruction parameters appear,
ce
together with PMC addresses, as shown below:

R9091.0 RST
nc

SUB 36 0002
ADDB
R0103.2 ACT R0112
[ 12]
.c

0000000001

R0114
w

[ 13]
w

Fig.3.4.6.1 (g)
w

(5) Checking the PMC status

(a) Displaying the “Status” window
Select [2. Diagnose] from the menu bar. Then, select “PMC
status”. The “Status” window appears as shown below:

109
3. OPERATION B–62884EN/01

Status

Series/Edition
4066/10

PMC TYPE
PMC-RB4

om
SCAN TIME
CUR 0ms
MAX 0ms
MIN 0ms

Date/Time

r.c
00/00/00
00:00:00

e
Fig.3.4.6.1 (h)

nt(b) Checking the alarm state

When the PMC enters the alarm state, the color of the PMC alarm
icon changes from gray to yellow. Should this occur, select [2.
Diagnose] and open the “PMC alarm message” dialog box. Then,
ce
check the details of the alarm state. (For details of icons, see (2),
”Displaying the PMC status (icon)” in Section 3.4.1.2.)

PMC alarm message

nc

ER32 NO I/O DEVICE

.c
w

Ok
w

Fig.3.4.6.1 (i)
w

(c) Checking whether a program is running

While a ladder program is running, the icon shown in Fig. 3.4.6.1
(j) is visible. When no ladder program is running, the icon
indicated in Fig. 3.4.6.1. (k) is visible. (For details of icons, see
(2), ”Displaying the PMC status (icon)” in Section 3.4.1.2.)

110
B–62884EN/01 3. OPERATION

Program on Program on
PMC is running. PMC is stopped.

Fig. 3.4.6.1 (j) Fig. 3.4.6.1 (k)

To change the ladder program execution status, select [2.

om
Diagnose] then use the “RUN/STOP the ladder” dialog box.
(d) Displaying the communication status
While communication with the PMC is being performed, the icon
shown in Fig. 3.4.6.1 (l) is visible. When communication with
the PMC has not been established, the icon indicated in Fig.
3.4.6.1 (m) is visible. (For details of icons, see (2), ”Displaying
the PMC status (icon)” in Section 3.4.1.2.)

e r.c
Communication Communication
is active. is stopped.

nt
ce
Fig. 3.4.6.1 (l) Fig. 3.4.6.1 (m)

When changing the status of the communication being performed

with the PMC, use the [4. Communication] dialog box.
(6) Monitoring signals
nc

(a) Opening ”Signal Status” window

Pull down the [2. Diagnose] menu, select [Signal Status] from the
menu, the ”Signal Status” window is displayed,
.c

Signal Status
w

G00000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 : 00
G00001 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 : 00
G00002 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 : 00
w

G00003 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 : 00
G00004 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 : 00
G00005 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 : 00
w

G00006 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 : 00
G00007 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 : 00
G00008 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 : 00
G00009 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 : 00

Fig.3.4.6.1 (n)

and the functions of function keys change as following.

111
3. OPERATION B–62884EN/01

F4 F8 F10
Symbol Search Wrt On

or or

F4 F10
Adress WrtOff

Fig.3.4.6.1 (o)

om
(b) Searching Address
Enter ”R0.0” and press function key F8 [Search], the address
R00000 is displayed at top of the window, and the cursor moves
onto signal of R00000.0.

r.c
Signal Status

e
R00000 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 : 42
R00001 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 : 00
ntR00002
R00003
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
:
:
00
00
ce
R00009 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 : 00

Fig.3.4.6.1 (p)
nc

(c) Displaying symbol

Function key F4 [Symbol] displays symbols of addresses on
the window, just above the corresponding signal. Symbols
.c

defined for byte address are also displayed just above their
addresses on the window. When the symbols are displayed, the
function key F4 changes to [Adress] which hides the symbols.
w

byte symbol bit symbols

w

Signal Status
w

CONST –ON– –OFF–

R00000 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 : 42

R00001 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 : 00

R00004 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 : 00

Fig.3.4.6.1 (q)

112
B–62884EN/01 3. OPERATION

(d) Unlocking write-protection

Press function key F10 [Wrt On] to unlock write protection of
the contents of addresses displayed on the window. The color of
cursor changes to red from yellow. And the function key F10

changes to [WrtOff].

Warning
Signal status changes should always be made with extreme
care. Signal status changes can have serious and

om
unforeseen results on a control system, and on the process
to which it applies, if they are improperly used. It is
recommended that these functions not be used with people
near the equipment.

r.c
(e) Changing status
Page
Move the cursor in the window by the cursor keys, Up and
Page
Down to the signal you want to change, then press Enter key to

e
make the signal status change. Enter key turns a signal status ON
which was OFF, and turns a signal status OFF which was ON.
nt Signal Status
ce
CONST –ON– –OFF–
R00000 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 : 42
nc

R00001 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 : 02

R00004 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 : 00
.c

Fig.3.4.6.1 (r)
w

Note
Some signals may not change their status even if you
w

change them, because the Ladder diagram writes the

signals frequently, or the signals are frequently updated by
NC, MMC, or the external I/O devices such as I/O-Link: NC
w

writes signals on F-address, MMC on M-address, and the

external I/O devices on X-address.

(f) Enabling write-protection again

Press function key F10 [WrtOff] to re-protect the contents of
addresses on the window from unforeseen changes. The color of
cursor returns to yellow from red. And the function key F10

returns to [Wrt On].

113
3. OPERATION B–62884EN/01

(g) Hiding ”Signal Status” window

Pull down the [2. Diagnose] menu, select [Ladder Monitor] from
the menu, then the ”Signal Status” window disappears.

Note
Non-volatile PMC address T, C, K and D which is called
”PMC parameter” has special window to display and modify
them (see 3.4.3.3 for detail).

(7) Backing up a program

Back up the results of editing performed with the on–line function to

om
prevent the results from being lost when the power to the CNC is
turned off. The results of editing will be lost if the power to the CNC
is turned off without performing backup.
(a) Displaying the program backup dialog box
Open [3.I/O] on the pull down menu, then select ”Backup
program”. The dialog box shown below appears. (The message

r.c
displayed in the dialog box varies with the CNC system.)

Backup program

e
Set CNC to “Emergency Stop” status and select EXEC to
nt backup program to FROM.
ce
Exec Cancel

Fig.3.4.6.1 (s)
nc

(b) Performing backup

Click the [Exec] button. The message ”Now backup...” appears,
and backup is started. Provided backup is completed
successfully, the message ”Backup complete” appears.
(c) Closing the dialog box
.c

Close the dialog box by clicking the [Cancel] button or pressing

the Esc key.
w

(8) Ending the on-line function

(a) Ending the on-line function
Select [1. FILE] from the menu bar. Then, select [Exit].
w

A message dialog box appears as shown below. Select [OK] to

end the on-line function.
w

Are you sure you want to exit ?

OK Cancel

Fig.3.4.6.1 (t)

114
B–62884EN/01 3. OPERATION

3.5
OFF-LINE FUNCTION

3.5.1 When Off–Line Function is selected from the on–line function menu, the
General following off–line menu screen appears.
Press the function key corresponding to the desired function. The
corresponding screen will appear.

om
OFF–LINE MENU RB4 (STEP SEQ) [C: ¥FLADDER¥]
[C: ¥DATA¥SAMPLE ]

F1 KEY : EDIT
F2 KEY : PRINT
F3 KEY : COMPILE

r.c
F4 KEY : DECOMPILE
F5 KEY : I/O
F6 KEY : PROGRAM OPTION SET–UP
F7 KEY : MNEMONIC EDIT
F8 KEY : UTILITY
F9 KEY : ON–LINE FUNCTION
F10 KEY : END

e
nt 1 EDIT 2 PRINT 3 COMPIL 4 DECOMP5 I/O 6 SET–UP 7 MNEEDT8 UTILTY 9 ONLINE 10

Fig.3.5.1 Off-line Menu Screen

END
ce
3.5.2 The source file of a sequence program is edited.
nc

Editing (1) Start

[Operation]
1) Select [EDIT] from the main menu indicated below.
.c

OFF–LINE MENU RB4 (STEP SEQ) [C: ¥FLADDER¥]

[C: ¥DATA¥SAMPLE ]
w

F1 KEY : EDIT
F2 KEY : PRINT
F3 KEY : COMPILE
w

F4 KEY : DECOMPILE
F5 KEY : I/O
F6 KEY : PROGRAM OPTION SET–UP
F7 KEY : MNEMONIC EDIT
F8 KEY : UTILITY
w

F9 KEY : ON–LINE FUNCTION

F10 KEY : END

1 EDIT 2 PRINT 3 COMPIL 4 DECOMP5 I/O 6 SET–UP 7 MNEEDT8 UTILTY 9 ONLINE 10 END

Fig.3.5.2 (a) Off-line Menu

115
3. OPERATION B–62884EN/01

2) The following editing menu screen appears:

EDIT RB4 (STEP SEQ) [C: ¥FLADDER¥]

F1 KEY : TITLE
F2 KEY : LADDER DIAGRAM
F3 KEY : SYMBOL & COMMENT
F4 KEY : MESSAGE
F5 KEY : I/O MODULE
F6 KEY : SYSTEM PARAMETER
F10 KEY : END

om
r.c
1 TITLE 2 LADSEFC 3 SYMBOL4 MESSAG5 MODULE6 SYSPRM7 8 9 10 END

Fig.3.5.2(b) Editing Menu

3) Select data to be edited with the corresponding function key.

e
4) The editing screen for the selected data appears. For example, the
screen below is displayed when [TITLE] is selected.
nt EDIT (TITLE) RB4 (STEP SEQ) [C: ¥FLADDER¥]
ce
1) MACHINE TOOL BUILDER NAME :
2) MACHINE TOOL NAME : FANUC PMC–MODEL RC4 & F16MB
3) PMC & NC NAME :
4) PMC PROGRAM NO :

5) EDITION NO :
nc

6) PROGRAM DRAWING NO :
7) DATA OF PROGRAMMING :

8) PROGRAM DESIGNED BY :
9) ROM WRITTEN BY :

10) REMARKS :
.c
w

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 END

Fig.3.5.2(c) Editing Title

w

(2) Termination
[Operation]
w

1) Select [END] or press the Esc key on the editing screen.

2) The following message appears:

F1 Save (update) & quit

F2 Quit
F3 Edit

3) Press the desired function key.

116
B–62884EN/01 3. OPERATION

(i) When UPDATE is selected, the editing operation is

terminated after the results of editing are written to a file.
(ii) When QUIT is selected, the editing operation is terminated
without writing the results of editing to a file.
(iii) When EDIT is selected, the editing is continued.
4) When UPDATE or QUIT is selected, the display returns to the
editing menu screen.
(i) To continue editing, select the appropriate function key.
(ii) To terminate editing, select [END]. The display returns to the

om
main menu.

3.5.2.1 Title data represents the titles of sequence programs generated by a

Title Data Editing machine tool builder.

r.c
(1) Start
[Operation]
1) Select [TITLE] on the editing menu screen.
2) The following title editing screen appears:

e
nt 1)
2)
EDIT (TITLE) RB4 (STEP SEQ)

MACHINE TOOL BUILDER NAME :

MACHINE TOOL NAME
[C: ¥FLADDER¥]

: FANUC PMC–MODEL RC4 & F16MA

ce
3) PMC & NC NAME :
4) PMC PROGRAM NO :

5) EDITION NO :
6) PROGRAM DRAWING NO :
7) DATA OF PROGRAMMING :
nc

8) PROGRAM DESIGNED BY :
9) ROM WRITTEN BY :

10) REMARKS :
.c

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 END
w

Fig.3.5.2.1

(2) Input
w

[Operation]
1) Select an input item (displayed in reverse video) with the
w

and keys.
2) Enter data.
The maximum number of characters usable for each title data
item is listed below.
MACHINE TOOL BUILDER NAME : 32 characters
MACHINE TOOL NAME : 32 characters
CNC & NC NAME : 32 characters
PMC PROGRAM NO : 4 characters
EDITION NO : 2 characters

117
3. OPERATION B–62884EN/01

PROGRAM DRAWING NO : 32 characters

DATE OF PROGRAMMING : 16 characters
PROGRAM DESIGNED BY : 32 characters
ROM WRITTEN BY : 32 characters
REMARKS : 32 characters
(3) Termination
[Operation]
1) Select [END] on press the Esc key to return to the editing menu
screen.

om
2) The following message appears.

F1 Save (update) & quit

F2 Quit
F3 Edit

3) Press the desired function key. The system returns to the editing

r.c
menu.

3.5.2.2 (1) A program configuration screen

e
This screen lists subprograms, and supports the selection and editing
Ladder Diagram/Step of a target subprogram.
Sequence Editing nt
EDIT (LADDER/STEP SEQUENCE) PMC–RC4 (STEP SEQ) [C:¥FLADDER
PROGRAM: (STEP SEQUENCE DEMO PROGRAM)
]
ce
j LEVEL1 j LEVEL2 j LEVEL3
j P1 j P2 j P4 j P5 j P6 j P7
j P8 j P9 j P14 j P15 j P16 j P17
nc

j P21 j P22 j P24 j P25 j P26 j P27

j j j j j j
j j j j j j
j P101 j P202 j]P304 j]P405 j]P406 j]P407
.c

S–prog’P1
w

1 ADRESS 2 3 4 5 6 DELETE 7 8 9 NEW 10 ZOOM

w

(a) Screen display (Pxxx represents a subprogram number)

Screen display Meaning Display by [ZOOM] or Enter
w

j LEVEL1 the 1st ladder level ladder diagram

j LEVEL2 the 2nd ladder level ladder diagram
j LEVEL3 the 3rd ladder level (Note 1) ladder diagram
j Pxxx a subprogram ladder diagram
j] Pxxx a subprogram step sequence diagram
∆] Pxxx (Note 2) a subprogram in editing step sequence diagram

Pxxx a duplicate subprogram ladder or step seqence
diagram

118
B–62884EN/01 3. OPERATION

Notes
1 The 3rd ladder level can be omitted.
2 If the [ZOOM] key was used to nest a program to a certain
depth, and if the subprogram configuration screen is
displayed upon a single press of the [MAIN] key, the editing
of the subprograms for which the [ZOOM] key was pressed
is suspended. Such subprograms are marked with ∆].

Following keys are useful in this screen.

om
Function key
[ADRESS] : Switching address/symbol display
[DELETE] : Deleting a subprogram
[NEW ] : Creating a new subprogram
[ZOOM ] : Modifying a subprogram

r.c
Other keys
Page
Up : Displaying previous screen
Page
: Displaying next screen

e
Down

Meaning of display
nt
EDIT(LADDER/STEP SEQUENCE) RC4(STEP SEQ) [C:¥FLADDER]
ce
EDIT : Editing screen
(LADDER/STEP SEQUENCE) : The list screen of subprogram
PMC-RC4 (STEP SEQ) : Setting a model
[A:¥FLADDER¥ : Current directory
nc

PROGRAM:(STEP SEQUENCE DEMO PROGRAM)

PROGRAM: Remarks which is one of the title data

.c

jLEVEL1 jLEVEL2 jLEVEL3

w

LEVEL1 : The 1st level of ladder

LEVEL2 : The 2nd level of ladder
w

LEVEL3 : The 3rd level of ladder

j P0001 j]P0002 j P0004 j P0005 j P0006 j P0007

w

j : a subprogram of the ladder

j] : a subprogram of the step sequence

(b) Creating a new subprogram

–Press the [NEW] key.

New program name ?

119
3. OPERATION B–62884EN/01

–Enter the number of the subprogram to be created (P200, for

example).

Program Type ?
F1 Ladder
F2 Step sequence

(c) Modifying a subprogram

–Key in the number of the subprogram to be modified (P200, for
example), then press the [ZOOM] or Enter key. Alternatively,

om
position the cursor to P200 then press the [ZOOM] or Enter key.
–If a subprogram number marked with ∆] (P21, for example) is
selected, the following message is displayed:

r.c
Editing this subprogram is not completed.
Continue to select it ? (Yes/No) [Y]

To continue the editing session using the results obtained from

e
suspended previous editing session, press the Enter key. To
cancel the results of the previous editing session and edit the
nt subprogram from its original state, enter N .

(2) Editing a ladder diagram

ce
(a) Start
Display the program list screen. Position the cursor to the
program indicated by j, then press the [ZOOM] or Enter key.
The ladder diagram editing screen, shown below, appears.
nc

EDIT (LADDER) ORIGinal RC4 <0>[C:¥FLADOER¥] (a)

ŸŸ
ŸŸŸŸ
[C: ¥DATA¥SAMPLE¥P1.#LA]PMC–RC4 NET 00001–00003 STEP 00010/32000 EMS (b)

ŸŸ
ŸŸŸŸ ŸŸ
.c

SUB71 (c)
P0001
SP P0001

Ÿ ŸŸ
ŸŸŸ ŸŸ
X000.0 Y000.0

ŸŸ
ŸŸŸ
R000.0 ACT
SUB 8 1100
w

MOVE 0111

ŸŸ
ŸŸŸ
D000
D010
w
w

AD=X0.0 CCO=TEST DATA NO.1 000014/000014

(d)
CO=SAMPLE 00001 RC0=RELAY SAMPLE 000012

1 2 3 4 5 function 6 7 8 9 10 comand

Fig.3.5.2.2 (a) Ladder Diagram Editing Screen

(i) When the [View] command is used, a different line is shown.

(For the [View] command, see (j) ”Combining a sequence
program”

120
B–62884EN/01 3. OPERATION

(ii) The line shows the name of the file which is being edited,
number of the net which is displayed on the screen, and the
number of program steps/maximum number of steps that can
be edited.
(iii) The line shows a sub-program number (P address) or label
number (L address).
(iv) The lines show a symbol and comment added to the data at
the address selected by the cursor.
1) AD=X000.0 : Address on which the cursor is
placed

om
2) SY=SAMPLE: Symbol data
00001 Total number of symbols
3) RCO=RELAY
SAMPLE : Relay comment data
00012 Total character numbers of relay

r.c
comment
4) CCO=TEST DATA No.
1 : Coil comment data
0030/00030 Total character number of coil
comment output to object file/Total

e
character number of coil comment.

(b) Function key indications and selection

1)
nt The ladder diagram editing functions correspond to the function
keys as indicated below.
ce
1 2 3 4 5 function 6 7 8 or 9 or 10 comand

[comand] ↓ 2)
nc

2) [COMAND]

1 insnet 2 Delnet 3 Insert 4 Adress 5 Search 6 Copy 7 Move 8 File 9 syEdit 10 Zoom
.c

↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓
5) 6) 7) 8) 8) 9) 10)

3) Under condition 1), holding down [SHIFT] lets you select the following items.
w

1 (S) 2 (R) 3 4 5 netcmt 6 page 7 8 9 10

w

4) Under condition 2), holding down [SHIFT] lets you select the following items.
w

1 2 3 4 5 G–srch 6 7 8 9 10 List

5) [Delnet]

1 exec 2 cancel 3 search 4 c–down 5 c–up 6 7 exclud 8 9 10

6) [Insert]

1 Insnet 2 Inslin 3 Inselm 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

121
3. OPERATION B–62884EN/01

7) [Search]

1 top 2 bottom 3 srch 4 w–srch 5 n–srch 6 s–srch 7 c–down 8 c–up 9 10

8) [Copy] / [Move]

1 until 2 cancel 3 search 4 c–down 5 c–up 6 7 8 9 10

↓ *

om
1 to 2 cancel 3 search 4 c–down 5 c–up 6 to–[1] 7 to–org 8 9 10

* [to-org] is displayed in the [File] command mode only.

9) [File]
Opens a window in which the name of an input program can be specified. Select desired processing from

r.c
a POP-UP menu.
10)[syEdit]

1 exec 2 cancel 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

e
Notes
nt
While the function keys of 1) are displayed in ladder diagram editing, a command of 2) can be
executed. For example, entering A and [COMAND] on the 1) screen has the same effect
ce
as selecting F4 [Adress] on the 2) screen. To select a command of 2) in this way, enter the
upper-case letter (not necessarily initial letter) in the corresponding command name shown on
the 2) screen.
nc

(c) Ladder program input

For ladder program input, select [LADDER] from the editing
menu. The function key programmer menu is displayed. When
.c

no sequence program has been entered, the screen displays only

the right and left vertical rails of a ladder diagram.
At this stage, program input can be started.
w

Use the cursor keys to move the cursor to any location in the
ladder diagram.
Examples of basic instruction program input and function
w

instruction program input are shown below.

w

122
B–62884EN/01 3. OPERATION

(i) Example of basic instruction program input

Ÿ Ÿ ŸŸ
X0.1 D30.2 F14.2
ŸŸY52.7

Ÿ Ÿ ŸŸ ŸŸ
Ÿ
X2.4

om
[Operation]
1) Move the cursor to the start position, then press

r.c
[ ].
The [ ] symbol appears on the screen. The
message ”HORIZONTAL LINE ILLEGAL” appears
at the lower-right corner of the screen. This message
warns the user that horizontal ladder diagram line

e
creation is not completed. Enter an address and bit data.
2) Enter X0.1 on the keyboard and press the Enter key. The
nt address is set at the contact, and the cursor moves right.
3) As in 1) and 2), enter contact A of D30.2.
4) Enter contact B of F14.2.
ce
Press [ ] and enter address F14.2, then press the
Enter key. The address is set on contact B and the cursor
moves right.
nc

5) Without moving the cursor, press [ ].

A horizontal line segment extending to the right is drawn
automatically and a relay coil symbol appears near the
right vertical rail.
.c

6) Enter address Y52.7, then press the Enter key.

The cursor automatically moves to the input start
position on the next line.
w

7) Next, enter an OR condition.

Press [ ] and enter address X2.4, then press the
key.
w

Enter

The address is set at contact B and the cursor moves right.

8) Press [ ] to enter a horizontal line.
w

To enter a horizontal line, enter a number and press the

horizontal line key [ ]. The line segment will be
entered as many times as the number entered. Note,
however, that such a line never exceeds the right vertical
rail.
9) A vertical line extending upward is required for OR.
Press [ ] to enter a vertical line extending upward.
(ii) Example of function instruction program input
For function instruction input, press the function key

123
3. OPERATION B–62884EN/01

[functn]. Next, enter a SUB number, then press the Enter key.
A function instruction can also be entered by entering the
function instruction name or SUB number and pressing the
[functn] key.
If the user does not remember a certain instruction name or
SUB number, a function instruction table that lists function
instructions and corresponding SUB numbers can be
displayed on the screen.
The table can be displayed just by pressing the [functn] key
without entering any data. Then the function instruction
table is automatically displayed.

om
Press the [functn] key to return to the ladder diagram screen
from the function instruction table.

Ÿ
Ÿ
ACT MOVE (1) (2) (3) (4)
ffff ffff ffff ffff

r.c
fff.f (SUB 8)

Control condition Output address

Input data address
Low–order 4–bit logical

e
multiplication data
High–order 4–bit logical multiplication data
nt When entering a function instruction with this function,
enter the parameters of the function instruction vertically

ŸŸ
as shown below.
ce
MOVE
ffff ← (1)
ffff ← (2)
SUB 8
ffff ← (3)
ffff ← (4)
nc

[Operation]
1) Enter a control condition.
.c

Press [ ]. Next, enter an address and bit data, then

press the Enter key. The cursor moves right.
w

2) Enter a function instruction.

Press the [functn] key. Next, enter SUB number 8, then
press the Enter key. The function instruction diagram
w

shown above appears.

3) Enter the parameters of the function instruction.
First, enter the high–order 4–bit logical multiplication
w

data of the first parameter, then press the Enter key. The
cursor automatically moves downwards. Enter the
remaining three parameters one by one.
(iii) Restrictions and notes on ladder editing
[Restrictions]
1) Restrictions related to the ladder 1 net (corresponding to
the portion between the RD and WRT instructions)

124
B–62884EN/01 3. OPERATION

a) When the ladder 1 net exceeds 256 steps (as counted

as steps in the corresponding mnemonic program),
the following message appears:
“A limit of 256 steps per net was exceeded.”
If there are more than 256 steps, no net is displayed.
2) Restrictions related to a ladder diagram display per
screen
If an attempt is made to display more than 70 ladder net
lines per screen, the error described below occurs.
a) Symptom
(a–1) When there are more than 70 lines per net, the

om
following message appears.
“The NET being created is too large.”
If 70 lines are exceeded, the following message
appears, and no net is displayed.
“A limit of 70 lines per net was exceeded.”
(a–2) When there are more than 70 lines totaled over two

r.c
or more nets, the following message appears.
“The NET being created is too large.”
If 70 lines are exceeded when totaled over two or
more nets, the following message appears for a net
that is the current net when 70 lines are exceeded,

e
and the display of the current net is discontinued.
“The NET is larger than the editing buffer.”
In this case, specify the net to be displayed, using
nt the ladder diagram search function (such as net
number search).
b) How to obtain the number of lines per screen
ce
Even if part of a net is displayed on a screen, all lines
of the net are included in the total for that screen. In
addition, a space line between nets is counted as a
valid line.
The number of lines in each net to be displayed is
nc

determined as follows:
(b–1) Basic instructions
One line is comprised of one basic instruction.

Ÿ
.c

← 1 line

Ÿ
w

Ÿ
← 2 lines
w

(b–2) Function instructions

w

The number of lines in a function instruction is:

The number of control conditions or parameters,
whichever is greater, plus 1
Examples of calculation follow.
– When the number of control conditions < number
of parameters

125
3. OPERATION B–62884EN/01

Ÿ
Number of control conditions = 2
RST
SUB 36 1004 Number of parameters = 4
ADDB Number of lines = number of
ACT parameters + 1 = 5 lines
R000

R010

R020

om
– When the number of control conditions > number
of parameters

Ÿ
Number of control conditions = 3
O.E

r.c
Ÿ
SUB 11 R100 Number of parameters = 1
PARI Number of lines = number of
RST control conditions + 1 = 5 lines

ACT

e
nt (b–3) Data table section of function instructions
The data table section of the COD, CODB, or
ce
DISP instruction is calculated as follows:
– When the data table is one or two bytes
Number of lines =
number of data tables/6 (+ 1 if there is a
nc

remainder)

ACT
Ÿ
Ÿ
.c

SUB 49 0011
DISP
0003
w

D300
w

000 0000 0000 0000 Number of lines in the data table

003 0000 0000 0000 section = 11/6
006 0000 0000 0000 = 1 with remainder 5
009 0000 0000 = 2 lines
w

– When the data table is four bytes

Number of lines =
number of data tables/4 (+ 1 if there is a
remainder)

126
B–62884EN/01 3. OPERATION

RST

ACT
SUB 27
CODB
0005

0007
Ÿ
D300

D320

om
000 00000000 00000000
Number of lines in the data table
002 00000000 00000000
section = 5/4
004 00000000
= 1 with remainder 1
= 2 lines

(b-4) Example of calculating the number of lines per

r.c
screen
For the ladder shown below, the number of lines in
the screen display section is obtained as follows:
- The valid nets on the display

e
screen are nets A and B.
- Number of lines in net A
Function instruction section +
nt data table section = 6 lines
(3+1) (11/6)
- The number of lines in net B is 2.
8 lines
ce
ŸŸ
ACT
Net A SUB 49 0011
DISP
nc

0003

D300
Screen display section
.c

000 0000 0000 0000

003 0000 0000 0000
006 0000 0000 0000
w

ŸŸ
009 0000 0000

Net B
ŸŸ
ŸŸ
w

ŸŸ
ŸŸ
w

Net C

c) Examples of symptoms
Example of symptom (a-1)
- The ladder diagram can be edited only when the
”total number of message data steps” parameter of
the DISP instruction (SUB 49) is less than or equal
to 396. This is because when the total number of
steps is 396, the net consists of 70 lines.

127
3. OPERATION B–62884EN/01

If a net that consists of a total of 396 steps or more

is created during mnemonic editing, the following
message appears, and the display of the net is
discontinued.
“The data table is too large.”
Example of symptom (a-2)
- If an attempt is made to enter the net of a function
instruction on the same screen as that of a basic
instruction, the following message is displayed,
and the attempt is rejected.
“The NET being created is too large.”

om
For example, if the basic instruction net has 68
lines, the MOVE instruction (SUB 8) cannot be
entered, (because the total number of lines exceeds
70). The results of calculation are described
below.

r.c
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Display
68-line net

Ÿ
screen

e
nt RST
SUB 8 Ÿ Number of MOVE
instruction lines =
number of parameters
MOVE (4) + 1 = 5
ce
68 + 5 = 73 lines

<Measure>
nc

If the display of the 68-line net is not scrolled, the

MOVE instruction can be entered.
- A basic instruction net cannot be entered together
with another basic-instruction net, if the total
number of lines is greater than 70.
.c

For example, if a 68-line basic-instruction net is

followed by another basic-instruction net, the
element of the third line of the latter net cannot be
w

entered.

ŸŸ
ŸŸ
w

Display
ŸŸ
ŸŸ
68-line net
w

screen

ŸŸ
ŸŸ No more lines
can be entered.

<Measure>
If the display of the 68-line net is not scrolled, the
latter basic instruction can be entered.

128
B–62884EN/01 3. OPERATION

- When the CODB instruction (SUB 27) and DISP

instruction (SUB 49) are edited on the same
screen, if an attempt is made to enter 396 as the
total number of message data steps for the DISP
instruction (SUB 49), the following message
appears, and the attempt is rejected.
“The NET being created is too large.”
This symptom also occurs in a combination of two
DISP instructions and a combination of CODB and
COD instructions.
For example, if the number of tables for the CODB

om
instruction is 200, the total number of steps for the
DISP instruction can be only 66 at maximum. The
calculation results are shown below.

Ÿ
4 bytes

r.c
200 data tables

Ÿ
RST
SUB 27 0004
ACT CODB 0200
Number of CODB
000 00000000 00000000 instruction lines = 55
Display 002 00000000 00000000 Function instruction section

e
screen & =4 parameters + 1
Data table section
196 00000000 00000000

Ÿ
=200/4 = 50
nt 198 00000000 00000000
ACT
SUB 49
DISP Ÿ
Calculation of DISP
instruction data items that
can be entered
ce
Function instruction sections
=3 parameters + 1
Number of remaining lines
=70 - 55 - 4
= 11 lines
nc

Data tables
=11*6 = 66

<Measure>
.c

Moving the DISP instruction to the top of the display

screen makes it possible to set the total number of
steps to 396.
w

3) Restriction on the maximum number of steps

The maximum number of ladder steps that can be edited is as
follows:
w

Without EMS : 21840 steps

With EMS : 32000 steps
Note, however, that the maximum allowable number of steps
can decrease, depending on how memory is used.
w

If a ladder being edited exceeds the maximum allowable

number of steps, editing is disabled and the following
message is displayed:
MNEMONIC BUFFER OVER

129
3. OPERATION B–62884EN/01

Notes
1 An attempt to scroll a program on the screen with a scroll key
or other keys fails if the ladder program is incomplete (for
example, without addresses) or invalid.
A correct ladder program must be created before the screen
can be scrolled.
2 Up to eight contacts and one coil can be entered in one line
on the screen.
However, this restriction does not apply to a sequence
program created in mnemonic format. When a sequence

om
program created in mnemonic format exceeds this limit, it is
displayed over several lines with a continuation symbol.
This continuation symbol cannot be deleted with
[ ]. Use [Delnet] (net deletion) to delete this
symbol. (See Item (6) in this section.)

r.c
(d) Replacing sections of a sequence program
Lines in an already created sequence program can be replaced in
the same way as described in Item (c) above.

e
Move the cursor to a program section to be changed, then enter
new data.
(e) Sequence program addition
nt Press the [comand] soft key of the function key programmer
menu and use the function keys indicated below.
To terminate the programmer menu, press the Esc key.
ce
1 insnet 2 Delnet 3 Insert 4 Adress 5 Search 6 Copy 7 Move 8 File 9 syEdit 10

[Insert] ↓
nc

1 insnet 2 inslin 3 inselm 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

As described below, there are four types of sequence program

.c

addition in a ladder diagram.

(i) Example: when a relay contact is added on a line
D Addition on a line
w

Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ
w
w

To be added

Move the cursor to the position to add item(s), then enter

item(s) in the way described in Item (c) above.
D When a vertical line affects addition

130
B–62884EN/01 3. OPERATION

Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ
Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ To be added

Cursor

[Operation]

om
1) Move the cursor to the position shown above.
2) Press [ ] to delete the vertical line to the left
extending upward. This disappears.
3) Press [ ] to create a vertical line extending upward
to the right of the cursor, then press [ ]. A
horizontal line and vertical line are created.

r.c
4) Move the cursor to the point on the line where a contact
is to be added.
5) Press [ ] to add a contact.

e
(ii) When a line is added vertically

nt Ÿ Ÿ ŸŸ
Ÿ
Ÿ Ÿ
Ÿ ŸŸ
ŸŸ
Ÿ
ce
Ÿ
Ÿ
To be added

Ÿ ŸŸ
nc

To add a line vertically, an area is required for the addition.

.c

To create such an area, the lower part of the ladder diagram

must be shifted down by one line. To do this, move the cursor
to any point in the ladder diagram enclosed in dashed lines,
then press the [insnet] key.
w

Each time the [insnet] key is pressed, the lower part of the
ladder diagram is shifted one line down to create an area for
addition. Make an addition in this area.
w

After line addition, any remaining area (as in the case where
two lines are added in an area large enough for three lines) can
be left as it is.
w

[Operation]
1) Move the cursor to any point in the ladder diagram
enclosed in dashed lines.
2) Press [insnet].
The lower part of the ladder diagram is shifted down by
one line.
3) When the [insnet] key is pressed without entering a
numeric value, one line is inserted.
4) When the [insnet] key is pressed after entering a numeric
value, the number of lines specified is inserted.

131
3. OPERATION B–62884EN/01

5) Move the cursor to the desired position and press

[ ]. Then set address data and press the Enter key.
The cursor moves right.
6) Press the [ ] soft key to create an OR circuit.
(iii) Line insertion in a single-net sequence program
Blank lines are inserted one by one.
[Operation]
1) Enter the number of lines to be inserted, then press the
[inslin] key. The entered number of lines is inserted.

om
(When the [inslin] key is pressed without entering a
number, just one line is added.)

Ÿ
Ÿ Ÿ

r.c
Ÿ
Cursor
Ÿ

e
If the [inslin] key is pressed when the cursor is positioned
as shown in the left-hand figure, a blank line is inserted
as shown in the right-hand figure.
nt(iv) Element insertion in a single-net sequence program
Elements are added one by one.
ce
[Operation]
1) Enter the number of elements to be inserted, then press
the [inselm] key. The entered number of elements is
inserted.
If the character A is prefixed to the number of
nc

elements to be inserted and the [inselm] key is pressed,

elements are inserted after the cursor.
(If the [inselm] key is pressed without entering the
number of elements to be inserted, just one element is
.c

inserted.)

Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ
Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ
w

Cursor
w

If the [inselm] key is pressed when the cursor is placed

as shown in the left-hand figure, an element is inserted
w

as shown in the following figure. The element is inserted

before the cursor.

Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ
Cursor
Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ

132
B–62884EN/01 3. OPERATION

If the character A is entered and the [inselm] key is

pressed when the cursor is placed as shown in the
left-hand figure, an element is inserted as shown in the
right-hand figure. The element is inserted after the
cursor.
(f) Deletion in a sequence program
(i) A program can be partially deleted by positioning the cursor
at the location to be deleted and pressing one of the below
three soft keys
[ ] : Deletes a horizontal line, relay contact, relay

om
coil, etc.
[ ] : Deletes a vertical line extending upward to
the left of the cursor.
[ ] : Deletes a vertical line extending upward to
the right of the cursor.

r.c
(ii) Use the [Delnet] key to delete a program net (section from an
RD instruction to a WRT instruction).
(iii) Multiple nets can be deleted one by one.

e
1 Insnet 2 Delnet 3 Insert 4 Adress 5 Search 6 Copy 7 Move 8 File 9 syEdit 10

nt
[Delnet]

1 exec
↓

2 cancel 3 search 4 c–down 5 c–up 6 7 exclud 8 9 10

ce
[Operation]
1) Deletion
Move the cursor to the net to be deleted, then press the
[Delnet] key. The net to be deleted is displayed in red.
nc

2) Deleting multiple nets

Move the cursor by using keys such as the cursor down
key, [c-down] key, or [search] key, then display the nets
to be deleted in red. If the [c-down] key is pressed after
.c

a numeric value is entered, the cursor moves as many

times as the entered numeric value.
3) Execution : Press the [exec] key.
Cancellation: Press the [cancel] key.
w

Deletion except: Press the [exclud] key. Exclude nets

except specified nets in 2).
4) When the nets to be deleted are known beforehand, move
w

the cursor to the first net to delete, enter the number of

nets to delete, then press the [Delnet] key. With this
operation, steps 1) and 2) can be omitted.
w

(g) Searching in a sequence program

A sequence program can be searched using the following soft
keys:

1 Insnet 2 Delnet 3 Insert 4 Adress 5 Search 6 Copy 7 Move 8 File 9 syEdit 10

[Search] ↓

1 top 2 bottom 3 srch 4 w–srch 5 n–srch 6 s–crch 7 c–down 8 c–up 9 10

133
3. OPERATION B–62884EN/01

(i) [top]
When this key is pressed, the start of the sequence program
is displayed on the screen and the cursor is moved to the start
of the program.
(ii) [bottom]
When this key is pressed, the end of the sequence program is
displayed on the screen and the cursor is moved to the end of
the program.
(iii) [srch]
Search operation using this key searches the program for a

om
specified address from the current location for the cursor on
the screen to the end of the program. When an address is
found, it is displayed on the screen. An address to search for
can be specified in one of two ways.
1) Address specification using the cursor
Move the cursor to the relay contact of the address to

r.c
search for, then press the [srch] key. This operation
searches the program for the specified address from the
current location of the cursor on the screen to the end of
the program.
If the specified address is found, the section of the

e
program containg the address is displayed on the screen.
The cursor is automatically positioned at the found
address.
nt If the search operation fails to find the specified address,
the cursor does not move.
To terminate searching, press the Esc key.
ce
Ÿ
X2.0

Ÿ Ÿ F54.1 Y52.3
ŸŸ
G11.6
nc

Ÿ
D35.3
When the same address

Ÿ Ÿ ŸŸ
Y49.1 as this address is to be
G17.2 X4.2
searched for, move the

Ÿ
X14. 0
ŸŸ
D32.0

ŸŸ
cursor to this position,
.c

then press the [srch] key.

ŸŸ
F54.1 G43.1

Ÿ
X0. 4
w

Ÿ ŸŸ
When the same address
X0. 5 D21.2 is found, the cursor
moves to this location.
w

2) Address specification by address input

w

Enter the address to find with the keyboard, then press

the [srch] key.
This operation searches the program for the specified
address from the current location of the cursor on the
screen to the end of the program.
When the specified address is found, the section of the
program containing the address is displayed on the
screen. The cursor is automatically positioned at the
found address.
If the search operation fails to find the specified address,
an error indication appears.

134
B–62884EN/01 3. OPERATION

(iv) [w-srch] (WRT coil search)

This key is used to search the program for a relay coil with
a specified address from the current location of the cursor on
the screen to the end of the program. When a relay coil is
found, it is displayed on the screen. If multiple relay coils are
found, the coil which is the closest to the cursor is displayed.
The address of a relay coil to search for can be specified in
one of two ways.
1) Address specification using the cursor
Move the cursor to the relay coil with the address to
search for, then press the [w-srch] key.
This operation searches the program for relay coils with

om
the specified address from the current location of the
cursor on the screen to the end of the program.
When a relay coil with the specified address is found, the
section of the program containing it is displayed on the
screen and the cursor is positioned at the relay coil.
If the search operation fails to find a relay coil with the

r.c
specified address, an error indication appears.
2) Address specification by address input
Enter the address of relay coils to search for with the
keyboard, then press the [w-srch] key.
This operation searches the program for relay coils with

e
the specified address from the current location of the
cursor on the screen to the end of the program.
nt When a relay coil with the specified address is found, the
section of the program containing it is displayed on the
screen and the cursor is positioned at the relay coil.
If the search operation fails to find a relay coil with the
ce
specified address, an error indication appears.
(v) [n-srch] (net-number search)
This key displays those ladders that have a specified net
number, starting from the top of the screen. If the [n-srch] key
nc

is pressed without entering a number, the display is advanced

by one net.
(vi) [s-srch] (function-instruction search)
This key searches for function instructions. Searching is
.c

performed by entering a function instruction name or

number, then pressing the [s-srch] key. If the [s-srch] key is
pressed while the cursor is on a function instruction, function
instructions with the same number as that function
w

instruction are searched for.

(vii) Search operation using the cursor keys ( , )

w

D Enter an address or symbol, then press a cursor key. The

address is searched for.
w

D Enter a NET No., then press a cursor key. The NET No. is
searched for.
D Enter a function instruction name, or enter S followed by
a function instruction number, then press a cursor key. The
function instruction is searched for.
Example: Enter S1, then press a cursor key. The function
instruction END1 is searched for,
(viii) Searching in all main/sub-programs(G-SRCH)
Global searching in all main/sub-programs is enabled.

135
3. OPERATION B–62884EN/01

D The range of search

All programs, which include a currently displayed
subprogram, are searched for.
The subprogram is searched for in the ascending order of
P address.
a) From the current cursor position to bottom of currently
opening subprogram.
b) From next numbered subprogram to last numbered one.
c) From LEVEL1 to subprogram of which P address is
small next to a).
d) From top to cursor position in subprogram of a).

om
G-SRCH mode continues unless pushing the Esc key
or the [cancel] key.

r.c
1st net of LEVEL1
5)
X X

6)

e
7)

8)
← displaying on one of Whole
nt ← cursor
1)

2)
the screen subprograms program
ce
3)

X X Final net of the maximum numbered

4)
subprogram
nc

(Searching in the order of 1) to 8))

D Searching result
When the object of search is found, the cursor will move
.c

to the position.
In case of finding in another program, the program which
is currently displayed will be closed.
w

Then, the program which contains the object, will be

opened to display the object position with the cursor.
At this time, whether to save or quit modifications is
inquired, in case there are modifications in the program to
w

be closed.

When two or more objects exist, the result of search are

w

displayed in order of 1) one by one.

D Operation
The global search is operated with the following function
key.
1)

1 2 3 4 5 function 6 7 8 or 9 or 10 comand

[comand] ↓

136
B–62884EN/01 3. OPERATION

2) [comand]

1 insnet 2 Deinet 3 Insert 4 Adress 5 Search 6 Copy 7 Move 8 File 9 syEdit 10

3) Select the [G-srch] with pushing the [SHIFT] (the following

will be displayed) in state of 2)

1 2 3 4 5 G–srch 6 7 8 9 10 List

[G–srch] ↓

4)

om
1 2 3 srch 4 w–srch 5 6 s–srch 7 8 9 cancel 10

(Shortcut command is “ G + [COMMAND]”)

r.c
a) Starting of “G-SRCH” mode
It switches to the mode of ”G-SRCH” by the operation
of 1) → 3).
After that, all programs are searched unless quitting
“G-SRCH” mode.

e
b) Execution of search
Refer to “(c) [search]”/“(d) [w-srch]”/“(e) [s-srch]” in
“(7)Searching in a sequence program”, for how to
nt specify the target of global search.
c) End of “G-SRCH” mode
”G-SRCH” mode is ended by pushing Esc or [cancel]
ce
key. The end method is different individually.

Esc
Only “G-SRCH” mode is ended. The
- = program on the opening now is the state
nc

as it is.
- [cancel]= It returns to the program which was
opened at beginning the “G-SRCH”
mode. The program on the opening now
.c

closes.
Whether will save or quit modifications
is inquired, in case there are
w

modifications in the program which is

currently displayed.
(h) Copying sections of a sequence program
w

A multiple-net sequence program can be copied net by net.

Specify the net to be copied. The net can be copied in the same
file that is being edited or into another file. The selected net
w

remains as it was.

137
3. OPERATION B–62884EN/01

File which is being edited

ŽŽŽŽŽŽ ŽŽŽŽŽ Specified file

ŽŽŽŽŽŽ ŽŽŽŽŽ
[Copy] [to– fil]

ŽŽŽŽŽŽ ŽŽŽŽŽ
Range to be
copied
[until]

ŽŽŽŽŽŽ

om
ŽŽŽŽŽŽ
ŽŽŽŽŽŽ

r.c
Fig.3.5.2.2 (b)

1 insnet 2 Deinet 3 Insert 4 Adress 5 Search 6 Copy 7 Move 8 File 9 syEdit 10

e
[Copy] ↓

nt
1 until 2 cancel 3 search 4 c–down 5 c–up 6 7 8 9 10
ce
1 to 2 cancel 3 search 4 c–down 5 c–up 6 to–fil 7 to–org 8 9 10

[Operation]
1) Copying a net
nc

Place the cursor on the net to be copied and press the [Copy]
key. The selected net is displayed in yellow.
2) Copying two or more nets
To select the nets to be copied, first move the cursor to the
first net of the range to be copied, then move the cursor to the
.c

net at the other end of the range to be copied by pressing the

cursor up, cursor down, [c–up], [c–down], or [search] key.
The selected nets are displayed in yellow.
w

Alternatively, enter a numeric value and press the [c–up] or

[c–down] key. The cursor moves according to the specified
value.
w

3) Setting the net or nets to be copied

Press the [until] key.
4) Specifying the copy destination using the [to] key (Copying
w

the net or nets in the same file)

Move the cursor to the copy destination in the same file and
press the [to] key. The selected net or nets are copied
immediately above the copy destination specified by the
cursor. To copy the selected net or nets two or more times,
enter the number of times they are to be copied before
pressing the [to] key.
5) Specifying the copy destination using the [to–fil] key
(Copying the net or nets into another file)
1) Press the [to–fil] key. The following message is
displayed.

138
B–62884EN/01 3. OPERATION

If no program is specified, LATMP is created.

(LATMP file: Temporary work file used in editing)

2) Enter the name of the file into which the net(s) is to be

copied and press the Enter key.
3) Select desired processing from the following POP–UP
menu:

F1 Exec

om
F2 Cancel

4) If the selected destination file is present, the following

POP–UP menu is displayed. Select desired processing
from the menu.

r.c
The file already exists.
F1 Update Updates the selected file. The new copy
replaces the previous data of the file.
F2 Quit Cancels output to the selected file.
F3 Append Appends the copy to the selected file.

e
6) If the nets to be copied are known beforehand, place the
nt cursor on the first net to be copied, enter the number of nets
to be copied, then press the [Copy] key. Steps 1), 2), and 3)
can be skipped.
ce
Note
Incorrect nets cannot be copied.

(i) Moving sections of a sequence program

nc

A multiple–net sequence program can be moved net by net.

Specify the net or nets to be copied. The selected net or nets can
be moved to another place in the same file that is being edited or
output to another file. The selected net or nets are deleted.
.c

The only difference between copying and moving is that the

selected net or nets are deleted in moving.
w

1 insnet 2 Delnet 3 Insert 4 Adress 5 Search 6 Copy 7 Move 8 File 9 syEdit 10

[Move] ↓
w

1 until 2 cancel 3 search 4 c–down 5 c–up 6 7 8 9 10

↓
w

1 to 2 cancel 3 search 4 c–down 5 c–up 6 to–fil 7 to–org 8 9 10

[Operation]
Substituting [Move] for [Copy], follow steps 1) to 6) for
copying.

Note
Incorrect nets cannot be moved.

139
3. OPERATION B–62884EN/01

(j) Combining a sequence program

A source program can be combined to another source program
that is being edited.
The source program to be combined can be displayed and edited
separately, then combined to the original source program that is
being edited.

Original screen View screen

File being [TO] [VIEW]

Source File to be
edited Combine File to be
combined

om
file combined Input
(original file) (view file)

ŽŽŽŽ
ŽŽŽŽ
Section to be Edit
edited
[TO]
Combine Edited file

r.c
to be
combined

Fig.3.5.2.2 (C) Combining a Sequence Program

e
Programs of model which is different from the specified model
can be specified to the files of connection [TO] or enter [VIEW].
nt (If a disagreement is found, a warning message is displayed.)
In this case, no errors will be detected even if the file to be
combined contains an address range or function instruction
format that does not agree with the specified model. (The error
ce
will be detected in compilation.) When ignoring the warning
message, be extremely careful to continue the operation.
i) Function keys
nc

1 Insnet 2 Delnet 3 Insert 4 Adress 5 Search 6 Copy 7 Move 8 File 9 syEdit 10

ORIGINAL=Initial display at opening the file

VIEW=Display opened by [File] command
.c

Model of PMC edited in VIEW screen

ŸŸŸ
ŸŸŸŸ
EDIT (LADDER) View RC4 <0>[C:¥FLADOER¥]
w

ŸŸŸ
ŸŸŸŸ
[C: ¥DATA¥SAMPLE¥P1.#LA]PMC–RC4 NET 00001–00003 STEP 00010/32000 EMS

Ÿ
ŸŸŸ
ŸŸŸŸ Ÿ
SUB71
P0001
SP P0001
w

X000.0 Y000.0
w

AD=X0.0 CCO=TEST DATA NO.1 000014/000014

CO=SAMPLE 00001 RC0=RELAY SAMPLE 000012

1 2 3 4 5 function 6 7 8 9 10 comand

Fig.3.5.2.2 (d) Screen Displayed when a File is Opened by the [File]

Command

140
B–62884EN/01 3. OPERATION

ii) Operation flowchart for combining a sequence program

Start ladder diagram

editing (original screen)

Specify an insertion point (The data is

inserted immediately above the cursor.)

om
Press the [File] key

Specify a view file

r.c
<POP–UP menu>
(Cancel) (To)
(View)

e
Shows the ladder diagram Cancels file input Combines the file with the
of the file to be combined Ladder program on the
(View screen)

1. Check the displayed

data of the file to be
combined
nt original screen

1. The file is
immediately
ce
combined. The data
2. Edit the data of the file of the file is not
to be combined and displayed.
combine it
nc

Edit the Ladder program

on the view screen
(Normal editing)
.c

Esc
Press the key to terminate editing
w

<POP –UP menu>

(Quit) *1 (Temp) (Edit)
(Save)

Saves the Ladder Cancels the Saves the data in Returns to the
w

program shown on the edited data a provisional ladder diagram

view screen work file screen (The view
screen is continued.)
w

*1: The name of the temporary work file is LATMP.

Fig.3.5.2.2 (e) Operation Flowchart for Combining a Sequence Program

141
3. OPERATION B–62884EN/01

iii) Examples
Example 1. Combining a sequence program file
[Operation]
1) Place the cursor on the insertion point on the original
screen.
2) Select [File].
3) Enter the name of the file to be combined and press the
Enter key.
4) From the following menu, select F1 (To).

om
F1 To
F2 View
F3 Cancel

5) The file is inserted immediately above the net specified

r.c
in step 1). (Original screen)
Example 2. Combining a modified sequence program
[Operation]
1) Place the cursor on the insertion point on the original
screen.

e
2) Select [File].
3) Enter the name of the file to be combining and press the
nt Enter key.
4) From the following menu, select F2 (View).
ce
F1 To
F2 View
F3 Cancel
nc

5) Edit the Ladder program on the view screen. To

terminate editing, press the Esc key. (Ladder editing
can be performed and terminated in the conventional
way.)
.c

6) From the following menu, select F1 (Save).

w

F1 To
F2 View
F3 Rename & Save
F4 Edit
w

F5 Create Latemp file

7) Return to the screen of step 4) and check the name of the

file output in step 6). Then, select F1 (To).
w

8) The file is inserted immediately above the net specified

in step 1). (Original screen)
Example 3. Combining a specified section of a sequence
program
[Operation]
1) Place the cursor on the insertion point on the original
screen.
2) Select [File].

142
B–62884EN/01 3. OPERATION

3) Enter the name of the file to be combined and press the

Enter key.
4) From the pop–up menu, select F2 (View).
5) Select [Copy] or [Move] on the view screen and specify
a desired range with [until].
6) From the following function menu, select [to–org].
(Specify insertion into the original screen.)

1 to 2 cancel 3 search 4 c–down 5 c–up 6 to–fil 7 to–org 8 9 10

om
7) From the following menu, select F1 (Exec).

F1 Exec
F2 Cancel

r.c
8) The data is inserted immediately above the net specified
in step 1). (Original screen)
(k) Editing a symbol and comment from the ladder diagram editing
screen
On the ladder diagram editing screen, a symbol and comment

e
added at the specified address can be edited.

nt
1 Insnet

[syEdit]
2 Delnet 3 Insert 4 Adress 5 Search 6 Copy 7 Move 8 File 9 syEdit

↓
10
ce
1 to 2 cancel 3 search 4 c–down 5 c–up 6 to–fil 7 to–org 8 9 10

[Operation]
1) Specifying an address
nc

To edit a symbol and comment in a ladder diagram, place the

cursor on the corresponding address and press the [syEdit]
key.
2) Editing the symbol and comment
.c

The cursor moves to the symbol editing section in the bottom

right part of the screen. Edit the symbol and press the Enter

key. The cursor moves to the comment field.

w

3) Terminating editing
[exec] key : Terminates editing after modifying the data.
[cancel] key : Terminates editing without modifying the
w

data.
(l) Abbreviated input with the [comand] key
w

Each function key can be directly selected with the [comand] key.
Enter one of the character strings below, then press the [comand]
function key. Those portions that are enclosed in brackets can be
omitted.
I (nsert) D(elnet) (sy)E (dit)
S (earch) C (opy)
M (ove) F (ile)
The function keys in the menu above can be used for program
creation and search operations.

143
3. OPERATION B–62884EN/01

Note
The keys [ or ] and [ or ] are used to create
or delete a vertical line extending upward to the left or right
of the cursor in a ladder diagram. The solid vertical line is
for creation and the dashed vertical line is for deletion. The
menu item applying to a function key depends on the ladder
diagram and cursor position.

(m) ZOOM

om
Subprograms called by the currently selected program’s issuing
of a CALL/CALLU instruction can easily be referenced and
edited.
(i) Start up of zoom
1) Moved the cursor to the parameter of the CALL/CALLU

r.c
instruction and push the Enter key.

Ÿ
e
R001.0 ACT
SUB65 P001
CALL
nt
2) The program now on opening hides from the editing
ce
screen. Then the subprogram which is specified by the
parameter in mentioning above appears on the screen.
(ii) Start up under editing
When ZOOM is attempted while editing the program, the
nc

preservation of modifications will be inquired. Select either.

Close the current program.

F1 Save & zoom
.c

F2 Cancel
w

(iii) End of ZOOM

When the end operation with the Esc key is attempted in the
program editing screen by ZOOM, it will return to the state
w

when ZOOM is started. Moreover, it is possible to return to

the program configuration screen all at once.
w

End menu of editing screen (pop-up screen)

F1 Save(update) & quit

F2 Quit
F3 Rename,save & quit
F4 Edit
F5 Main

144
B–62884EN/01 3. OPERATION

1) F1:Save(update) & quit

It returns to the program screen where ZOOM was
started, after the content of current program screen is
preserved.
2) F2:Quit
It returns to the program screen where ZOOM was
started, after the content of current program screen is
cancelled.
3) F3:Rename, save & quit
It returns to the program screen where ZOOM was
started, after the content of current program screen is

om
preserved into specified subprogram name.
(n) List of subprograms in use
The list of subprograms called from currently displayed program
is displayed.
(i) Operation
The command ”List” is operated with the following function

r.c
key.
1)

1 2 3 4 5 function 6 7 8 or 9 or 10 comand

e
[comand] ↓

nt
1 insnet 2 Delnet
2) [comand]

3 Insert 4 Adress 5 Search 6 Copy 7 Move 8 File 9 syEdit 10

ce
3) Select the [List] with pushing the [SHIFT] (the following
will be displayed) in state of 2)
nc

1 2 3 4 5 G–srch 6 7 8 9 10 List

(Shortcut command is “ L + [COMMAND]”)

.c

(o) To edit Net comment

It is able to write the comments between ladder nets. These
comments are called “Net comment”, and each of them occupies
two steps in sequence program.
w

(i) To enter Net comment

1) Move the cursor to the position you want to write a net
w

comment.
And then press “ Shift +[netcmt]”.
w

Ÿ
R100.1.0 R1000.2
ŸŸ Y2000.4

Ÿ
Ÿ
R120.3 ŸŸ
R100.1.0 R1000.2
ŸŸ Y23.4

ŸŸ
2) Lines at the cursor and after are shifted down, and the
area for comment enclosed by ‘(*’ and ‘*)’ is inserted.

145
3. OPERATION B–62884EN/01

Then the cursor changes into character-size cursor, and

type comment sentence onto the area.
The area for Net comment expands and shrinks by two
lines (four lines at four lines display mode) automatically
according to the comment sentences. Every Net
comment can expands up to a hundred lines.

Ÿ Ÿ
R100.1.0 R1000.2

Ÿ ŸŸ
Y2000.4

Ÿ
R120.3 character cursor
↓

om
(* Net comment is written in here. *)
(* All characters you can enter are available. *)

Ÿ Ÿ
R100.1.0 R1000.2
ŸŸ
Y23.4

r.c
(ii) To determine or cancel the editing Net comment
1) To determine the editing Net comment, press [ end ] or
Esc . Then the editing comment is fixed, and the Net

e
comment editing mode is finished.
2) To cancel the editing Net comment, press [cancel]. The
new Net comment will be cancelled and erased.
nt
Note
The number of characters in a Net comment is limited to
ce
4095 bytes: counting one ASCII character as one byte, one
Japanese kana as one byte, one kanji character as two
bytes.
‘Line feed’ is also available on Net comment. Line feed is
helpful to save memory for Net comment.
nc

(iii) To modify Net comment

1) Place the cursor on the Net comment which you want to
.c

modify and press

“ Shift +[netcmt]” or Enter . The Net comment editing
w

mode becomes active, and the Net comment will be

ready to modify its contents.
2) At Net comment editing mode, to insert a blank line into
Net comment, press [inslin].
w

(* Net comment is written in here. *)

w

(* All characters you can enter are available. *)

[inslin] will shift lines at the cursor and after down by one
line, and make a blank line at the cursor position.

(* Net comment is written in here. *)

(* *)
(* All characters you can enter are available. *)
(* *)

146
B–62884EN/01 3. OPERATION

3) At Net comment editing mode, to delete by line, press

[dellin].

(* Net comment is written in here. *)

(* Net comment will expand or shrink automatically. *)
(* All characters you can enter are available. *)
(* *)

[dellin] will delete whole one line at the cursor and shift
lines after the cursor up by one line.

om
(* Net comment is written in here. *)
(* All characters you can enter are available. *)

4) To exit from Net comment editing mode, press [ end ]

or Esc .

r.c
5) To cancel the modifications you have just made, press
[cancel]. [cancel] will abandon the modifications and the
Net comment will be restored as it was before the
modifications.

e
(iv) To delete Net comment
There are two ways to delete Net comment.
nt 1) Use [Delnet] as same as deleting normal ladder nets.
”[command] → [Delnet] → specify area to delete →
[exec]”
ce
2) Entering Net comment editing mode by
” Shift +[netcmt]” or Enter with the cursor on the Net
comment which you want to delete, and then press
[delete].
nc

(v) Lost Net comment

A Net comment consists of the information of position in
sequence program which is called “Net comment pointer”,
and ”Net comment string data” which is comment sentences
.c

themselves. These two elements are usually combined one

to one to make a Net comment, but the partner might be lost
by illegal file operations or something, such as copying the
ladder file “*.#LA” or modifying the Net comment data file
w

“NETCMT.000” by user. When a Net comment pointer loses

its Net comment string data, the Net comment is called “Lost
Net comment”.
w

Lost Net comment is displayed as blank Net comment

enclosed by “(*” and “*)” which is displayed in purple or
dimly on monochrome display. Lost Net comment can be
w

normalized by editing operation. Lost Net comment can be

edited as a normal Net comment, such as deletion, copying
and so on.
(p) To edit New page
It is able to specify the position to feed page at printing ladder
diagram. This specification of the position is called “New page”,
and each of them occupies two steps in sequence program.

147
3. OPERATION B–62884EN/01

(i) To enter New page

1) Move the cursor to the position you want to feed page.
And then press “ Shift +[ page ]”.

Ÿ Ÿ ŸŸ
R100.1.0 R1000.2 Y2000.4

Ÿ
Ÿ
R120.3

ŸŸ
R100.1.0 R1000.2 Y23.4

om
2) Lines at the cursor and after are shifted down, and the
mark of New page is inserted.

Ÿ
R100.1.0 R1000.2
Ÿ ŸŸ Y2000.4

r.c
Ÿ
Ÿ
R120.3 Ÿ ŸŸ
ŸŸŸŸ
<New page>

e
Ÿ
R100.1.0 R1000.2
Ÿ ŸŸ Y23.4
nt Ÿ Ÿ
(ii) Other operation to edit New page
ce
New page can be handled as same as other ordinary ladder
nets. The operations such as copying [ Copy ], moving [
Move ], and deleting [Delnet] ladder nets are also effective
on New page.
(q) Terminating editing of a sequence program
nc

[Operation]
1) Press the Esc key on the following editing screen.
.c

1 2 3 4 5 function 6 7 8 or 9 or 10 comand

2) The following editing end menu(pop-up menu) appears.

w

F1 Save(update) & quit

w

F2 Quit
F3 Rename,save & quit
F4 Edit
w

F5 Main

a) F1:Save(update) & quit

After current content of the editing is preserved, the
editing screen will be ended.
b) F2:Quit
After current content of the editing is cancelled, the
editing screen will be ended.

148
B–62884EN/01 3. OPERATION

c) F3:Rename,save & quit

After current content of the editing is preserved into
specified subprogram name, the editing screen will be
ended.
d) F4:Edit
The Esc key operation is canceled and it returns to the
editing screen of former.
e) F5:Main
With the operation “a)”,“b)” or “c)”, it returns to the
program screen where ZOOM was started. But with this

om
operation, it returns to a program configuration screen at
all once from the nested state.
3) Either the above-mentioned is selected and it returns to the
program configuration screen, the main menu or the program
screen where ZOOM was started.
4) When error net exists

r.c
When the error net exists, “ ERROR NET NO.” is displayed
and the end menu is not displayed. Cope this case by the
following.
a) After the error net is corrected or deleted and the state of
the error is released, the end operation will be done.

e
b) When pressed Esc key in the state of 1) after “CAN” is
nt typed (meaning of CANCEL), the menu of 2) will be
displayed.
- When Save is ordered, it will be preserved after
removing the error net.
ce
- When Quit is ordered, it will be able to return to the
state before editing by cancelling the content of the
editing.
(3) Step sequence diagram
nc

Position the cursor to a program marked with j], then press the
[ZOOM] or Enter key. The step sequence editing screen is displayed
as shown below:
.c
w
w
w

149
3. OPERATION B–62884EN/01

EDIT(LADDER/STEP SEQUENCE) RC4(STEP SEQ) [A:¥FL¥DATA¥SFC01]

PROGRAM:(STEP SEQUENCE DEMO PROGRAM)

← L1
[ ]S1

Ÿ ŸŸ Ÿ ŸŸ
ŸŸ
← L4

Ÿ
]S2 S10 S20 S30

Ÿ ŸŸ ŸŸ Ÿ ŸŸ
P2 P10 P13 P20 P30
← L2

Ÿ ŸŸ ŸŸ Ÿ ŸŸ

om
S3 S11 S13 S21 S31

Ÿ P3 P11
ŸŸ P14
Ÿ P21 P23

ŸŸ
P31

Ÿ ŸŸ Ÿ
S4 S14 S23 L2
S23

ŸŸ Ÿ
P15 P22
S15 S24

r.c
1–1

↓ (Note )

1–1 2–1 3–1

e
1–2 2–2 3–2

ntNote
ce
The current position of the cursor on the screen is indicated.
The entire screen consists of 32 elements across the screen
and 64 elements from top to bottom. The cursor is
positioned to any element on the screen.
nc

On the step sequence screen, different soft keys are displayed,

depending on the position of the cursor.
When the cursor is on the step line, following softkey menu is
.c

displayed.

← L4
w

]S2 S10 S20 S30

w

1 V 2 [V] 3 V] 4  5 →JMP 6 ←LBL 7 ⊥ 8 FUNC 9 CHK 10 ZOOM

w

[ j ] : Step subprogram [ ←LBL ] : Label for jump

[ [j] ] : Initial step subprogram [ ⊥ ] : End of block step
[ j] ] : Block step subprogram [ FUNC ] : Various functions
[ | ] : Line for link [ CHK ] : Grammatical checking
[ →JMP ] : Jump to label [ ZOOM ] : Zooming into a subprogram

When the cursor is on the transition line, following softkey menu is

displayed.

150
B–62884EN/01 3. OPERATION

P2 P10 – P13 P20 P30

← L2

1 ) 2 ↓— 3 ↓== 4  5 ↑— 6 ↑== 7 8 FUNC 9 CHK 10 ZOOM

[ + ] : Transition
[ ↓— ] : Divergence of selective sequence
[ ↓= = ] : Divergence of simultaneous sequence
[ | ] : Line for link

om
[ ↑— ] : Convergence of selective sequence
[ ↑= = ] : Convergence of simultaneous sequence
[ FUNC ] : Various functions
[ CHK ] : Grammatical checking
[ ZOOM ] : Zooming into a subprogram

(i) Entering a step

r.c
Position the cursor to the desired input position, then press the
[j] key.
Then, enter a step number and subprogram number.
Pressing the [j] key causes a step to be created, as shown below.
A free step number is automatically assigned.

e
nt S1

STEP : S1
ce
ACTION :
1–1

1 V 2 [V] 3 V] 4  5 →JMP 6 ←LBL 7 ⊥ 8 FUNC 9 CHK 10 ZOOM

nc

The specified subprogram number (P10 in this example) is

displayed below S1.
.c

S1
P10
w

STEP : S1
ACTION : P10
1–1
w

To change the step number, press the Enter key to position the
w

Back
character cursor ” ” on STEP and use the Space key to change
the number.

151
3. OPERATION B–62884EN/01

S1

STEP : S10
ACTION : P10
1–1

(ii) Entering a transition

Position the cursor to the desired input position, then press the [+]
key.

om
Enter a subprogram number
Press the [+] key.

ŸŸ
ŸŸ
[ ]S1

r.c
P100
ACTION :
1–2

e
) ↓— ↓==  ↑— ↑==
1
nt 2 3 4

Enter a subprogram number.

5 6 7 8 FUNC 9 CHK 10 ZOOM

ŸŸ
ce
[ ]S1

P100
nc

ACTION : P100
1–2

(iii) Divergence of selective sequence

.c

Position the cursor to the desired input position and press the
[↓—] key.

ŸŸ
w

ŸŸ
[ ]S1
w

P
w

1 ) 2 ↓— 3 ↓== 4  5 ↑— 6 ↑== 7 8 FUNC 9 CHK 10 ZOOM

Position the cursor to the desired input position and press the
[↓—] key.

152
B–62884EN/01 3. OPERATION

ŸŸ
ŸŸ[ ]S1

(iv) Convergence of selective sequence

Position the cursor to the desired input position and press the
[↑—] key.

om
ŸŸ
ŸŸ[ ]S1

r.c
ŸŸ ŸŸ
ŸŸ ŸŸ S2 S3

e
nt ACTION : P100
2–4
ce
1 ) 2 ↓— 3 ↓== 4  5 ↑— 6 ↑== 7 8 FUNC 9 CHK 10 ZOOM

(v) Divergence of simultaneous sequence

nc

Position the cursor to the desired input position (transition line)

and press the [↓==] key.

ŸŸ
ŸŸ[ ]S1
.c

P100
= = = =
w

1–2
w

1 ) 2 ↓— 3 ↓== 4  5 ↑— 6 ↑== 7 8 FUNC 9 CHK 10 ZOOM

w

(vi) Convergence of simultaneous sequence

Position the cursor to the desired input position and press the
[↑==] key.

153
3. OPERATION B–62884EN/01

ŸŸ[ ]S1

ŸŸ ŸŸ
= = = = = = = = =

ŸŸ ŸŸ S2

= = = = = = = = =
S3

om
2–4

r.c
1 ) 2 ↓— 3 ↓== 4  5 ↑— 6 ↑== 7 8 FUNC 9 CHK 10 ZOOM

(vii) Specifying a label for jump destination

Position the cursor to the desired input position (step line), then
press the [← LBL] key. Then, enter a label name.

e
Press the [← LBL] key.

nt [
←
]S1
P10
ce
P100
LABEL : L10
1–1
nc

1 V 2 [V] 3 V] 4  5 →JMP 6 ←LBL 7 ⊥ 8 FUNC 9 CHK 10 ZOOM

Enter a label name.

.c

← L10
[ ]S1
w

P100 STEP : S1
ACTION : P10
1–1
w

(viii) Specifying a label jump

w

Position the cursor to the desired input position (step line), then
press the [→ JMP] key. Then, enter a label name.
Press the [→ JMP] key.

154
B–62884EN/01 3. OPERATION

ŸŸ
← L10
[ ]S1

ŸŸ
P100 P100

ŸŸ[ ]S2

P100
→

om
LABEL :
2–3

r.c
1 V 2 [V] 3 V] 4  5 →JMP 6 ←LBL 7 ⊥ 8 FUNC 9 CHK 10 ZOOM

Enter a label name.

ŸŸ
← L10

e
[ ]S1

nt ŸŸ
P100 P100

ŸŸ[ ]S2 → L10

ce
P100
nc

LABEL : L10
2–3
.c

(ix) Deleting an element

Position the cursor to the element to be deleted, then press the
Delete key.
w

ŸŸ
ŸŸ[ ]S1
w

P100
w

In the example shown above, two figures (elements) of a selective

branch and transition are selected. Specify the element to be
deleted with the narrow cursor, displayed in reverse video. To
position the cursor displayed in reverse video, press the Delete key.

To restore the state shown above, press the Esc key.

155
3. OPERATION B–62884EN/01

ŸŸ
ŸŸ[ ]S1

P100

If the Enter key is pressed in the state shown above, the selective
branch is deleted and the following screen is displayed:

om
ŸŸ[ ]S1

P100

r.c
To specify another figure, press the Delete key again.

e
ŸŸ
nt [ ]S1
ce
P100
nc

(x) Inserting an element

Position the cursor to the desired insertion position, then press the
Insert key. To create an empty row, press the Insert key.

To create an empty column, press the Shift and Insert keys.

.c

ŸŸ
ŸŸ
w

[ ]S1

P1

ŸŸ ŸŸ
w

= = = = = = = = =

ŸŸ ŸŸ
]S2 S10 S20
w

P2 P10 P20

ŸŸ ŸŸ ŸŸ
ŸŸ ŸŸ S3 S11
ŸŸ
STEP : S2
S21

ACTION : P200
1–3

156
B–62884EN/01 3. OPERATION

Press the Insert key.

ŸŸ
[ ]S1

P1
= = = = = = = = = = = = =

om
ŸŸ ŸŸ ŸŸ
]S2 S10 S20

r.c
1–3

e
Press the Shift and Insert key.

nt ŸŸ
[ ]S1
ce
P1

Ÿ Ÿ ŸŸ
= = = = = = = = = = = =

Ÿ Ÿ ŸŸ ]S2 S10 S20

nc

P2 P10 P20

Ÿ Ÿ ŸŸ S3 S11 S21
.c

STEP : S2
ACTION : P102
w

1–3
w

(xi) Search
w

P1

ŸŸ ŸŸ
= = = = = = = = = = =

ŸŸ ŸŸ
]S2 S10 S20

P1 P11 P21

ŸŸ ŸŸ ŸŸ
ŸŸ ŸŸ ]S2 S10
ŸŸ S20

157
3. OPERATION B–62884EN/01

If the [F8] (FUNC) key is pressed in the state shown above, a

pop-up menu is displayed as shown below:

P1
= = = = = = = = = = =

F1 Search
F2 Copy
F3 Move
F4 mAin
F5 List

Ÿ Ÿ Ÿ

om
]S3 S11 S21

Press the [F1] (Search) key. A pop-up menu is displayed, as

shown below:

r.c
P1
= = = = = = = = = = =

ŸŸŸŸŸŸŸ
e
F1 Se

ŸŸŸŸŸŸŸ
F2 Co F1 Step

ŸŸŸŸŸŸŸ
F3 Mo F2 Action
nt F4 mA F3 Label

ŸŸ ŸŸŸŸŸŸŸ
F5 Li F4 sYmbol

ŸŸŸŸŸŸŸ
F5 Position
F6 Top

ŸŸŸŸŸŸŸ
ce
]S3
F7 Bottom

Then, press the [F1] (Step) key. Another pop-up menu is

nc

displayed, as shown below:

P1

ŸŸŸŸŸŸŸ
= = = = = = = = = = =
.c

ŸŸŸŸŸŸŸŸŸŸ
ŸŸŸŸŸŸŸ
F1 Se

ŸŸŸŸŸŸŸŸŸŸ
ŸŸŸŸŸŸŸ
F2 Co F1 Step
w

F3 Mo F2 Ac

ŸŸŸŸŸŸŸŸŸŸ
ŸŸ ŸŸŸŸŸŸŸ
F4 mA F3 La search string:¥A ¥a

ŸŸ ŸŸŸŸŸŸŸ
F5 Li F4 sY
F5 Position

ŸŸŸŸŸŸŸ
w

F6 Top
]S3

ŸŸŸŸŸŸŸ
F7 Bottom
w

Enter the step number to be searched for (S20, for example), then
press the Enter key. The system starts searching through the part
subsequent to the cursor.

158
B–62884EN/01 3. OPERATION

P1
= = = = = = = = = = =

ŸŸŸŸŸŸŸ
F1 Se

ŸŸŸŸŸŸŸŸŸŸ
ŸŸŸŸŸŸŸ
F2 Co F1 Step

ŸŸŸŸŸŸŸŸŸŸ
ŸŸŸŸŸŸŸ
F3 Mo F2 Ac
F4 mA F3 La search string:S20

ŸŸŸŸŸŸŸ
F5 Li F4 sY

ŸŸ ŸŸŸŸŸŸŸ
F5 Position
F6 Top

ŸŸŸŸŸŸŸ
]S3
F7 Bottom

om
(xii) Copying or moving an element
Press the [F8] (FUNC) key.

r.c
P1

ŸŸ ŸŸ
= = = = = = = = = = =

]S2 S10 S20

e
P1 P11 P21

nt When the [F8] (FUNC) key is pressed, a pop-up menu is

ce
displayed as shown below:

P1
= = = = = = = = = = =
nc

F1 Search
F2 Copy
F3 Move
F4 mAin
.c

F5 List
w

Press the [F2] (Copy) key. The system prompts the operator to
enter a start point.
w

P1

ŸŸ ŸŸ
= = = = = = = = = = =

ŸŸ ŸŸ
w

]S2 S10 S20

P1 P11 P21

ACTION :
Specify Start position 1–2

159
3. OPERATION B–62884EN/01

Position the cursor to the desired start point (position 2-3 in the
example shown below), then press the Enter key. The system
prompts the operator to enter the end point.

P1

ŸŸ ŸŸ
= = = = = = = = = = =

]S2 S10 S20

om
P1 P11 P21

ACTION :
Specify End position 2–3

r.c
Position the cursor to the desired end point (position 3-4 in the
example shown below), then press the Enter key. The system
prompts the operator to specify a copy destination.

e
P1

ŸŸ
= = = = = = = = = = =
ntŸŸ
]S2 S10 S20
ce
P1 P11 P21

ACTION :
Specify End position
3–4
nc

Position the cursor to the desired copy destination (position 4-3

in the example shown below), then press the Enter key. The
.c

specified part is copied.

P1
w

ŸŸ ŸŸ ŸŸ Ÿ
= = = = = = = = = = =

ŸŸ ŸŸ ŸŸ
]S2 S10 S20
Ÿ
w

P1 P11 P21 P11 P21

w

STEP : S10
ACRTION : P100
4–3

When a part is copied,

– The S address is not copied. Assign a free number.
– The P address is copied. If required, change the address.

160
B–62884EN/01 3. OPERATION

(xiii) Returning from the ZOOM destination to the program

configuration screen (MAIN).
To return to the program configuration screen, displayed when
editing was started, follow the procedure below. The system
assumes that the editing of the step sequence subprogram, from
which the [ZOOM] key was pressed, is suspended.
The edited subprogram is not saved in the source program file.
Press the [F8] (FUNC) key.

P1

ŸŸ ŸŸ

om
= = = = = = = = = = =

]S2
ŸŸ ŸŸS10 S20

P1 P11 P21

r.c
After pressing the [F8] (FUNC) key

e
P1
= = = = = = = = = = =
nt F1
F2
F3
Search
Copy
Move
ce
F4 mAin
F5 List
nc

After pressing the [F4] (MAIN) key

.c

EDIT (LADDER/STEP SEQUENCE) PMC–RC4(STEP SEQ) [C: ¥FLADDER ]

PROGRAM:(STEP SEQUENCE DEMO PROGRAM)

LEVEL LEVEL2 LEVEL3

V P0001 V P0002 V P0004 V P0005 V P0006 V P0007
w

V P0008 V P0009 V P0014 V P0015 V P0016 V P0017

]P0021 V P0022 V P0024 V P0025 V P0026 V]P0027
S S S S S S
w

S S S S S S
V P0101 V P0202 V]P0304 V]P0405 V]P0406 V]P0407
w

If the subprogram whose previous editing session was suspended

(marked with ∆]) is selected again for editing, the following
message is displayed:

Editing this subprogram is not completed.

Continue to select it ? (Yes/No) [Y]

To continue the previous editing session, press the [Enter] key.

Otherwise, enter N. (The result of the previous editing session
is cancelled.)

161
3. OPERATION B–62884EN/01

(xiv) LIST
The list of subprograms referenced by the stepsequence
subprogram that is currently being edited is displayed.
Press the [F8] (FUNC) key.

P1

ŸŸ ŸŸ
= = = = = = = = = = =

]S2
ŸŸ ŸŸ S10 S20

om
P1 P11 P21

After pressing the [F8] (FUNC) key

r.c
P1
= = = = = = = = = = =

F1 Search

e
F2 Copy
F3 Move
F4 mAin
nt F5 List
ce
After pressing the [F5] (LIST) key
nc

EDIT (LADDER/STEP SEQUENCE) PMC–RC4(STEP SEQ) [C: ¥FLADDER ]

PROGRAM:(STEP SEQUENCE DEMO PROGRAM)
V]P200
.c

V P0008 V P0009 V P0014 V P0015 V P0016 V P0017

V P0021 V P0022 V P0024 V P0025 V P0026 V]P0027
w

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 MAIN 9 CHANGE 10 ZOOM

Following keys are useful in this screen.

w

Function key
[ MAIN ] : Displaying the subprogram configuration
screen
w

[CHANGE] : Creating a new subprogram

[ ZOOM ] : Modifying a subprogram
Other keys
Page
Up : Displaying previous screen
Page
Down : Displaying next screen

162
B–62884EN/01 3. OPERATION

Screen display

V] P200

The subprogram which is being edited is displayed. If the

[ZOOM] key is pressed to nest the program to a certain depth, the
subprogram numbers are arranged from the left in the order in
which they are nested. The subprogram for which the [ZOOM]
key was pressed first is displayed at the left end.

om
V P0008 V P0009 V P0014 V P0015 V P0016 V P0017

Subprograms referenced by the subprogram that is currently

being edited are listed with the following mark:
j : Ladder subprogram

r.c
j] : Step sequence subprogram
(xv) Checking the syntax
Press the [CHK] key.

e
P1

ŸŸ ŸŸ
= = = = = = = = = = =
nt ]S2 S10 S20
ce
P1 P11 P21

If the step sequence is satisfactory, the following message is

displayed:
nc

P1

ŸŸ ŸŸ
= = = = = = = = = = =

ŸŸ ŸŸ
.c

]S2 S10 S20

ŸŸŸŸŸŸŸŸŸŸŸŸ
ŸŸŸŸŸŸŸŸŸŸŸŸ
w

ŸŸŸŸŸŸŸŸŸŸŸŸ
P1 P11 Check completed
w

If the step sequence is invalid, the following message is

displayed:
w

P1

ŸŸ ŸŸ
= = = = = = = = = = =

ŸŸ ŸŸ
]S2 S10 S20

ŸŸŸŸŸŸŸŸŸŸŸŸ
P1
ŸŸŸŸŸŸŸŸŸŸŸŸ
P11

ŸŸŸŸŸŸŸŸŸŸŸŸ
Chart Sequence error

163
3. OPERATION B–62884EN/01

(xvi) Modifying a subprogram (ZOOM)

Press the [ZOOM] key.

P1
= = = = = = = = = = =

]S2
ŸŸ ŸŸ S10 S20

P1 P11 P21

ŸŸ ŸŸ ŸŸ

om
ŸŸ ŸŸ ŸŸ
]S2 S10 S20

When the [ZOOM] key is pressed, the figure pointed by cursor

decides the type of subprogram which is to be edited.

r.c
Figure Meaning of the figure Subprogram to be edited
V Step sequence subprogram Ladder subprogram
[V] Initial step sequence subprogram Ladder subprogram

e
V] Block step sequence subprogram step sequence subprogram
+ Transition Ladder subprogram
nt(xvii) End of modifying
Press the ESC key.
ce
P1
= = = = = = = = = = =
nc

F1 Save (update) & quit

F2 Quit
F3 Edit
F4 Rename, save & quit
F5 Optimize
.c
w

Menus
w

Menu Editing Result of editing Display

Save End Updated Optimized
Quit End Discarded –
w

Edit Continue Continued Not optimized

Rename End Updated Optimized
Optimize Continue Optimized and continued Optimized

164
B–62884EN/01 3. OPERATION

3.5.2.3
Symbol & Comment D Moving the cursor
Editing Moves the cursor to another field to be edited.
, , ,

Moves the cursor to another position within the field

Shift + , to be edited.

D Entering a comment in Japanese

When a front-end processor for Japanese word input is used, a comment

om
can be entered in Japanese. When a comment containing kana
characters or m-type alphanumeric characters is compiled (an object file
is created), all the kana characters and m-type alphanumeric characters
are replaced with spaces.
(1) Start

r.c
[Operation]
1) Select [SYMBOL] (symbol and comment) from the editing
menu.
2) The following symbol and comment editing screen appears:

e
EDIT (SYMBOL & COMMENT) RB4 (STEP SEQ) <0>[C: ¥FLADDER¥ ]

nt SYMBOL 000000/000001 COIL_COMMENT 00000000/00000014

NO. ADDRESS SYMBOL

000001 X00000.0 SYMBOL–A

RELAY COMMENT COIL COMMENT

RELAY COMMENT–A COIL COMMENT–A

ce
nc
.c

1 2 SEARCH 3 AREA 4 ADD 5 6 DELETE 7 8 COPY 9 PASTE 10 END

Fig.3.5.2.3 Symbol and comment editing screen

w

(2) Entering a new symbol and comment

A new symbol and comment can be added at an address to which no
w

symbol or comment is assigned.

[Operation]
1) Select [ADD] on the symbol and comment editing screen.
w

2) An input window opens on the screen.

[ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]

Address field Symbol field Relay comment field Coil comment field

165
3. OPERATION B–62884EN/01

3) Enter an address in the address entry field.

4) The cursor is positioned to the symbol entry field.
5) Enter symbol data.
6) The cursor is positioned to the relay comment entry field.
7) Enter relay comment data.
8) The cursor is positioned to the coil comment entry field.
9) Enter coil comment data.
10)The entered data is stored, clearing the previous address, symbol
data, and comment data from the window.
When no symbols and comments are entered, the system is

om
automatically set to receive new data.

(3) Editing a symbol and comment

A symbol and comment assigned to an address can be edited.
[Operation]

r.c
1) If the system is set to receive new data, select [QUIT] to exit from
that state.

2) Move the cursor by pressing the , , , or key

e
and edit the data.

ntTo move the cursor within a field, while pressing the

the or key.
Shift key press
ce
(4) Moving a comment
A comment assigned to an address can be moved to another address.
[Operation]
1) Place the cursor on the comment to be moved.
nc

2) Select [DELETE].
3) The following message appears on the screen.

Comment data copied to paste buffer

.c

4) Place the cursor at the place the comment is to be moved.

5) Select [PASTE].
w

(5) Copying a comment

A comment assigned to an address can be copied into another address.
w

[Operation]
1) Place the cursor on the comment to be copied.
w

2) Select [COPY].
3) The following message appears on the screen.

Comment data copied to paste buffer

4) Place the cursor at the place the comment is to be copied.

5) Select [PASTE].
(6) Searching for a symbol or address

166
B–62884EN/01 3. OPERATION

[Operation]
1) Select [SEARCH] on the symbol and comment editing screen.
2) The following input window appears on the screen.

SEARCH :

3) Enter the symbol or address to be searched for and the data

number.
4) The system searches for the symbol or address and the data
number in that order. The cursor is moved to the searched data.

om
(7) Deleting a symbol and/or comment
(a) Deleting both a symbol and a comment
[Operation]
1) Place the cursor on the NO field.
2) Select [DELETE]. Both the symbol and the comment are

r.c
deleted.
(b) Deleting either a symbol or a comment
[Operation]
1) Place the cursor on the SYMBOL or COMMENT field.

e
2) Select [DELETE]. Only the selected symbol or comment is
deleted.
nt(c) Deleting two or more symbols and comments simultaneously
[Operation]
1) Place the cursor at the top of the range to be deleted.
ce
2) Select [AREA]. The entire line is displayed in reverse video,
and the following message appears on the screen.

Selecting the area ...

nc

3) Move the cursor to the end of the range to be deleted.

4) Select [DELETE]. All the data displayed in reverse video is
deleted.
(8) Terminating the symbol and comment editing
.c

[Operation]
1) On the edit screen, select [END] or press the Esc key.
w

2) The following message appears on the screen:

F1 Save (update) & quit
w

F2 Quit
F3 Edit

3) Specify a desired option and return to the edit menu.

w

167
3. OPERATION B–62884EN/01

(9) Editing screen

Symbol entry number

Output Number to object file / Total
Coil comment size (byte)

ŸŸ
Output Number to object file / Total

ŸŸ
EDIT ( SYMBOL &

SYMBOL 000001/000003
NO. ADDRESS SYMBOL
COMMENT )
ŸŸ PMC-RB4 <O>[A:¥FL¥DATA¥RB4

COIL_COMMENT 0000030/00000090
RELAY COMMENT COIL COMMENT
]

(Note)

om
00001 X00000.0 AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA AAAAAAAAA–AAAAAAAAA–AAAAAAAAA
00002 X00000.1 BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB BBBBBBBBB–BBBBBBBBB–BBBBBBBBB
00003*X00000.2 CCCCC CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC CCCCCCCCC–CCCCCCCCC–CCCCCCCCC

r.c
‘*’ means a symbol data which can be displayed on CRT/MDI.

1 2 SERCH 3 AREA 4 ADD 5 6 DELETE 7 8 COPY 9 PASTE 10 END

e
nt
Note
It is the indicator. Symbol/comment are displayed with
turning at this point in ladder diagram editing screen.
ce
(10)Searching by a part of stringsSearch function is active for specified
field, LINE NO./ADDRESS/SYMBOL/RELAY or COIL
COMMENT.
Especially you can find relay/coil comment, which is too long, by
nc

specifing a part of data strings.

1) Press [SEARCH] and the pop-up menu apears to specify strings
for search.
Furthermore, the display of function-key changes as the
.c

undermentioned.

1 NO. 2 ADRS 3 SYMBOL 4 RELAY 5 COIL 6 7 8 9 10

w

2) Input strings and specify the data kind for searching by

function-key.
w

A part of strings is available only in case of [RELAY]/[COIL].

3) If search is success, cursol moves to the found place.
w

168
B–62884EN/01 3. OPERATION

3.5.2.4 An arbitrary message can be displayed on the screen, using the DISPB
Message Editing instruction (SUB 41), which is one of the function instructions. Such a
message is created as described below.
(1) Types and quantity of characters that can be used The types of
characters usable in message data vary from one CNC/PMC model
to another. Refer to the PMC programming Manual.
The half-size kana and alphanumeric characters can be entered using
the kana and alphanumeric keys on the keyboard. Similarly to
symbols and comments, Japanese-language text can be edited using

om
the Japanese-language input FEP (front-end processor). The number
of characters is limited as follows:
1) When only full-size Japanese-language characters are used
: 62 characters
2) When only half-size kana characters are used
: 127 characters

r.c
3) When only alphanumeric characters are used
: 256 characters
(2) Edit procedure
The edit method that can be used varies between the CNC/PMC
model in which Japanese language (excluding half-size characters)

e
can be used and other models. This section describes the procedure
common to all models (only alphanumeric characters are entered),
ntusing the PMC-RC4 as an example.
(a) Startup
[Operation]
ce
1) Select [MESSAG] from the edit menu.
2) The following message data edit screen appears.

EDIT (MESSAGE) PMC–RC4 [C: ¥FLADDER¥]

nc

NO ADDRESS MESSAGE

001 A00. 0 1234567890ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ

1234567890ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
1234567890ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
.c

002 A00. 1

003 A00. 2
w

004 A00. 3
w
w

1 2 TOP 3 BOTTOM 4 C–MODE 5 DISP 6 7 8 9 10 END

Fig.3.5.2.4 (a) Message Data Edit Screen

(b) Input
[Operation]
1) Place the cursor on the message address where message data is
to be entered.
2) Key in the desired message data.

169
3. OPERATION B–62884EN/01

(c) Modification
[Operation]
1) Place the cursor on the message address where message data is
to be entered.
2) The character cursor moves on to the message and blinks there.
3) Place the cursor at the location where modification is required,
using the cursor keys.
4) Key in the desired characters to modify the message data.
5) Press the Enter key.

om
(d) Search [TOP] [BOTTOM]
[Operation]
1) On the message screen, select [TOP] or [BOTTOM].
2) The cursor moves to the start or end message address.
(e) END

r.c
[Operation]
1) On the edit screen, press [END] or Esc .
2) The following message appears.

e
F1 Save (update) & quit
F2 Quit
nt F3 Edit

3) Select one of the above items, and return to the edit menu.
ce
3.5.2.5 The address of each module in the I/O unit is set and deleted as described
I/O Module Editing below.
nc

(1) Startup
[Operation]
1) Select [MODULE] (I/O module) from the edit menu.
2) The following I/O module edit screen appears.
.c

EDIT (I/O MODULE) PMC–RC <0>[C: ¥FLADDER¥]

w

ADDRESS GROUP BASE SLOT NAME ADDRESS GROUP BASE SLOT NAME

X0000 0 0 01 ID16C Y0000

X0001 0 0 01 ID16C Y0001
X0002 Y0002
w

X0003 Y0003
X0004 Y0004
X0005 Y0005
X0006 Y0006
X0007 Y0007
X0008 Y0008
w

X0009 Y0009
X0010 Y0010
X0011 Y0011
X0012 Y0012
X0013 Y0013
X0014 Y0014
X0015 Y0015

1 SEACH 2 INPUT 3 HELP 4 5 6 DELETE 7 DELALL 8 9 10 END

Fig. 3.5.2.5 (a) I/O Module Edit Screen

170
B–62884EN/01 3. OPERATION

(2) Setting
[Operation]
1) Place the cursor on the start address when a module is to be set.
2) Key in the module address in the following format:

GROUP.BASE.SLOT.NAME

Notes
1 The module name that can be specified may vary

om
depending on the model of the PMC or I/O unit. Selecting
[HELP] can display the module names that can be displayed
in the NAME field.
2 The I/O unit MODEL-B is allocated as follows:
“GROUP” : Specify a group number in the configuration.

r.c
“BASE” : Must be fixed at ‘0’.
“SLOT” : Specify the unit number of the I/O Unit-B.
Alternatively, set to ’0’ if power ON/OFF
information ‘##’ is to be allocated.

e
(3) Deletion [DELETE] [DELALL] [DEL.CH]
nt(i) To delete one module:
[Operation]
ce
1) Place the cursor at the address where the module is to be
deleted.
2) Select [DELETE].
(ii) To delete all modules:
nc

[Operation]
1) Select [DELALL].
(iii) To delete the modules of one channel (for models in which more
than one channel can be set):
.c

[Operation]
1) Select a channel for deletion.
2) Select [DEL.CH].
w

(4) Search [SEARCH]

[Operation]
w

1) Press [SEARCH] after an address is specified.

2) Place the cursor at the specified address.
w

(5) END [END]

[Operation]
1) On the edit screen, press [END] or Esc .
2) The following message appears.
F1 Save (update) & quit
F2 Quit
F3 Edit

3) Select one of the above items, and return to the edit menu.

171
3. OPERATION B–62884EN/01

3.5.2.6 (1) Start

System Parameter [Operation]
Editing 1) Select [SYSPRM] (SYSTEM PARAMETER) from the editing
menu.
2) The system parameter editing screen appears.
The screen shown below is the system parameter editing screen
for PMC-RB. For each PMC model, see Item (4) below.
(2) Input

om
[Operation]
1) Select an input item (displayed in reverse video) with the

and keys.
2) Enter data.

r.c
For information about input items, see Item (4) below.
(3) Termination
[Operation]

e
1) Select [END] or press Esc on the editing screen.
2) The following message appears:
nt F1
F2
F3
Save (update) & quit
Quit
Edit
ce
3) Select a function key from the above. The screen display returns
to the editing menu.
(4) System parameter editing screen and input items for PMC model
[Example of Editing screen]
nc

EDIT (SYSTEM PARAMETER) RC4 <0>[C: ¥FLADDER¥]

1) COUNTER DATA TYPE : 0 (0:BINARY, 1:BCD)

2) LADDER EXEC : 100% (1–150%)
.c

3) (UNUSED)
4) LANGUAGE EXEC RATIO : 50% (0–99%)
5) LANGUAGE ORIGIN : 000000H
6) OPERATOR PANEL : 0 (0:NO, 1:YES)
7) KEY ADDRESS :
w

8) LED ADDRESS :
9) KEY BIT IMAGE ADDRESS :
10) LED BIT IMAGE ADDRESS :

PMC TYPE = RC4

w
w

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 END

Fig.3.5.2.6 (a)

Note
For other editing screens, see APPENDIX A FUNCTIONS
SPECIFIC TO INDIVIDUAL PMC MODELS

172
B–62884EN/01 3. OPERATION

[Input item]
1) COUNTER DATA TYPE
This parameter specifies whether the format of a counter value
used with the CTR function instruction is to be binary or BCD.
Initial value 0 : BINARY Setting 0 : BINARY / 1 : BCD

2) LADDER EXEC (ladder execution time)

This parameter specifies an incremental processing time for the
first and second ladder levels. This setting reduces ladder scan
time, thus achieving high-speed ladder execution.

om
Initial value 100 Setting range 1 to 150

The table below indicates ladder execution time status during an

execution period of 8 ms.
Setting First and second level processing time

r.c
100% 5ms
150% 7.5ms

Note
however, that increased ladder execution time on the first

e
and second levels reduces the following processing times:
D PMC screen display time
nt
D Language program processing time
D Ladder processing time on the third level
ce
3) LANGUAGE EXEC RATIO
As the language program and PMC screen display have the same
priority, this parameter specifies the percentage of the following
processing times:
D PMC screen display time
nc

D Language program processing time

D Processing time of third-level Ladder program
While the PMC screen is displayed, a language program can be
executed cyclically.
.c

Initial value 50 Setting range 0 to 99

4) LANGUAGE ORIGIN
w

This parameter specifies the start address of the link control

statement data of a language program.
w

Initial value 000000 Setting range Address in the

language program
storage area
w

When there is no language program, specify 000000H.

5) OPERATOR PANEL (connecting an F0 machine operator’s
panel)
This parameter specifies whether a machine operator’s panel is
used with the FS0. When YES is specified in this parameter,
specify the DI/DO addresses where the operator’s panel is
actually connected, an address for key images transferred from
the operator’s panel, and an addresses for LED images transferred
to the operator’s panel.

173
3. OPERATION B–62884EN/01

Initial value 0 : NO Setting 0 : NO / 1 : YES

(i) KEY DI ADDRESS

Specify the start address (PMC address) of the external DI
where the operator’s panel is actually connected.
Setting range X0 to X127, X1000 to X1019

(ii) KEY DO ADDRESS

Specify the start address (PMC address) of the external DO
where the operator’s panel is actually connected.
Setting range Y0 to Y127, Y1000 to Y1014

om
(iii) KEY BIT IMAGE ADDRESS
Specify the start address (PMC address) of key images
referenced by user programs.
Usually an arbitrary internal relay area is set.
(iv) LED BIT IMAGE ADDRESS

r.c
Specify the start address (PMC address) of LED images
referenced by user programs.
Usually an arbitrary internal relay area is set.

e
3.5.3
Printout

3.5.3.1
Overview
nt
A sequence program can be printed out.
(1) Compatible printers
ce
This software is usable with the printers listed below.
EPSON VP1000 (default setting)
NEC PR201H
FANUC PRINTER
nc

Note
To use a NEC PR201H and FANUC PRINTER, a program
modification is required. For details, see Section 3.5.3.6.
.c

(2) General flow of operation for printout.

w

Offline menu

[PRINT]
w

F2

Specify output item

w

Specify option
[SETUP]
F2

Setup menu
[PRINT]
F1

Start printing

Fig.3.5.3.1 Operation Flow of Printout

174
B–62884EN/01 3. OPERATION

3.5.3.2 Printing is performed according to the following procedure.

Starting and Ending
Printing PRINT RB4 (STEP SEQ) [C: ¥FLADDER¥]

C:¥DATA¥SAMPLE

V TITLE : [NO/YES]
V SYSTEM PARAMETER : [NO/YES]
V SYMBOL & COMMENT : [NO/YES]
: [OPTION]
V LADDER DIAGRAM : [NO/YES]
: [OPTION]

om
V STEP SEQUENCE DIAGRAM : [NO/YES]
: [OPTION]
V I/O MODULE : [NO/YES]
V MESSAGE : [NO/YES]
: [OPTION]
V CROSS REFERENCE LIST : [NO/YES]
: [OPTION]
V BIT ADDRESS MAP : [NO/YES]

r.c
: [OPTION]

1 PRINT 2 SETUP 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 BREAK 10 END

Fig.3.5.3.2 Drawing Output Menu

e
[Operation]
1) Set the desired print format by pressing F2 [SETUP]. (See
nt Section 3.5.3.4.)
2) Set the desired output items. (See Section 3.5.3.3.)
3) Start printing by pressing F1 [PRINT].
ce
4) Press F9 [BREAK] to suspend printing.
5) Press F10 [END] or the Esc key to terminate the print menu
display.
nc

Notes
1 Perform steps 1) and 2) only when the settings must be
changed.
2 Some print formats that cannot be set in step 1) may be set
.c

by editing the setting file. For details, see Section 3.5.3.5.

w
w
w

175
3. OPERATION B–62884EN/01

3.5.3.3 Items to be output to a drawing are specified as described below. More

Output Item Setting than one item can be specified at a time. Some set items may not be
displayed, depending on the model of the PMC.
(1) Specifying output of each data item
Specify whether a data item is to be output, by pressing the key

or key after positioning the cursor with the key or

key on the drawing output menu screen.

om
(2) Option specification
When specifying a data item for which options are available, position
the cursor to the desired option, then press the Enter key. The option
specification screen will appear. To set the option, enter the desired
value, then press the Enter key.

r.c
(3) Detail of each data time
(a) Title printing
The data of the title is printed.
(b) Parameter printing

e
The data of the system parameters is printed.
(c) Symbol printing
nt The symbol comment data is printed.

PRINT RB4 (STEP SEQ) <0>[C: ¥FLADDER¥]

ce
C:¥DATA¥SAMPLE

[ SYMBOL PRINT ]

V START LINE NUMBER : 1

nc

V END LINE NUMBER : 0

V APPOINT COMMENT : [RELAY/COIL/ALL]
.c

F10 (ESC) : END

w

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 END
w

Fig. 3.5.3.3(a) Symbol Print Option Menu

i) Option (symbol printing)

w

· When printing symbol/comment data, specify an output

range. When 0 is specified as the print end line number, all
data up to the last line is printed.
· Comment specification
[RELAY] : Prints relay comment data.
[COIL] : Prints coil comment data.
[ALL] : Prints both relay comment data and coil
comment data.
(d) Ladder diagram printing
A ladder diagram is printed.

176
B–62884EN/01 3. OPERATION

PRINT RB4 (STEP SEQ) [C: ¥FLADDER¥]

C:¥DATA¥SAMPLE

[ LADDER PRINT ]

V PRINT UNIT : [ALL / MODULE]

MODULE NAME :
V NET RANGE
START NET NUMBER : 1
END NET NUMBER : 0
V NEW PAGE
SUBPROGRAM : [NO/YES]
V CROSS REFERENCE : [NO/YES]

om
V RELAY INFORMATION : [SYMBOL/RELAY COMENT]

F10 (ESC) : END

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 END

r.c
Fig. 3.5.3.3(b) Ladder Print Option Menu

i) Option (ladder diagram printing)

· The output unit, net range, page break, and cross-reference
of a ladder diagram to be printed are specified.

e
· If a diagram is output as a list file, the unit of printout must
be specified as a module.
nt · If “0” is set as the output end net when a range of nets is
specified, printing continues up to the last net.
· If a page break is specified, a page break is made in the
ce
ladder diagram at every new file or subprogram.
· If a cross-reference is specified, the ladder diagram is
accompanied with a cross-reference. (Fig. 3.5.3.3 (h))
· Relay information
[SYMBOL] : Prints symbol data.
nc

[RELAY COMMENT] : Prints relay comment data.

(e) Printing of step sequence figure
Step sequence figure is printed
i) Option (Step sequence figure printing)
.c

PRINT RB4 (STEP SEQ) [C: ¥FLADDER¥]

w

C:¥DATA¥SAMPLE

[ STEP SEQUENCE PRINT ]

w

V PRINT UNIT : [ALL / MODULE]

MODULE NAME :
V SUB–PROGRAM : [NO/YES]
w

F10 (ESC) : END

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 END

Fig.3.5.3.3 (c) Step Sequence Print Option Menu

177
3. OPERATION B–62884EN/01

· PRINT UNIT
Specify whether a step sequence figure will be printed for
a single subprogram or all subprograms. When printing a
figure for a single subprogram, specify the subprogram
name for MODULE NAME.
· SUB-PROGRAM NUMBER
Specify whether subprogram number Pxxx will be printed
for each step.
(f) I/O module printing
The I/O module data is printed.
(g) Message printing

om
The message data is printed.

PRINT RB4 (STEP SEQ) <0>[C: ¥FLADDER¥]

C:¥DATA¥SAMPLE

r.c
[ MESSAGE PRINT ]

V ADDRESS RANGE :
START ADDRESS :A000.0
END ADDRESS :A124.7

e
nt F10 (ESC) : END
ce
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 END

Fig.3.5.3.3 (d) Message Print Option Menu

nc

i) Option (message printing)

· The range of messages to be printed is specified.
(h) Cross-reference list printing
A cross-reference list is printed.
.c

PRINT RB4 (STEP SEQ) [C: ¥FLADDER¥]

C:¥DATA¥SAMPLE
w

[ CROSS REFERENCE LIST PRINT ]

V CHECK DUPLICATE WRITE : [NO/YES]

w

V APPOINT ADDRESS : ALL

V APPOINT COMMENT : [RELAY/COIL]

[ PRINT FORMAT ] STEP No./NET No.

X0.0
w

: S00001/N00001
Y0.0
() (/) : S00001/N00002

F1 : DISPLAY CROSS REFERENCE F10 (ESC) : END

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 END

Fig.3.5.3.3 (e) Cross Reference List Print Option Menu

178
B–62884EN/01 3. OPERATION

i) Option
· CHECK DUPLICATE WRITE
Check multiple writing to a coil and multiple use of same
number functional instruction (ex. timer, counter).
· APPOINT ADDRESS
Specify the range of printing address. It can be specified
as below.

Table 3.5.3.3 Cross-Reference List Address Specification

Address specification Example of

Address to be output

om
mode keying in
ALL ALL All addresses
Initial letter of an address Y All addresses having a specified
initial letter
Bit address R1.0 Specified bit addresses only

r.c
Byte address X10 Specified byte addresses
(including bit addresses)
Address range F10.0-F12.7 All addresses in a specified range
X2.3-END All addresses after a specified
(Note 1) address

e
Note1
nt
When an address specification is made, addresses are
output in the sequence: X, Y, F, G, R, A, C, K, D, T, variable
address, P. In this example, therefore, Y and all subsequent
ce
addresses are output.

APPOINT COMMENT
Specify the kind of comment data
nc

‘RELAY’ Print Relay comment.

‘COIL’ Print Coil comment.
(i) Bit address map
.c

The bit address map is printed.

PRINT RB4 (STEP SEQ) [C: ¥FLADDER¥]

w

C:¥DATA¥SAMPLE

[ BIT ADDRESS MAP PRINT ]

w

V PUTPUT ADDRESS : [ALL/USED]

V APPOINT ADDRESS : [ALL]
w

F10 (ESC) : END

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 END

Fig.3.5.3.3 (f) Bit Address Map Print Option Menu

179
3. OPERATION B–62884EN/01

i) Option (Bit address map)

· Output address
‘ALL’ All available addresses are printed.
(Including ‘Not used’ addresses.)
‘USED’ The addresses which are used in a sequence
program are printed.
· Address specifications
Specify the range of outputting addresses. For details, refer
Fig. 3.5.3.3 in ‘(h) Cross Reference’.

om
ŸŸŸŸ
ŸŸŸŸ
[¥DATA¥SAMPLE¥P2]
*** LADDER DIAGRAM *** PAGE1

ŸŸŸŸ
ŸŸŸŸ
N00586 Net No.

ŸŸŸŸ
ŸŸŸŸ
A 3453 SUB71 P2 ### P2 ###
SP

r.c
N00587 (* FORMAT–C ladder data *)
B 3455 (* source name = rb4_step *)
(* SUB PROGRAM NO. 2 *)
(* *)

e
X0.0 X01.0 Y01.0
N00588
C 3457 Coil comment Y0.0
Relay Relay Relay 00008 00032 00038 00291
X0.0

X0.0
ŸŸŸ
ŸŸŸŸŸ
ACT
X1.0 nt Y0.0 00315 00321 00594 00618
00624 00764 00770

ŸŸŸ
ŸŸŸŸŸ
N00589
D 3480 SUB65 P4

ŸŸŸ
ŸŸŸŸŸ
ce
Relay CALL

ŸŸŸŸ
ŸŸŸŸ
X0.0

ŸŸŸŸ
ŸŸŸŸ
N00590
E 3463 SUB66 P2000

ŸŸŸ
ŸŸŸŸ ŸŸŸŸŸ
ŸŸŸŸ
CALLU
nc

ŸŸŸ
ŸŸŸŸŸ
X0.0 ACT
N00591

ŸŸŸ
ŸŸŸŸŸ
F 3485 SUB68 L9999
JMP8

ŸŸŸŸ
ŸŸŸŸ
Relay
X0.0

ŸŸŸŸ
ŸŸŸŸ
.c

N00592
SUB69 L9999 ### L9999 ###

ŸŸŸŸ
ŸŸŸŸ
G 3468
LBL
w
w
w

Fig.3.5.3.3 (g) Example of Printout of a Ladder Diagram with Cross Reference Data

180
B–62884EN/01 3. OPERATION

[¥FLADDER¥SAMPLE]
*** Cross reference *** PAGE2
STEP No./NET No.
Address Symbol Comment

Y0.1 U11–O U11 ON

: S00055/N00024

Y0.2 U12–O U12 ON MULTIPLE COIL USED

: S00057/N00025 S00249/N00104

om
Y0.3
: S00041/N00017

r.c
CTR NO.1 MULTIPLE USED
S00247/N00104 S00268/N00107
CTR NO.2
S00261/N00106

e
CTR NO3.
S00254/N00105

nt
ce
Fig.3.5.3.3 (h) Example of Printout with a Multiple Coil Write Check Indication
nc
.c
w
w
w

181
3. OPERATION B–62884EN/01

(1) Printout example by ”F2[SETUP]” (print menu)

<graphical mode printout> <ASCII mode printout>

:
[ j ] S1 Initial step I* S1 Initial step
P1 : P1
:
P100 Transition + P100 Transition
:
<- L1 Label <- L1 Label

om
j S210 * S210
P101 : P101
Divergence of selective : Divergence of selective
P150 P160 sequence + P150 + P160 sequence
Divergence of : : Divergence of
simultaneous : : : simultaneous

r.c
j S211 j S215 j S217 sequence * S211 * S215 * S217 sequence
P151 P161 P165 : P151 : P161 : P165
Convergence of : : Convergence of
P152 P162 simultaneous + P152 + P162 simultaneous
sequence sequence
: :

e
: :
j S212 j S216 Step * S212 * S216 Step
P153

P154
P163

P164
nt
Convergence of selective
:
:
+
P153
:
P154
:

+
P163

164
Convergence of selective
:
ce
sequence : sequence
j ] S1000 Block step B* S1000 Block step
P2000 : P2000
:
nc

P102 + P102
:
:
> L1 Jump -> L1 Jump
.c

(2) Printout example by “SUB-PROGRAM NUMBER [NO/YES]”

w

<Not print sub program number> <Print sub program number>

w

[ j ] S1 [ j ] S1
P1 Sub prograrm number
w

P100
<- L1 P100
j S210 <- L1
j S210
P150 P155 P160 P101

P150 P155 P160

Fig.3.5.3.3(i) Example of Printout of Step Sequence Diagram (1/2)

182
B–62884EN/01 3. OPERATION

(3) Printout example of more than one page.

Size of one page

22 element

om
(28 element)

r.c
14 element

Note) The maximun element count for printing

e
without sub-program number is given in
parentheses.
(1/3) nt Link number
ce
(3/3) <- Number of a sub program
=>5 < > 5=>
nc
.c

v1 v2 v3

4=>
(2/3)
v1 v2 v3
w

=>4
w
w

Fig.3.5.3.3 (i) Example of Printout of Step Sequence Diagram (2/2)

183
3. OPERATION B–62884EN/01

3.5.3.4 Specify printer forms and a print format as described below.

Print Format-1: SETUP
Menu PRINT (SETUP) RB4 (STEP SEQ) [C: ¥FLADDER¥]

V PAPER SIZE/LADDER PRINT :

D 10 INCH / ASCII
10 INCH / GRAPHIC
15 INCH / ASCII
15 INCH / GRAPHIC

om
r.c
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 END

Fig.3.5.3.4 SETUP Menu Screen

e
[Operation]
1) Select F2 [SETUP] from the output item selection screen.
nt2) The SETUP menu screen appears.
3) Position the cursor to a desired item (e.g., forms size/ladder
diagram print format) with the or key.
ce
4) Select the item by pressing the Enter key.
5) Position the cursor to the desired item (e.g., 10 INCH/ASCII)
nc

with the , , , or key, then make the selection

by pressing the Enter key.

6) If F10 [END] is selected after forms selection, the screen display
.c

returns to the output item selection screen.

(1) Forms size/ladder diagram print format
Specify a forms size. In addition, specify whether to print the ladder
w

diagram in character format (ASCII) or graphic format (GRAPHIC).

The currently specified output format is indicated by “F”.
w
w

184
B–62884EN/01 3. OPERATION

3.5.3.5 Each parameter file of this software can be rewritten using a commercially
Print Format-2 available text editor so that the output format shown in each of the
following frames can be changed.
(AMOFTRP, DAT/*
.INF/Message File)

ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
AMROFTRP. DAT PR201-10 . INF
Diagram output 1. Change the paper selection PR201-15 . INF
name PR201-A4 . INF

om
PR10-A . INF
2. Set the top margin
PR15-A . INF
3. Set the net spacing PRA4-A . INF
4. Set the printer model and ESC-P-10 . INF
paper ESC-P-15 . INF

ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ESCP10-A . INF

r.c
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ESCP15-A . INF
CROSSINF. DAT FANUC-10 . INF
(Setting the cross-reference
list output format)
5. Set the line spacing

e
8. Set the output format guid- 6. Set the left margin
ance information
9. Set the output information
nt
10.Specify the output format
11.Set the read/write coil guid-
ance information
ce
12.Specify the linefeed
13.Specify the page break

ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
nc

(Message file)
7. Set the title of printout
.c

For these parameter files, do not change any item not described here.
(1) Changing the paper selection name
This item makes it possible to change the name of each choice during
w

diagram output format selection.

Name of file to be
Point of change Settings
edited
w

AMROFTRP.DAT #10-A=10-inch/ASCII Arbitrary character string

#10-G=10-inch/graphic consisting of up to 30
#15-A=15-inch/ASCII half-size (or 15 full-size)
w

#15-G=15-inch/graphic characters
#A4L-A=A4 portrait/ASCII
#A4L-G=A4 portrait/graphic

Note
#A4L-A=and #A4L-G=are unavailable in the output to
VP1000.

185
3. OPERATION B–62884EN/01

(2) Setting the top margin

This item makes it possible to specify the top margin of a diagram.
Name of file to be
Point of change Settings
edited
AMROFTRP.DAT TOPMGL=0 Decimal number
TOPMG=0
(for each form)

(3) Setting the spacing between the LADDER net

By modifying this item, the spacing between the LADDER nets used
during diagram printout can be changed in the manner shown below.

om
N00003 N00003
C C
Y0.7 Y0.0 Y0.7 Y0.0

r.c
N00004 00001 *00006 00001 *00006
D N00004
D
Y0.0 Y0.7 Y0.1
N00005 *00006 00001 Y0.0 Y0.7 Y0.1
E *00006 00001

e
N00005
Y0.0 Y0.1 Y0.7 Y0.2 E
*00006 00001 *00008
Y0.0 Y0.1 Y0.7 Y0.2

When LCNTL=4
nt *00006

When LCNTL=5
00001 *00008
ce
Name of file to be
Point of change Settings
edited
AMROFTRP.DAT LCNTL=4 Specify either 4 or 5
nc

(Set for each sheet)

.c
w
w
w

186
B–62884EN/01 3. OPERATION

(4) Setting the printer model and print paper

This item can change the printer model and print paper that are
specified at paper selection.
Name of file to Point of
*.INF that can be set Printer name Print paper type/print mode
be edited change
AMROFTRP. #10-A PR10 A . INF PR201 10-inch continuous form/ASCII
DAT : PR201 10 . INF PR201 10-inch continuous form/graphic
: ESCP10 A . INF VP1000 10-inch continuous form/ASCII
C FILE= ESC P 10 . INF VP1000 10-inch continuous form/graphic
FANUC 10 . INF FANUC printer 10-inch continuous form/ASCII
#10-G PR10 A . INF PR201 10-inch continuous form/ASCII

om
: PR201 10 . INF PR201 10-inch continuous form/graphic
: ESCP10 A . INF VP1000 10-inch continuous form/ASCII
C FILE= ESC P 10 . INF VP1000 10-inch continuous form/graphic
FANUC 10 . INF FANUC printer 10-inch continuous form/ASCII
#15-A PR15 A . INF PR201 15-inch continuous form/ASCII
: PR201 15 . INF PR201 15-inch continuous form/graphic

r.c
: ESCP15 A . INF VP1000 15-inch continuous form/ASCII
C FILE= ESC P 15 . INF VP1000 15-inch continuous form/graphic
#15-G PR15 A . INF PR201 15-inch continuous form/ASCII
: PR201 15 . INF PR201 15-inch continuous form/graphic
: ESCP15 A . INF VP1000 15-inch continuous form/ASCII

e
C FILE= ESC P 15 . INF VP1000 15-inch continuous form/graphic
#A4L-A PRA4 A . INF PR201 A4 portrait, cut sheet/ASCII
: (Note)
:
C FILE=
#A4L-G
PR201 A4

PRA4 A
nt
. INF

. INF
PR201

PR201
A4 portrait, cut sheet/graphic

A4 portrait, cut sheet/ASCII

ce
: (Note) PR201 A4 . INF PR201 A4 portrait, cut sheet/graphic
:
C FILE=
nc

Note
#A4L-A and #A4L-G are unavailable in the output to
VP1000.
.c

(5) Setting the line spacing

This item can specify the line spacing of a diagram. The file to be
edited is the one specified according to the descriptions in Section
w

1.4.4.
Name of file to be
Point of change Settings
edited
w

*.INF LPI (H) (1B) (C) (T20) ; (H) (1B) (C) (T<decimal
number>) ;
LDRLPI (H) (1B) (C) (H) (1B) (C) (T<decimal
w

(T15) ; number>) ;

(6) Setting the left margin

This item can specify the left margin of a diagram. The file to be
edited is the one specified according to the descriptions in (4).
Name of file to be
Point of change Settings
edited
*.INF LMARGIN (H) (1B) (C) (H) (1B) (C) (L<decimal
(L000) ; number>) ;

187
3. OPERATION B–62884EN/01

(7) Setting the title of printout

This item can change the title of a diagram.
Name of file to be edited Point of change Settings
I-PRTOUT. JPN. @ SYS-TITLE (C) (<any character string consisting of up to
I-PRTOUT. ENG. (*** SYSTEM & PARAMETER ***) ; 60 half-size (or 30 full-size) characters>) ;
@ CMT-TITLE
(*** SYMBOL & COMMENT ***) ;
@ LAD-TITLE
(*** LADDER DIAGRAM ***) ;
@ STEP-TITLE
(*** STEP SEQUENCE DIAGRAM ***) ;

om
@ IO-TITLE
(*** I/O MODULE DATA ***) ;
@ MSG-TITLE
(*** MESSAGE DATA ***) ;
@ TIT-TITLE
(*** TITLE DATA ***) ;
@ CRS-TITLE

r.c
(*** CROSS-REFERENCE ***) ;
@ BIT-TITLE
(*** BIT ADDRESS MAP ***) ;

e
Notes
1 These point of changes are in the file, I_PRTOUT. ENG.
2 One–byte katakana characters cannot be used.
nt
(8) Setting the cross-reference list output format guidance information
ce
This item can specify characters to be output as guidance information
to be output during cross-reference listing. In the CROSSINF.DAT
file, lines with no semicolon at the beginning are valid as guidance
information.
nc

Name of file to be
Point of change Settings
edited
CROSSINF.DAT GUIDE= Any character string consisting
of up to 19 bytes
.c

(9) Setting the cross-reference list output information

This item can specify step and/or net numbers to be output as
cross-reference information. If both step and net numbers are
specified, which is to be printed first can also be specified. In the
w

CROSSINF.DAT file, lines with no semicolon at the beginning are

valid as cross-reference information.
w
w

188
B–62884EN/01 3. OPERATION

Name of file to be
Point of change Settings
edited
CROSSINF.DAT NET-INF= When only the net number is
STEP-INF= output:
NET-INT=1
STEP-INF=0
When only the step number is
output:
NET-INT=0
STEP-INF=1
When the net and step
numbers are output in the

om
stated sequence:
NET-INT=1
STEP-INF=2
When the step and net
numbers are output in the
stated sequence:

r.c
NET-INT=2
STEP-INF=1

(10)Specifying the cross-reference list output format

This item enables a character string to be printed at the beginning of
the step and net numbers. In the CROSSINF.DAT file, lines with no

e
semicolon at the beginning are valid.
Name of file to be
nt edited
CROSSINF.DAT
Point of change

FORM=
Settings

Character string+‘%s’
ce
Note
Only letters in lowercase are valid as ‘%s’.
nc

(11) Setting the cross-reference list read/write coil guidance information

This item can set a comment about coil attributes. In the
CROSSINF.DAT file, lines with no semicolon at the beginning are
valid.
.c

Name of file to be
Point of change Settings
edited
CROSSINF.DAT READ= Character string consisting of
WRITE= up to 13 bytes.
w

READ=-| |- -| / |- :
WRITE=-( )- -( / )- :
w

(12)Specifying the cross-reference list linefeed

This item can insert a space line between addresses. In the
CROSSINF.DAT file, lines with no semicolon at the beginning are
valid.
w

Name of file to be
Point of change Settings
edited
CROSSINF.DAT NL= Decimal number

189
3. OPERATION B–62884EN/01

Note
In this case, space lines as many as the specified value plus
1 are inserted between addresses. (If 0 is specified as the
linefeed count, no space line is inserted between
addresses.)

(13)Specifying the cross-reference list page break

This item can specify a page break between address types. In the
CROSSINF.DAT file, lines with no semicolon at the beginning are

om
valid.
Name of file to be
Point of change Settings
edited
CROSSINF.DAT FF= ‘0’=the page is not advanced
‘1’=the page is advanced

e r.c
nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w

190
B–62884EN/01 3. OPERATION

Environment settings for diagram printout - example 1 (settings in file

AMROFTRP.DAT)

Changing the types of print-

#PAPER=10-G out paper #PAPER=10-G
* #10-A=10 inch/ASCII #10-A=NEC 10
LENGTHL=11 (The name is changed from ’1:10 LENGTHL=11
LENGTH=11 LENGTH=11
WIDTHL=10 inch/ASCII’ to ’1:NEC 10’.) WIDTHL=10
WIDTH=10 WIDTH=10
PITCHL=15/120 PITCHL=15/120
PITCH=20/120 PITCH=20/120
LINESL=83 LINESL=83
When ’1’ is LINES=55 LINES=55

om
selected as RATIOL=2/3 RATIOL=2/3
the printout RATIO=2/3 RATIO=2/3
GRAMODL=14 GRAMODL=14
paper GRAMOD=16 GRAMOD=16
ANKMODL=0 ANKMODL=0
ANKMOD=1 ANKMOD=1
LEFTMGL=0 Changing the upper margin LEFTMGL=0
LEFTWG=0 LEFTWG=0
* TOPMGL=0 TOPMGL=5

r.c
* TOPMG=0 (The upper margin is set to 5 TOPMG=0
* LCNTL=4 characters.) LCNTL=4
* C FILE=PR10 A.INF Changing the types of C FILE=PR10 A.INF
O FILE=PRTDAT.DMP O FILE=PRTDAT.DMP
#END printout paper #END
* #10-G=10 inch/graphic #10-G=EPSON 10
LENGTHL=11 (The name is changed from LENGTHL=11

e
LENGTH=11 ’2:10inch/graphic’ to ’2:EPSON LENGTH=11
WIDTHL=10 WIDTHL=10
WIDTH=10 10’. ) WIDTH=10
PITCHL=15/120 PITCHL=15/120

When ’2’ is
selected as
PITCH=20/120
LINESL=83
LINES=55
RATIOL=2/3
RATIO=2/3
nt PITCH=20/120
LINESL=83
LINES=55
RATIOL=2/3
RATIO=2/3
ce
the printout GRAMODL=14 GRAMODL=14
GRAMOD=16 GRAMOD=16
paper ANKMODL=0 ANKMODL=0
ANKMOD=1 ANKMOD=1
LEFTMGL=0 LEFTMGL=0
LEFTWG=0 LEFTWG=0
* TOPMGL=0 TOPMGL=0
nc

* TOPMG=0 Changing the type of printer TOPMG=0

* LCNTL=4 LCNTL=4
* C FILE=PR201 10.INF C FILE=ESCP10 A.INF
O FILE=PRTDAT.DMP (The printer is changed to O FILE=PRTDAT.DMP
#END #END
* #15-A=15 inch/ASCII EPSON VP1000 and the paper is #15-A=15 inch/ASCII
LENGTHL=11 changed to 10-inch forms.) LENGTHL=11
.c

LENGTH=11 LENGTH=11
WIDTHL=15 WIDTHL=15
WIDTH=15 WIDTH=15
PITCHL=15/120 PITCHL=15/120
PITCH=20/120 PITCH=20/120
w

LINESL=83 LINESL=83
When ’3’ is LINES=55 LINES=55
RATIOL=2/3 RATIOL=2/3
selected as RATIO=2/3 RATIO=2/3
the printout
w

GRAMODL=16 GRAMODL=16
paper GRAMOD=16 GRAMOD=16
ANKMODL=1 ANKMODL=1
ANKMOD=1 ANKMOD=1
LEFTMGL=0 LEFTMGL=0
w

LEFTWG=0 Changing the spacing between LEFTWG=0

* TOPMGL=0 TOPMGL=0
TOPMG=0 the LADDER nets TOPMG=0
*
* LCNTL=4 LCNTL=5
* C FILE=PR15 A.INF (The net spacing for the LADDER C FILE=PR15 A.INF
O FILE=PRTDAT.DMP O FILE=PRTDAT.DMP
#END diagram is widened.) #END
* #15-G=15 inch * #15-G=15 inch

Note
An asterisk (*) indicates data which can be modified.

191
3. OPERATION B–62884EN/01

Environment settings for diagram printout - example 2 (settings in file

PR201 10.INF)

: :
: :
: :

PR201H3 CNTINF {
CRLF (H)(OD,OA);
FORMF (H)(OC);

om
CPI (H)(1B)(C)(H);
CANCEL (H)(18);
LDRCPI (H)(1B)(C)(Q);
* LPI (H)(1B)(C)(T20);
* LDRLPI (H)(1B)(C)(T15);
* LMARGIN (H)(1B)(C)(L000);
RMARGIN (H)(1B)(C)(/078);

r.c
LDRCHAR (H)(1B)(C)(J0014);
JPNSET (H)(1B)(C)(K);
JPNRESET (H)(1B)(C)(H);
}

: :

e
: :
: :

Setting the spacing between

lines
nt Setting the left margin
(Left margin is set to 5 charac-
ce
(Line spacing is set to 25.) ters.)

: :
: :
nc

: :

PR201H3 CNTINF {
CRLF (H)(OD,OA);
FORMF (H)(OC);
.c

CANCEL (H)(18);
CPI (H)(1B)(C)(H);
LDRCPI (H)(1B)(C)(Q);
LPI (H)(1B)(C)(T25);
w

LDRLPI (H)(1B)(C)(T15);
LMARGIN (H)(1B)(C)(L005);
RMARGIN (H)(1B)(C)(/078);
w

LDRCHAR (H)(1B)(C)(J0014);
JPNSET (H)(1B)(C)(K);
JPNRESET (H)(1B)(C)(H);
}
w

: :
: :
: :

Note
An asterisk (*) indicates data which can be modified.

192
B–62884EN/01 3. OPERATION

Environment settings for diagram output - example 3 (sample setting 1

of the CROSSINF.DAT file)
D Sample setting of the CROSSINF.DAT file

:
GUIDE=STEP No./NET No.
NET-INF=2
STEP-INF=1
FROM=S%s/N%s
READ=-I I-!-I/I- :

om
WRITE=-()- -(/)- :
NL=1
FF=0
;

D Sample cross reference output

r.c
[C:¥DATA¥SAMPLE]
*** Cross reference *** PAGE 1

e
STEP NO./NET No.
Address Symbol Comment
X0.0

X0.1
nt
: S00045/N00009 S00049/N00012 S00053/N00013 S00082/N00017
S00088/N00020 S00094/N0002
ce
: S00050/N00010 S00054/N00012 S00059/N00015 S00065/N00017
S00077/N00029

Y0.0 MULTIPLE COIL USED

: S00045/N00009 S00128/N00062 S00256/N00098
nc

R0.0
: S00009/N00003 S00012/N00008 S00014/N00009 S00015/N00010
S00022/N00010 S00024/N00012 S00033/N00015 S00045/N00017
.c

S00047/N00019 S00074/N00032 S00079/N00035

: S00002/N00001
w
w
w

193
3. OPERATION B–62884EN/01

Environment settings for diagram output - example 4 (sample setting 2

of the CROSSINF.DAT file)
D Sample setting of the CROSSINF.DAT file

:
GUIDE=step number
NET-INF=0
STEP-INF=1
FROM=S%s
READ=read

om
WRITE=write
NL=0
FF=0
;

D Sample cross reference output

r.c
[C:¥DATA¥SAMPLE]

e
*** Cross reference *** PAGE 1
Step number
Address Symbol Comment
X0.0
nt
Read : S00045 S00049 S00053 S00082 S00088 S00094
X0.1
ce
Read : S00050 S00054 S00059 S00065 S00077
Y0.0 MULTIPLE COIL USED
Write: S00045 S00128 S00256
R0.0
nc

Read : S00009 S00012 S00014 S00015 S00022 S00024 S00033 S00045

S00047 S00074 S00079
Write: S00002
.c
w

3.5.3.6 Upon the completion of installation, the default printer is set to EPSON
Changing the Printer VP1000.
w

Specification (1) Changing the printer specification to NEC PR201

To enable output to an NEC PR201 printer, change the setting file by
means of the procedure described below. (In the following example,
the floppy disk drive is drive A, installed drive is under the C: \
w

FLADDER directory, and the file is changed from the DOS prompt.)
[Operation]
1) Copy the AMROFTRP.PR file from the APPENDIX directory of
Volume 1.5 of system floppy disk to the install directory.
Example:C: \ CD FLADDER Enter

C: \ FLADDER>COPY A: \ APPENDIX \
AMROFTRP.PR C: Enter

194
B–62884EN/01 3. OPERATION

2) Delete the AMROPTRP.DAT file from install directory.

Example:C: \ FLADDER>DEL AMROPTRP.DAT Enter

3) Change the name of the AMROFTRP.PR file to

AMROPTRP.DAT.
Example:C: \ FLADDER>RENAME AMROFTRP.PR
AMROPTRP.DAT Enter

Note
To reenable output to the EPSON VP1000 printer, perform

om
steps 1) through 3), replacing AMROFTRP.PR with
AMROFTRP.ESC.

(2) Changing the printer specification to a FANUC printer

For details, see Section 3.5.3.5 (4).

r.c
Note
FANUC PRINTER is connected to a serial port with
RS-232-C cable.

e
Please set the communication mode from DOS prompt
before start by the following command.
(Example) When connected to a serial port COM1.
nt C:/>MODE COM1:4800,N,8,2 Enter
ce
3.5.4 During compilation, an edited source program is translated into an object
Compilation file executable by the PMC. Uncompiled programs cannot use online
nc

function and cannot be transferred to the RAM for the PMC. Compilation
can be performed in one of two modes: normal mode and condensed
mode.
.c

Transferred to the
Compile ROM writer
Source Object
w

program file and PMC

w

D Condensed mode
A source program can be compiled in condensed mode. When a
ladder with the same number of steps is compiled in condensed mode,
w

the size of the created object file is smaller than that created in normal
mode. As a result, condensed mode has the advantages listed below.

195
3. OPERATION B–62884EN/01

1) A larger C language area can be allocated.

Normal mode Condensed mode

Ladder Ladder

Object file
↑
C C
language language

om
2) Time required for compilation is reduced.
3) Time required for transfer from the personal computer to the
PMC is reduced.
4) A ROM module with a smaller capacity may be used.
On the other hand, condensed mode has the restrictions described
below.

r.c
1) Memory map changes (area expansion) are likely to occur when
instructions, symbols, comments, and so forth are added when a
ROM format file generated by compilation in condensed mode
is transferred to the PMC and edited with the built–in editing

e
function. In this case, the user needs to pay attention to possible
overlap between the ladder area and C language area.
nt
ROM format file
Ladder Ladder
ce
Overlap (A C language program
C map change is required.)
language C
language
nc

2) A ROM format file generated by compilation in condensed mode

cannot be compared with a ROM format file generated by
compilation in normal mode.
.c

D Changing the order of subprograms

When a program is compiled, the source program, subdivided into
subprograms, is converted to a single ROM file. Within the ROM
w

file, subprograms are arranged in ascending order of subprogram

numbers.
w
w

196
B–62884EN/01 3. OPERATION

3.5.4.1
Start and Terminate (1) Start
[Operation]
1) Select [compil] (compile) from the offline menu.
2) The compile screen appears.

Compile PMC–RB4 <0>[C:¥FLADDER¥ ]

om
Source program name : C:¥DATA¥SAMPLE

V Output to ROM format file

SYMBOL & COMMENT [F6]
YES NET COMMENT [F7] POINTERS ONLY

e r.c
nt
1 EXEC 2 3 4 5 6 SYMBOL 7 NETCMT 8 CONDNS 9 DOS

Fig.3.5.4.1 (a) Compile Menu Screen

10 END
ce
D General Flow of Operation for compiling

Offline menu
nc

[COMPIL]

F3
.c

Specify input program

[ EXEC ] [CONDNS]
w

F1 F8
w

Offline menu
w

Fig.3.5.4.1 (b) Compiling General Operation and Screens

(2) Compile
(a) Normal mode
[Operation] 1) Select F1 [EXEC].
2) Compile processing is performed in normal
mode.
(b) Condense mode
[Operation] 1) Select F8 [CONDNS].

197
3. OPERATION B–62884EN/01

2) Compile processing is performed in condense

mode.
(3) Displaying the results of compile processing
Pressing F2 [MAP] after the completion of compile processing
displays a memory map for the object file.
The results of compile processing are displayed by pressing F3
[ERROR] on the compile screen, regardless of whether an error or
warning has been output. Moreover, the results of compile
processing are output to a text–format file, as described below.

ŸŸŸŸŸŸŸŸŸŸŸŸ

om
ŸŸŸŸŸŸŸŸŸŸŸŸ
C:¥DATA¥SAMPLE
##### PASSI ##### Output the compile result in two passes.

ŸŸ
MESSAGE
SYMBOL

ŸŸ
LEVEL1.#LA
Ladder program exists beyond END1 instruction. (00111net) Net No.
LEVEL2.#LA in each

r.c
P1.#LA subprogram.
P2.#LA
There is no SP instruction at the top of the subprogram.
##### PASS2 #####

Compile completed Error count =00002 Warning count =00000

e
nt Fig.3.5.4.1 (c) Compile Result

PASS1: Convert to object

ce
PASS2: Syntax check
If many errors have occurred, those errors can be easily identified by
viewing the relevant file with the text editor or by printing out the file.
The results of execution can also be displayed using a utility function.
nc

(See Section 3.5.9.)

Example: When the program shown below is compiled, the
following files are output to the C:¥DATA directory:
Execution result file SAMPLE.ERR
Map file SAMPLE.MAP
.c
w

Compile PMC–RB4 <0>[C:¥FLADDER¥ ]

Source program name : C:¥DATA¥SAMPLE

w

Compile Normal End

Compile completed error count=000000 warning count=000000

w

1 EXEC 2 MAP 3 ERROR 4 5 6 SYMBOL 7 NETCMT 8 CONDNS 9 DOS 10 END

Fig.3.5.4.1 (d) Complile Completed Screen

198
B–62884EN/01 3. OPERATION

(4) DOS command

You can call MS–DOS shell by pushing F9 [DOS] key.
If you want to terminate this, key in the command as bellow at
MS–DOS command line.

A : \>EXIT

(5) Termination
[Operation]

om
1) Select [END] or press the Esc key.
2) The screen display returns to the main menu screen.

3.5.4.2 These options’ initial value can be changed at the Program option set–up.

r.c
Compile Options (Refer to 3.5.7 Program option set–up.)
(1) F6 [SYMBOL]
Select whether output or not output the symbol & comment data to
ROM format file.

e
However,the symbols which can not be displayed on CRT/MDI
(7bytes or more symbols) and the coil comments assigned to them
never output to object file.
nt
D “YES”: (Default setting)
The symbols which can be displayed on CRT/MDI(6bytes or less
symbols) and the coil comments assigned to them are output to object
ce
file.
They can be displayed on CRT/MDI.
D “NO” :
No symbol/coil comment is converted to object file.
Any symbol and coil comment is not displayed on CRT/MDI.
nc

(2) F7 [NETCMT]
If Net comment is used in ladder program, you can choose whether
‘Net comment pointer’ (Note1) is output to object file or not.
D “POINTERS ONLY” : (Default setting)
.c

To edit the ladder program by CNC on–line editor and decompile the
data select this setting.
However, ladder size gets larger because ‘Net comment pointer’ is
w

output to object file.

D “NO” :
Any ‘Net comment pointer” is not output to object file. In this case,
w

ladder size in the object file is saved.

However, decompile the object file makes its net comment data
information lost.
w

199
3. OPERATION B–62884EN/01

Note
Net comment has its own character information only in a
source program on the personal computer.
Compiled object file does not include any net comment
characters.
Only ‘Net comment pointer’( = information of net comment
position.) can be output to object file as an functional
instruction “NOP”.
This ‘Net comment pointer” helps to restore net comment
date at decompiling the object file that is edited on CNC

om
on–line editor.

3.5.4.3 It enables a password to be added during compilation.

r.c
Password Set Function The password can be used to prohibit ladder programs from being
displayed or edited. This function requires to be set the program option.
(Refer to 3.5.7 Setting program options.)
(1) Password types

e
There are two password types.
Each password consists of up to 8 alphanumeric characters.
nt Type
Password (R)
Password (R/W)
Use
Password to allow display on the CNC.
Password to allow display and editing on the CNC.
ce
(2) Password setting (compile)
1) When no password → Go to 10).
When password RW & R, RW or R
nc

After compilation [EXEC] or [CONDNS] is selected, you will be

prompted to specify whether to use a password.

Do you enter password? (Y/N)

.c

To set a password, press Y

→ If password RW & R or R go to 2).
w

→ If password RW go to 6).
If it is unnecessary to set a password, press N
w

→ Go to 10).
2) The password (R) set screen appears.
w

Enter password (R)

3) Enter a password.
D A password that can be used is a combination of 8 or less
letters and/or numerals.
D Uppercase and lowercase letters are not distinguished from
each other. (If a lowercase letter is entered, it is assumed to
be uppercase.)

200
B–62884EN/01 3. OPERATION

D It is impossible to use space, kana, kanji, and special

characters (such as *, #, and @).
D Some character strings are unusable.
If one such character string is entered as a password, an error
message is displayed. In such a case, use another character
string.
D An entered password is not displayed on the screen.
D If the Enter key is pressed before any valid password is
specified, use of a password is not specified.
→ If password=RW&R go to 6).

om
If password=R go to 10).
D When Esc is pressed, an attempt to specify a password is
discontinued.
→ Go to 1).
4) The password configuration screen appears.

r.c
Verification (R)

5) You will be prompted to enter the same password as entered

e
before, to ensure that your password was entered correctly.
D When the password entered this time matches one that was
nt entered before, it is accepted.
D When they do not match, the message ”Password mismatch”
is displayed.
You are allowed to retry entering twice.
ce
D When Esc is pressed, an attempt to specify a password is
discontinued.
→ Go to 1).
nc

If password=R is specified.
→ Go to 10).
6) The password (R/W) set screen appears.
.c

Enter password (R/W)

7) Enter a password (R/W).

w

D A password that can be used is a combination of 8 or less

letters and/or numerals.
D Uppercase and lowercase letters are not distinguished from
w

each other. (If a lowercase letter is entered, it is assumed to

be uppercase.)
D It is impossible to use space, kana, kanji, and special
w

characters (such as *, #, and @).

D Some character strings are unusable.
If one such character string is entered as a password, an error
message is displayed. In such a case, use another character
string.
D An entered password is not displayed on the screen.
D If the Enter key is pressed before any valid password is
specified, use of a password is not specified.
→ Go to 10).

201
3. OPERATION B–62884EN/01

D When Esc is pressed, the attempt to specify a password is

rejected.
→ Go to 1).
8) The password confirmation screen appears.

Verification (R/W)

9) You will be prompted to enter the same password as entered

before, to ensure that your password was entered correctly.

om
D When the password entered this time matches one that was
entered before, it is accepted.
D When they do not match, the message ”Password mismatch”
is displayed.
You are allowed to retry entering twice.
D When

r.c
Esc is pressed, the attempt to specify a password is
rejected.
→ Go to 1).
10)Compilation begins.

e
3.5.5 During decompilation, an object file is translated into a source program
nt
Decompilation that can be edited or printed out.
Data that is uploaded from the PMC or is read from ROM is object file
data. Data in the object file cannot be edited or printed out. Such data
ce
must be decompiled before it can be edited or printed out.
nc

Decompile Source
Object file program
.c

Note
w

To decompile a password–protected object file, it is

necessary to enter a password. (See Section 3.5.4.)
w
w

202
B–62884EN/01 3. OPERATION

3.5.5.1 (1) Start

Operation [Operation]
1) Select [DECOMP] (decompile) from the main menu.
2) The decompile screen appears.

Decompile PMC–RB4 <0>[C:¥FLADDER¥ ]

om
Source program name : C:¥DATA¥SAMPLE

V Output to Source Program

SYMBOL & COMMENT
Merge [F4] YES
Duplicated symbol definition [F5] MEMORY CARD DATA (effective)

e r.c
nt
1 EXEC 2 3 4 MERGE 5 SYMBOL 6 7 8

Fig.3.5.5.1 (a) Decompile Menu Screen

9 10 END
ce
(2) Decompiling
[Operation]
1) Select [EXEC] on the decompile screen.
2) Decompilation is performed and the result is displayed.
nc

(3) Decompiling
Upon the completion of decompiling, pressing the F2 [MAP] key can
display the memory map of the object file.
The result of decompiling can be displayed by pressing the F3
.c

[ERROR] key on the decompile screen, regardless of whether an error

or warning has occurred.
If many errors have occurred, the error file can be viewed or printed
w

using a text editor.

The result of decompiling can also be displayed using the utility
function (see Section 3.5.9).
w

(Example) When the program shown below is decompiled :

Result file SAMPLE.ERR and map file SAMPLE.MAP
are output to directory C: \ DATA.
w

203
3. OPERATION B–62884EN/01

Decompile PMC–RB4 <0>[C:¥FLADDER¥ ]

Source program name : C:¥DATA¥SAMPLE

Decompile normal end

Decompile completed error count=000000 warning count=000000

om
r.c
1 EXEC 2 MAP 3 ERROR 4 MERGE 5 SYMBOL 6 7 8 9 10 END

Fig.3.5.5.1 (b) Decompile end Screen

(4) Termination

e
[Operation]
1) Select [END].
nt 2) The screen display returns to the main menu screen.
ce
3.5.5.2
Decompile Option (1) Merge
In case the existent file is specified for output source program when
decompiling, the existent source program is deleted and new source
nc

program is created with the contents of object file.

In this case it is possible to merge the Ladder in object file with the
Symbol/Commnet in source program by specifying the
undermentioned function–key.
.c

Decompile PMC–RB4 <0>[C:¥FLADDER¥ ]

w

Source program name : C:¥DATA¥SAMPLE

w

V Output to source program

SYMBOL & COMMENT
Merge [F4] YES
Duplicated symbol definition [F5] MEMORY CARD DATA (effective)
w

1 EXEC 2 3 4 MERGE 5 SYMBOL 6 7 8 9 10 END

Fig.3.5.5.2 Decompile Menu Screen

204
B–62884EN/01 3. OPERATION

(a) F4 [MERGE]
This specification decides whether to merge the symbol/comment by
“NO” or “YES”.
1) ”NO” :
The existent source program is deleted and new source program
is created with the contents of object file.
There is no display of “F5[SYNBOL]” in this condition.
2) “YES” : (Default setting)
The symbol/commnet in source program is merged with that in
object file. As for the other data except symbol/comment, object
file is effective.

om
Just after this specification, F5[SYMBOL] will be displayed to
specify which symbol definition is effective, either in source
program or in object file, when they are in conflict.
(b) F5 [SYMBOL]
F5[SYMBOL] will be displayed when ”YES” is specified for
F4[MERGE].

r.c
This specification decides which symbol definition in either source
program or object file is effective when they are in conflict.
1) “SOURCE DATA”
The symbol definition in source program is effective.
2) “MEMORY CARD DATA” : (Default setting)

e
The symbol definition in object file is effective.

nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w

205
3. OPERATION B–62884EN/01

(c) The combination of F4[MERGE] and F5[DUPADR], and its result.

Object file
- Symbol/Comment data
ADDRESS SYMBOL(6byte) COIL-COMMENT(30byte)

X0.0 XXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX

R1.4 YYYYYY YYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYY

Source program

om
- Symbol/Comment data
ADDRESS SYMBOL(16byte) RELAY-COMMENT(16byte) COIL-COMMENT(30byte)

X0.0 AAAAAAAAAA AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA

Y2.3 BBBBBBBB BBBBBBBBBBBBBB BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB
Y4.7 YYYYYY YYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYY

e r.c
(i) The result of ”MERGE = NO”
Source program
X0.0
R1.4
XXXXXX
YYYYYY
nt XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
YYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYY
ce
(ii) The result of ”MERGE = YES” and ”Symbol definition = MEMORY CARD DATA”.

Source program
X0.0 XXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
nc

Y2.3 BBBBBBBB BBBBBBBBBBBBBB BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB

R1.4 YYYYYY YYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYY
.c

(iii)The result of ”MERGE = YES” and ”Symbol definition=SOURCE DATA”. program”.

Source program
X0.0 AAAAAAAAAA AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA
w

Y2.3 BBBBBBBB BBBBBBBBBBBBBB BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB

Y4.7 YYYYYY YYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYY
w
w

206
B–62884EN/01 3. OPERATION

3.5.5.3 To decompile a password-protected file, it is necessary to enter a

Password password.
Set password type Password type to be entered
Both password (R) and (R/W) Password (R/W)
Password (R/W) Password (R/W)
Password (R) Password (R)

1) After discompilation [EXEC] is selected, the following password

entry screen appears.

om
Enter password (R)

Note
If an R/W password has been set up, ”password (R/W)” is

r.c
displayed.

2) When the valid password is entered, discompilation begins.

e
If the newly entered password is incorrect, an error message is
displayed, and processing discontinues.
(You are allowed to retry entering twice.)
nt When
rejected.
Esc is pressed, the request to start discompilation is
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w

207
3. OPERATION B–62884EN/01

3.5.5.4 When the results of decompilation are output to a source program, they
Outputting to Split Files are split into units of subprograms and output to different files. For
details, see Section 2.6.2.

Object file Source program

LEVEL1.#LA
Ladder 1st level

om
END1 (SUB 1)

LEVEL2.#LA
Ladder 2nd level
END2 (SUB 2)

LEVEL3.#LA

r.c
Ladder 3rd level
END3 (SUB 48)

SP (SUB 71) P001

P1.#LA

e
Subprogram P1
(Ladder)

SPE (SUB 72)

SP (SUB 71) P002

nt
ce
P2.#SS
Subprogram P2
(Step Sequence)

SPE (SUB 72)

nc

SP (SUB 71) P003

P3.#LA
Subprogram P3
(Ladder)
.c

SPE (SUB 72)

w

The END instruction is not in the source program.

END (SUB 64)
The instruction is automatically added when the
w

program is compiled.
w

208
B–62884EN/01 3. OPERATION

3.5.6 There are three types of input/output operations, as described below.

Input/Output (1) Transfer with the PMC RAM via an RS-232–C interface.
(2) Input/output between PMC RAM and a memory card or floppy disk
(FD) via a Floppy Cassette Adapter or Handy File, respectively.
(3) Backup and restore source program and.
[Operation]
1) Switch off the personal computer and input/output unit, and
connect them via an RS-232-C cable. (See Appendix H.)

om
2) Select [I/O] (input/output) from the main menu.
3) The input/output menu appears.

3.5.6.1 Ports are set according to the values in the following data files.

r.c
I/O Port Setting (1) FLIO_AT.DAT
These files are in text format. So, a text editor can be used to change
set values in the files.
(2) Contents of the FLIO_AT.DAT
(effective data section only)

e
nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w

209
3. OPERATION B–62884EN/01

DATA-BLOCK=IO-PORT-SET

PMC-WRITER =COM1 : 48, N, 8, 2

FA-WRITER =COM1 : 48, N, 8, 2
PMC-L =COM1 : 48, N, 8, 2
PMC-M =COM1 : 48, N, 8, 2
PMC-M (TT) =COM1 : 48, N, 8, 2
PMC-M (AXIS) =COM1 : 48, N, 8, 2
PMC-MMC =COM1 : 48, N, 8, 2
PMC-MMC (AXIS) =COM1 : 48, N, 8, 2
PMC-N =COM1 : 96, N, 8, 2

om
PMC-P =COM1 : 48, N, 8, 2
PMC-QA =COM1 : 96, N, 8, 2
PMC-M (I/O) =COM1 : 48, N, 8, 2
PMC-M (I/O, TT) =COM1 : 48, N, 8, 2
PMC-M (I/O, AXIS) =COM1 : 48, N, 8, 2
PMC-N (I/O) =COM1 : 96, N, 8, 2

r.c
PMC-RB =COM1 : 96, N, 8, 2
PMC-RC =COM1 : 96, N, 8, 2
PMC-RA1 =COM1 : 96, N, 8, 2
PMC-RA2 =COM1 : 96, N, 8, 2
PMC-RB2 =COM1 : 96, N, 8, 2

e
PMC-RA3 =COM1 : 96, N, 8, 2
PMC-RB3 =COM1 : 96, N, 8, 2

nt PMC-RC3
PMC-PA1
PMC-PA3
PMC-QC
=COM1 : 96, N, 8, 2
=COM1 : 96, N, 8, 2
=COM1 : 96, N, 8, 2
=COM1 : 96, N, 8, 2
ce
PMC-NB =COM1 : 96, N, 8, 2
PMC-RB4 =COM1 : 96, N, 8, 2
PMC-RC4 =COM1 : 96, N, 8, 2
PMC-RB4 (STEP-SEQ) =COM1 : 96, N, 8, 2
PMC-RC4 (STEP-SEQ) =COM1 : 96, N, 8, 2
nc

Entity on the left-hand side of each equal sign (=) : Device

Entity on the right-hand side of each equal sign (=) : Represented in
.c

the format of each MODE command. Only the first parameter (port
number) and second parameter (baud rate) can be changed.
w
w
w

210
B–62884EN/01 3. OPERATION

3.5.6.2 Data can be transferred serially via RS-232-C.

Transfer to and from
PMC
Ladder Editing
CNC
Package

9600/4800bps
Download PMC (I/O) screen

om
9600/4800bps
Upload PMC (I/O) screen

9600/4800bps
Comparison PMC (I/O) screen

r.c
Baud rate setting

(1) Download

e
[Operation]
1) Select F3 : [PMC] on the I/O menu screen.
nt 2) Select F1 : [DNLOAD] (download) on the PMC menu screen to
display the source program name.
* 3) Press the System key of the CNC.
ce
* 4) Press the CNC soft keys [PMC], [I/O], [HOST], and [EXEC] in
this order.
5) Press the Enter key.
nc

6) Downloading is executed. During operation, the indication

“EXECUTING” blinks.
7) When downloading terminates normally, the indication
“NORMAL END” is output.
.c

(2) Upload
Language data (C language) other than Ladder programs can be used.
When uploading or comparison is executed from PMC, one of two
w

data types (LADDER or ALL) can be specified. LADDER and ALL

have the following meanings:
w

LADDER Sequence program only

ALL Sequence program and language data (C language)

Specify either data type in step 6) of the operation described below:

w

[Operation]
1) Select F3 : [PMC] on the I/O menu screen.
2) Select F2 : [UPLOAD] on the PMC menu screen to display the
source program name.
* 3) Press the System key of the CNC.

* 4) Press the CNC soft keys [PMC], [I/O], [HOST], and [EXEC] in
this order.

211
3. OPERATION B–62884EN/01

5) Press the Enter key.

6) Select either LADDER or ALL with cursor.
7) Uploading is executed. During operation, the indication
“EXECUTING” blinks.
8) When uploading terminates normally, the indication
“NORMAL END” is output.
(3) Comparison
[Operation]
1) Select F3 :[PMC] on the I/O menu screen.

om
2) Select F3 :[COMPAR] (comparison) on the PMC menu screen to
display the source program name.
* 3) Press the System key of the CNC.

* 4) Press the CNC soft keys [PMC], [I/O], [HOST], and [EXEC] in

r.c
this order.
5) Press the Enter key.
6) Comparison is executed. .During operation, the indication
“EXECUTING” blinks.

e
7) When comparison terminates normally, the indication
“NORMAL END” is output.
nt
(4) Termination
[Operation]
1) Select [END].
ce
2) The screen display returns to the main menu screen.

Note
In the operations above, an asterisk prefixed to a circled
nc

number represents an operation on the CNC.

.c

3.5.6.3 A object file compiled in a personal computer can be converted to a

Memory Card Interface in memory card format file, and output to a memory card via a memory card
interface installed in the personal computer. The PMC program on the
the Personal Computer
w

memory card can be sent to the RAM of the CNC by inserting the memory
and Memory Card card in the memory card interface in the CNC. By reversing the
procedure, programs can be transferred from the CNC RAM to the
w

memory card.
(1) PMC program transfer from the personal computer to the CNC
w

[Operation]
1) Install a memory card interface in the personal computer.
2) F3 : Select [COMPILE] and compile a source program.
3) Return to the main menu, and select [I/O] (input/output) from it.
4) Select F5 : [M–CARD] (memory card) from the input/output
menu.

212
B–62884EN/01 3. OPERATION

I/O PMC–RB3 [C: ¥FLADDER¥]

F1 KEY : FA WRITER
F2 KEY : PMC WRITER
F3 KEY : PMC
F4 KEY : Handy File
F5 KEY : Memory Card
F6 KEY : BACKUP
F9 KEY : ROM format file
F10 KEY : END

om
1 FAWRT 2 PMCWRT 3 PMC 4 FDCAS 5 M–CARD 6 BACKUP 7 8 9 ROMFIL 10 END

r.c
Fig.3.5.6.3 (a) Input/Output Menu

5) Select [WRITE] (write (programmer → memory card)).

e
I/O (MEMORY CARD) PMC–RC3 [C: ¥FLADDER¥]

nt F1 KEY : WRITE (PROGRAMMER → Memory Card)

F2 KEY : READ (PROGRAMMER ← Memory Card)

ce
F10 KEY : END
nc

1 WRITE 2 READ 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 END

.c

Fig.3.5.6.3 (b) Memory Card Input/Output Screen

w

6) Convert the file from source program to memory card format.

Specify the following items for execution.
D Name of the source program
w

Display the source program name.

D Name of the memory card file
Specify the name of a memory card file (accessible via a
w

memory card interface in the CNC) to be created by

conversion, and the drive where the memory card is inserted.

213
3. OPERATION B–62884EN/01

I/O (TO MCARD) PMC–RC3 <0>[C: ¥FLADDER¥]

WRITE (Programmer → Memory card)

Source program name : C:¥DATA¥SAMPLE

Memory Card FILE NAME : D:¥SAMPLE.#BF

(Specify the MEMORY CARD drive)

om
1 EXEC 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 END

r.c
Fig.3.5.6.3 (c) Input/Output (to MCARD) Screen

The following operations are performed on the CNC side.

7) The following two methods can be used to insert the memory card

e
output in step 6) into the memory card interface in the CNC and
read programs on the memory card.
nt D Using the I/O function of the PMC
Specify M–CARD, READ, and the desired filename or file
number at DEVICE, FUNCTION, and FILE NO. on the
PMC I/O screen, respectively, then press soft key [EXEC].
ce
Sequence programs are read from the memory card file
created in step 5).
PMC I/O screen
nc

PMC I/O PROGRAM MONIT STOP

CHANNEL = 1
DEVICE = M–CARD
.c

FUNCTION = READ
DATA KIND = LADDER
FILE NO. =
w

( #NAME )
w
w

EXEC CANCEL WRITE READ COMPAR

D Using the BOOT SYSTEM at power–on time

Each CNC can read the sequence program from the memory
card by using the BOOT SYSTEM at power–on time.
Refer to manual of each CNC for the operation.

214
B–62884EN/01 3. OPERATION

(2) PMC program transfer from the CNC to the personal computer
PMC programs are written to a memory card, using a memory card
interface in the CNC. When the memory card is inserted in a memory
card interface in the personal computer, the PMC programs on the
memory card can be accessed as ordinary DOS files.
[Operation]
1) Specify M–CARD, WRITE, DATA KIND, and the desired
filename (omissible) at DEVICE, FUNCTION, LADDER, and
FILE NO. on the PMC I/O screen, respectively, then press soft
key [EXEC]. Sequence programs are output to the memory.

om
PMC I/O screen

PMC I/O PROGRAM MONIT STOP

CHANNEL = 1
DEVICE = M–CARD

r.c
FUNCTION = WRITE
DATA KIND = LADDER
FILE NO. =
( #NAME )

e
nt EXEC CANCEL WRITE READ COMPAR
ce
The following operations are performed on the personal
computer side.
2) Install a memory card interface in the personal computer.
nc

3) Select [I/O] (input/output) from the main menu.

4) Select F5 : [M–CARD] (memory card) from the input/output
menu. (See Fig. 3.5.6.3 (a).)
5) Select [READ] (read (programmer ← memory card)). (See Fig.
.c

3.5.6.3 (b).)
6) Convert the PMC programs output to a memory card in step 1)
from memory card format to source program format by
w

specifying the following items and running the utility.

D Name of the memory card file
Specify the name of the conversion source memory card file
w

written to the memory card, and the memory card drive in

which the memory card is inserted.
D Name of the source program
w

Display the source program name.

215
3. OPERATION B–62884EN/01

I/O (FROM MCARD) PMC–RC3 <0>[C: ¥FLADDER¥]

READ (Programmer ← Memory card)

Memory Card FILE NAME : D:¥SAMPLE.#BF

(Specify the MEMORY CARD drive)

Source program name : C:¥DATA¥SAMPLE

om
1 EXEC 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 END

r.c
Fig.3.5.6.3 (d) Input/Output (from MCARD) Screen

7) Discompile the object file after conversion, and the resultant file
will become able to be edited on the personal computer.

e
3.5.6.4 If a object file compiled on a personal computer is converted to Handy
nt
Handy File+3.5” Floppy File format and output to a 3.5” floppy disk (DOS format), the PMC
program can be read into the RAM of the CNC via a Handy File interface
Disk (MS–DOS Format)
connected to the CNC. This operation can be reversed.
ce
(1) PMC program transfer from the personal computer to the CNC
[Operation]
1) Compile a source program.
2) Select [I/O] (input/output) from the main menu.
nc

3) Select F4 : [FDCAS] (Handy File) from the input/output menu.

(See Fig. 3.5.6.4 (a).)
4) Select [WRITE] (WRITE (Programmer → Handy File)).
.c

I/O (FDCAS) PMC–RB3 [C: ¥FLADDER¥]

w

F1 KEY : WRITE(Programmer → Handy File)

F2 KEY : READ (Programmer ← Handy File)

w

F10 KEY : END

w

1 WRITE 2 READ 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 END

Fig.3.5.6.4 (a) FDCAS Input/Output Screen

216
B–62884EN/01 3. OPERATION

5) Convert the source program to Handy File format by specifying

the following items and running the utility.
D Name of the source program
Display the source program.
D Name of the Handy File format file
Specify the name to be assigned to the Handy File format file
(accessible by the Handy File) to be generated by conversion,
and the 3.5” disk drive to which the file is output; 5” floppy
disk cannot be used.

I/O (TO FDCAS) PMC–RC3 <0>[C: ¥FLADDER¥]

om
WRITE (Programmer → Handy File)

Source program name : C:¥DATA¥SAMPLE

Handy File File name : D:¥SAMPLE.#SF

(Specify the floppy disk drive)

e r.c
nt 1 EXEC 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Fig.3.5.6.4 (b) Input/Output (to FDCAS) Screen

10 END
ce
The following operations are performed on the CNC side.
6) Connect the CNC and Handy File, and insert the 3.5” floppy disk
generated in step 4) into the Handy File.
nc

(2) PMC program transfer from the CNC to the personal computer
[Operation]
1) Connect the CNC and Handy File, and output the PMC program
to a 3.5” floppy disk (DOS format).
.c

The following operations are performed on the personal

computer side.
2) Select [I/O] (input/output) from the main unit.
w

3) Select F4 : [FDCAS] (Handy File) from the input/output menu.

4) Select [READ] (READ (Programmer ← Handy File)). (See Fig.
3.5.6.4 (a).)
w

5) Convert the PMC program on a 3.5” floppy disk (Handy File

format) generated in step 1) to source program by specifying the
following items and running the utility.
w

D Name of the Handy File format file

Specify the program name output in step 1), and the 3.5”
floppy disk drive where the floppy disk is inserted.
D Name of the source program
Display the source program.

217
3. OPERATION B–62884EN/01

I/O (FROM FDCAS) PMC–RC3 <0>[C: ¥FLADDER¥]

READ (Programmer ← Handy File)

Handy File File name : D:¥SAMPLE.#SF

(Specify the floppy disk drive)

Source program name : C:¥DATA¥SAMPLE

om
1 EXEC 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 END

r.c
Fig.3.5.6.4 (c) Input/Output (from FDCAS) Screen

6) Decompile the source program file after conversion, and the

resultant file will become able to be edited on the personal
computer.

e
3.5.6.5
Backup of User Program
nt
This backup function can back up the source program, which the system
uses, to another source program and can restore the backup source
program.
ce
Please use this function when you back up the source program under
editing or under debugging.

I/O (BACKUP) PMC–RC3 [C: ¥FLADDER¥]

nc

F1 KEY : BACKUP
.c

F2 KEY : RESTORE

F10 KEY : END

w
w
w

1 BACKUF 2 RESTOP 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 END

Fig.3.5.6.5 (a) Backup Menu Screen

(1) Backup
[Operation]
1) Select [BACKUP] from the input/ output menu.
2) Select F1 : [BACKUP] from the backup menu.
3) Enter a backup program name, and press [EXEC].

218
B–62884EN/01 3. OPERATION

I/O (BACKUP) PMC–RB3 <0>[C: ¥FLADDER¥]

BACKUP (SOURCE PROGRAM → BACKUP PROGRAM)

BACKUP PROGRAM NAME :

om
1 EXEC 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 END

r.c
Fig.3.5.6.5 (b) Backup Screen

4) When backup terminates normaly, the “NORMAL END”

message is displayed.
(2) Restoring

e
[Operation]
nt 1) Select [BACKUP] from the input/ output menu.
2) Select F2 : [RESTOR] from the backup menu.
3) Enter a backup program name, and press [EXEC].
ce
I/O (RESIORE) PMC–RB3 <0>[C: ¥FLADDER¥]

RESTORE (SOURCE PROGRAM ← BACKUP PROGRAM)

nc

BACKUP PROGRAM NAME :

.c
w
w

1 EXEC 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 END

Fig.3.5.6.5 (c) Restoring Screen

w

4) When restoring terminates normaly, the “NORMAL END”

message is displayed.

219
3. OPERATION B–62884EN/01

3.5.6.6 It is possible to convert between a ROM format file and a memory card
Converting ROM Format format file. ROM format file conversion function can be used at the
following cases.
File
a.In the case of using ROM format file which is created by FAPT
LADDER.
b.In the case of link processing.
(1) Operation
1) Select [I/O] from the off–line menu. The input/output menu
screen is displayed.

om
2) Select F9:[ROMFIL] from the input/output menu. The
“I/O(ROM format file)” screen (Fig.3.5.6.6(a)) is displayed.
3) Select F1:[WRITE]. The “I/O (MCARD→ROM FILE)” screen
is displayed.
Select F2:[READ]. The “I/O (ROM FILE→MCARD)” screen is
displayed.

r.c
4) Input a ROM format file name and a memory card file name.
5) When press [EXEC], it is possible to convert between a ROM
format file and a memory card file.

e
I/O (ROM format file) PMC–RB3 [C: ¥FLADDER¥]

nt F1 KEY : WRITE (Memory Card → ROM format file)

F2 KEY : READ (Memory Card ← ROM format file)

ce
F10 KEY : END
nc
.c

1 WRITE 2 READ 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10END

Fig.3.5.6.6(a)
w

3.5.7 This function enables the setting of options for each function.
w

Setting Program Specified data is stored for each source program.

Options [Operation]
w

1) Using the or key, position the cursor to the function for

which options are to be set.
2) On the setting screen for each function, select an item by positioning
the cursor with the or key, then change the setting with the

or key.

220
B–62884EN/01 3. OPERATION

Program option set–up

[C: ¥DATA¥SAMPLE ]

Compile
Decompile

om
1 EDIT 2 PRINT 3 COMPIL 4 DECOMP5 I/O 6 SET–UP 7 MNEEDT8 UTILTY 9 ONLINE 10 END

r.c
Fig.3.5.7

3.5.7.1 The user can set the compile function options as described below. These
options, when set, are used as the initial values of the compile options for

e
Compile
the off–line function, or are used for compile processing performed with
the on–line functions.
nt
For details of each option, see Section 3.5.4.
(1) Condense
ce
This option specifies whether condense mode is to be used for
compile processing.
(2) Symbol
This option specifies whether to output symbol or comment data to
nc

an object file.
(3) Net comment
This option specifies whether to output net comment data to an object
file.
.c

(4) Password
This option specifies whether to display the password setting dialog
box at compile time.
w

[NO] : Does not display the dialog box. (Password

setting is disabled.)
[RW&R] : Displays the password (R/W) setting dialog box
w

as well as the password (R) setting dialog box.

[RW] : Displays only the password (R/W) setting dialog
w

box.
[R] : Displays only the password (R) setting dialog
box.

221
3. OPERATION B–62884EN/01

Program option set–up

[C: ¥DATA¥SAMPLE ]

[Compile]

condense : [OFF/ON]
symbol/comment : [NOT USE/USE]
net comment : [NO/POINTERS]
password : [NO/RW&R/RW/R]

om
1 EDIT 2 PRINT 3 COMPIL 4 DECOMP5 I/O 6 SET–UP 7 MNEEDT8 UTILTY 9 ONLINE 10 END

r.c
Fig.3.5.7.1

3.5.7.2 The user can set the decompile function options as described below.
These options, when set, are used as the initial values of the off–line

e
Decompile
function decompile options, or are used for the decompile processing
performed with the on–line functions.
nt
For details of each option, see Section 3.5.5.
(1) Symbol merge
ce
This option specifies whether to merge source program data and
object file symbol/comment data at decompile time.
[NO] : Does not merge symbol and comment data.
[SOURCE] : Gives priority to the source data when
nc

duplicate addresses exist in the source

program and the symbol data of the object
file.
[MEMORY CARD] : Gives priority to the object file data when
.c

duplicate addresses exist in the source

program and the symbol data of the object
file.
w
w
w

222
B–62884EN/01 3. OPERATION

Program option set–up

[C: ¥DATA¥SAMPLE ]

[Decompile]

symbol merge : [NO/SOURCE/MEMORY_CARD]

om
1 EDIT 2 PRINT 3 COMPIL 4 DECOMP5 I/O 6 SET–UP 7 MNEEDT8 UTILTY 9 ONLINE 10
END

r.c
Fig.3.5.7.2

3.5.7.3 When a new program is to be created, the initial value of each option can

e
Modifying Program be modified by means of the procedure described below.
Option Initial Values [Operation]
(OPTION.CNF) nt
1) Using the text editor, open the OPTION.CNF file under the directory
where this system is installed.
2) Find the section corresponding to a model subject to initial value
modification (that is, a line starting with #).
ce
Example: #32;(RA3) for PMC–RA3
#41;(RB4_STEP) for PMC–RB4 (STEP SEQ)

Note
nc

A section having a line beginning with a semicolon (;)

contains legend data. Any attempt to modify such a section
is ignored.
.c

3) Find the subsection corresponding to a function subject to initial

value modification (that is, a line starting with *).
4) Specify a new value for the option whose initial value is to be
w

modified.

Table 3.5.7.3
w

Subsection Option Setting and function

*COMPILE condense 0: Performs compile processing in normal
w

mode.
1: Performs compile processing in
condense mode.
symbol 0: Dose not output symbol/comment data
(Symbol/ to the object file.
comment) 1: Output symbol/comment data to the
object file.
netcmt 0: Dose not output net comment data to the
(Net comment) object file.
1: Output net comment data to the object
file.

223
3. OPERATION B–62884EN/01

Subsection Option Setting and function

password 0: Dose not set a password.
1: Sets a password (R/W) and password
(R).
2: Sets a password (R/W).
3: Sets a password (R).
*DECOMPILE symbol–merge 0: Dose not perform merge processing.
1: Preforms merge processing with priority
given to source program data.
2: Preforms merge processing with priority
given to object file data.

om
Note
Never attempt to modify the values of options that are not
listed in the above table. Otherwise, the system may
malfunction.

r.c
3.5.8

e
Mnemonic Editing

3.5.8.1
Conversion of a Source
nt
A source program is converted to a mnemonic file that can be edited with
any standard text editor.
[Operation]
ce
Program to a Mnemonic
File 1) Select [MNEEDT] (mnemonic editing) from the main menu.
2) The mnemonic menu screen appears (Fig. 3.5.8.1 (a)).
nc

MNEMONIC EDIT PMC–RC4 <0>[C:¥FLADDER¥ ]

[C: ¥FLADDER¥ ]

F1 KEY : SOURCE PROGRAM → MNEMONIC FILE

.c

F2 KEY : MNEMONIC FILE ← SOURCE PROGRAM

F3 KEY : EXECUTE USER BATCH FILE
F10 KEY : END
w
w
w

1 MNECNV 2 SRCCNV 3 BATCH 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 END

Fig.3.5.8.1 (a) Mnemonic Menu Screen

3) Select [MNECNV] (conversion to mnemonic).

4) The mnemonic conversion screen appears (Fig. 3.5.8.1(b)).

224
B–62884EN/01 3. OPERATION

SOURCE → MNEMONIC PMC–RC4 <0>[C:¥FLADDER¥ ]

[C: ¥FLADDER¥ ]

1) SOURCE PROGRAM NAME :

2) MNEMONIC FILE NAME :
3) CONVERT DATA KIND SELECTION :
( 0 : ALL , 4 : LADDER )
( 1 : SYSTEM PARAMETER , 5 : I/O MODULE )
( 2 : TITLE , 6 : MESSAGE )
( 3 : SYMBOL & COMMENT )
4) MODE : FOR _P–G
Selected Options
/ERC FLMNE.ERR /OUT V

om
1 EXEC 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 END

r.c
Fig.3.5.8.1 (b) Mnemonic Conversion Screen

5) Specify the following items:

D Source program name
Display the name of the source program to be converted.

e
The source program that is specified in program selection as
initial menu.
nt D Mnemonic file name
Specify the name of the mnemonic file to which a source
program is converted. Up to 40 characters can be specified.
D Data conversion selection
ce
Specify data files subject to conversion. All data files can be
specified or specific data files can be selected.
D Mode (setting item selection)
Specify setting items. Select items from the table below, using
nc

the and keys.

FOR_P-G P-G output format data is converted.
Converts the text of a Japanese-language message to
code format (Note 2).
.c

Japanese language Comment data, which may include kanji characters, is

comment (Note) converted.
Converts the text of a Japanese-language message to
w

Japanese-language format (Note 2).

FULL_OPTIONS Comment data, which may include kanji characters, is
converted.
w

Data including address symbols and comments, and

function instruction names treated as comments is
converted.
w

Data including all instruction sections, operand sections,

and comment sections is converted.
Converts the text of a Japanese-language message to
Japanese-language format (Note 2).

225
3. OPERATION B–62884EN/01

LABEL/ Data is converted and the jump destination (label) of a

SUB-PROGRAM function instruction (JMPB, JMPC, CALL, SP, or another
instruction) used in a sub-program is highlighted. The
step number of the converted mnemonic data does not
agree with other setting. (The function instruction
section used in the sub-program does not agree with the
other setting.)
Converts the text of a Japanese-language message to
Japanese-language format (Note 2).

Notes

om
1 The item specifying Japanese language comment
conversion cannot be selected on an English mode system.
2 Format displayed on the code or Japanese-language input
mode screen during message editing.

r.c
6) Select [EXEC] upon completion of item specification.
7) Source program is converted to a mnemonic file.
8) An error message is displayed if Enter is pressed after conversion.

e
The mnemonic conversion screen appears when Space is pressed
after conversion.

3.5.8.2
nt
A mnemonic text file edited in a certain format using a atandard text editor
ce
Conversion of a is converted to a source program.
Mnemonic File to a [Operation]
Source Program 1) Select [MNEEDT] (mnemonic editing) from the main menu.
2) The mnemonic menu screen appears.
nc

3) Select [SRCCNV] (conversion to a source program).

4) The source program conversion screen appears (Fig. 3.5.8.2).

MNEMONIC → SOURCE
.c

PMC–RC4 <0>[C:¥FLADDER¥ ]
[C: ¥FLADDER¥ ]
w

1) MNEMONIC FILE NAME :

2) SOURCE PROGRAM NAME :
w
w

1 EXEC 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 END

Fig.3.5.8.2 Source Program Conversion Screen

226
B–62884EN/01 3. OPERATION

5) Specify the following items:

D Mnemonic file name
Specify the name of a mnemonic file to be converted. Up to 40
characters can be specified.
D Source program name
Display the name of the source program to which a mnemonic
file is to be converted.
6) Select [EXEC] upon completion of item specification.
7) Mnemonic file is converted to a source program.
8) An error message is displayed if Enter is pressed after conversion.

om
The source program conversion screen appears when Space is
pressed after conversion.

r.c
3.5.8.3 If a mnemonic file created using a commercially available text editor is
Mnemonic File Format to be converted to a source program, the mnemonic file must be in the
following format.
(1) Identification code

e
The mnemonic file defines data with four different identification
codes that each begin with %.
nt
%@A
%@E
ID code

%@0 to 5
Description
Beginning of ALL-format data
End of ALL-format data
Beginning of unit-format data
ce
% only End of unit-format data

The unit-format data mentioned above varies from one PMC model
to another as listed below.
PMC model
nc

Unit-format data
R series/PA3/QC/NB/NB2
Parameter %@0
Title %@1
Symbol & comment %@2 or %@2-C (Note 1)
.c

Ladder %@3
Message %@4
I/O module %@5
w

Note
“%@2”, and “%@2-C” correspond to source format types as
w

follows:
%@2 : FORMAT-A/B
%@2-C: FORMAT-C
w

Ladder Editing Package uses FORMAT-C only. This means that, as part
of conversion to a mnemonic file, conversion to ”%@2-C” type code is
performed. For conversion to a source program, however, both type codes
(“%@2” and “%@2-C”) can be used.
(2) Linefeed code
Control character LF (0AH) is defined as a linefeed code. Control
character CR (0DH) is ignored.

227
3. OPERATION B–62884EN/01

(3) Reserved symbols

1) ; This special character is reserved for use in ladder data.
D A semicolon is used in the ladder data section to separate ladder
data from a comment. Characters that follow a semicolon are
treated as a comment. When a mnemonic file is converted back
to a source program, a semicolon and a comment that follows
it are not generated.
2) : This special character is reserved for use in ladder and I/O
module data.
D A colon is used in the ladder data section to separate a net
number from ladder data. Data that precedes a colon is treated

om
as a net number.
D A colon is also used in the I/O module data section to separate
a channel number from I/O module data. Data that precedes a
colon is treated as a channel number.
(4) Control character

r.c
The dollar character ”$” is used as control character in the mnemonic
file. Every dollar character in the sentence must be described as ”$$”
in the mnemonic file.
(a) Symbol and comment data
1) Description of address and symbol

e
Describe the address data and the symbol strings in a same line.
Describe the address data to top of line and the symbol strings
nt describe after address data with blank character or horizontal
tabulation character as delimitter.
ce
| R0200.0 UNIT–3–POWER

Symbol
Blank character or horizontal tabulation character
nc

Address

2) Description of relay comment and coil comment

Describe the relay comment and coil comment after address
.c

defined in (1).
The first string between two single quotation marks after mark
”$1” is relay comment. And next string between two single
w

quotation marks is coil comment.

w

| $1 ’KEEP POWER ON’ ’KEEP UNIT-3 POWER ON’

Coil comment
w

Blank character or horizontal tabulation character

Relay comment
Blank character or horizontal tabulation character
Mark of comment data
line (only ’$1’)

When relay comment is not used, a part of relay comment must be

described by double single quotation marks.

228
B–62884EN/01 3. OPERATION

| $1 ’’ ’INITIALIZE OF SEQUENCE’

Note
Every single quotation mark in the relay comment and coil
comment string must be described as ”$” + ” ’ ” in the
mnemonic file.

om
(b) Ladder data
1) Description of net comment
The net comment data is specified by ’(*’ and ’*)’ characters.
Characters Means
(* Start of net comment

r.c
*) Terminater of net comment

2) Designation of new page (for ladder diagram printing)

Designation of new page for ladder diagram printing must be
described as ”$P” or ”$p” in the mnemonic file.

e
Characters Means
$P or $p Designation of new page
nt (for ladder diagram printing)
ce
3.5.8.4
Sample Mnemonic Files (a) Parameter
(Single-format) Following example is for PMC-RC4. For other PMCs, see
APPENDIX A FUNCTIONS SPECIFIC TO INDIVIDUAL PMC
nc

MODELS
1) PMC-RC4
.c

%@0↓ 2. Counter data type (Binary or BCD)

2 BCD↓ 3. Whether an operator’s panel is used
3 NO↓ (YES: Used, NO: Not used)
w

4 PMC – RC4↓ 4. PMC model

5 000000 (PMC-RC3/PMC-RC4/PMC-RC4
6 50↓ (STEPSEQ))
7 100↓ 5. Start address of language program link
w

%↓ control statement data

[EOB] (0 or 800000 to 8FFFFF
(hexadecimal))
w

6. Percentage of language program

execution time (1% to 99%)
7. Ladder execution time
(Always 100%)

229
3. OPERATION B–62884EN/01

Note
When specifying YES in Item 3 above (whether an
operator’s panel is used), specify the KEY address, LED
address, KEY image address, and LED image address as
follows:

3 YES X0000 Y0000 R0000 R0010↓

(b) Title (common to all models)

om
%@1↓
01 MACHINE TOOL BUILDER NAME↓
02 MACHINE TOOL NAME↓
03 CNC & PMC NAME↓
04 PMC PROGRAM NO.↓

r.c
05 EDITION NO.↓
06 PROGRAM DRAWING NO.↓
07 DATE OF PROGRAMING↓
08 PROGRAM DESIGNED BY↓
09 ROM WRITTEN BY↓
10 REMARKS↓

e
%↓
[EOB]

nt
(c) Symbols and comments (common to all models)
ce
%@2–C Symbol
R0200.0 UNIT–3–POWER Display of
$1 ’KEEP POWER ON’ ’KEEP UNIT–3 POWER ON’ symbol/comment
Coil Comment
Relay comment
nc

R0200.1 UNIT–2–ACT
$1 ’$’OIWER$$’ ’KEEP UNIT–4 $$POWER$’ ON’
R0300.0 Control code
$1 ’KEEP POWER ON’ ’KEEP UNIT–4 POWER ON’
P0008 OPEN–FRONT
.c

$1 ’OPEN FRONT COVER’

L0100 INITIALIZE
$1 ’’ ’INITIALIZE OF SEQUENCE’

no Relay comment
w

%
[EOB]
w
w

230
B–62884EN/01 3. OPERATION

(d) Ladder (common to all models)

1) FOR_P-G

%@3 ↓
RD X0.4↓
OR Y80.6↓
WRT D300.1↓
SUB 1↓
RD.NOT X3.0↓
SUB 40↓
2↓
8191 ↓

om
D300 ↓
SUB 2↓
%↓
[EOB]

2) FULL_OPTIONS

r.c
%@3↓ Symbol
N00001: SUB 71 ; SP Relay comment
P1 ;(SUBPR1 ) ”SUB PROG. NO.01” ↓

e
; [SUB PROGRAM DATA NO.01]↓
Coil comment
N00002: RD X0.0 ;(XADRS1 ) ”JUMPB LABEL L001”↓
nt SUB

N00003: RD
68
L100

X0.1
; JMPB↓
;(LABEL1 ) ↓
; [LABEL L00001]↓
no Comment
no Relay
comment
;(XADRS2 ) ”JUMPC LABEL L001”↓
ce
SUB 73 ; JMPC↓
L100 ;(LABEL1 ) ↓
; [LABEL L00001]↓
N00004: SUB 69 ; LBL ↓
L100 ;(LABEL1 ) ↓
nc

; [LABEL L00001]↓
N00005: SUB 72 ; SPE ↓
N00006: SUB 71 ; SP ↓
P2 ;(SP1000 ) ”SUB PROGRAM NO.1” ↓
N00007: RD R0.0 ;(RADRS00) ↓
.c

DEC D0 ;(DADRS04) ↓
2↓
WRT D0.0 ↓
w

N00008: SUB 72 ; SPE ↓

N00009: SUB 64 ; END ↓
% ↓
w
w

231
3. OPERATION B–62884EN/01

3) LABEL/SUB-PROGRAM

%@3↓ Address Relay comment

SUBPR1 SP SUBPR1 ;<P1 > ”SUB PROG. NO.01”
; [SUB PROGRAM DATA NO.01]↓
Symbol Coil comment
RD XADRS1 ;<X0.0 > ”JUMPB LABEL L001” ↓
JMPB LABEL1 ;<L100 > ↓
;[LABEL L00001] ↓
RD XADRS2 ;<X0.1 > ”JUMPB LABEL L001” ↓
JMPB LABEL1 ;<L100 > [LABEL L00001]↓
> ↓

om
LABEL1 LBL ;<L100
;[LABEL L00001]↓
SPE ↓
SP1000 SP ;<P2 > ”SUB PROG. NO.1” ↓
RD RADR00 ;<R0.0 > ↓
DEC DADR04 ;<D0 > ↓
2↓

r.c
WRT D0.0 ↓
SPE ↓
END ↓
% ↓

e
(e) Message
nt
%@4↓
A00.0 2100020 ATC DOOR NOT CLOSE↓
ce
A00.1 2100022 SPINDLE SPEED ARRIVAL SIGNAL NOT ON↓
A00.2 2100020 EDTOK KEY SWITCH ON↓
%↓
[EOB]
nc

(f) I/O module

%@5↓
X000 1 0 1 ID64A↓
.c

Y008 1 0 4 OD64B↓
%↓
[EOB]
w
w
w

232
B–62884EN/01 3. OPERATION

3.5.8.5 (a) PMC-RB4

Sample Mnemonic Files
(All-format) %@A ↓
%@0 ↓
2 BINARY↓
3 NO↓
4 PMC–RB4 ↓
% ↓
%@1 ↓

om
01 MACHINE TOOL BUILDER NAME↓

10 REMARKS↓
% ↓
%@2–C ↓
R0.200.0 UNIT–3–POWER↓
$1 ’KEEP POWER ON’ ’KEEP UNIT–3 POWER ON’ ↓

r.c
R0200.1 UNIT–2–ACT↓
$1 ’$’POWER$$’ ’KEEP UNIT–4 $$POWER$’ ON’ ↓
R0300.0 ↓
$1 ’KEEP POWER ON’ ’KEEP UNIT–4 POWER ON’ ↓
P0008 OPEN–FRONT↓

e
$1 ’OPEN FRONT COVER’ ↓
L0100 INITIALIZE↓
$1 ’’ ’INITIALIZE OF SEQUENCE’ ↓
nt
% ↓
%@3 ↓
RD R1001.0↓
OR R120.3 ↓
ce
AND R1000.2 ↓
WRT Y2000.4 ↓
(*
Inscribe the net comment here. Any characters Net
which are input with personal computer can be used. comment
nc

*)
RD R1001.0↓
AND R1000.2 ↓
WRT Y23.4 ↓
form feed position (in Ladder diagram printing)
.c

(* $P *)
RD R101.0 ↓
OR R123.4 ↓
AND R100.2↓
w

WRT Y200.4↓
% ↓
%@4
A00.0 2100020 ACT DOOR NOT CLOSE ↓
w

A00.1 2101022 SPINDLE SPEED ARRIVAL SIGNAL NOT ON ↓

% ↓
%@5 ↓
w

X000 1 0 1 ID16C ↓
Y008 1 0 4 OD32A ↓
% ↓
%@E ↓

233
3. OPERATION B–62884EN/01

3.5.8.6 When using the step sequence method, mnemonic instructions cannot be
The Note if the Step coded.
Sequence Function is The mnemonic conversion functions need following notes:
Selected When Setting a 1) Programming by Mnemonic Instructions
Model A step sequence program cannot be created with mnemonic
instructions. It is impossible to create a step sequence program with
a text editor, or to read the program by means of mnemonic-to-source
conversion.
2) Source-to-Mnemonic and Mnemonic-to-Source Conversions

om
If source-to-mnemonic conversion is executed for a step sequence
source program, only ladder subprograms are converted to
mnemonics, step sequence subprograms being ignored. If a step
sequence source program is subjected to source-to-mnemonic
conversion, then to mnemonic-to-source conversion, the original
source program will not be replicated.

r.c
3.5.8.7 The batch file FLMNE.BAT can be executed by suspending the execution
User Batch File of mnemonic editing.
A user’s own batch file generated by editing the contents of the

e
Execution
FLMNE.BAT file with a standard text editor can also be executed.
D Example 1
nt
The execution of mnemonic editing is suspended and text editor VZ is
activated. (In this case, VZ must be defined in the environment variable
PATH beforehand.)
ce
[Operation]
1) Use a standard text editor to create the batch file FLMNE.BAT
as follows:
nc

VZ

2) Select MNEEDT (mnemonic editing) from the main menu.

3) The mnemonic menu screen appears.
.c

4) Select ([BATCH] (user batch file execution).

5) The following message appears:
w

Execute ’FLMNE.BAT’.
Add parameter(s)? [A(Add), N(Not add), S(Stop)]
w

6) Specify A (Add), and specify *.HEX as the parameter. VZ is

activated and a list of files with the extension .HEX is displayed.
7) To restart memu screen of mnemonic, terminate VZ.
w

Hit any key!

8) Press any key. The screen display returns to the mnemonic menu
screen.
D Example 2
The execution of Ladder Editing Package is suspended. Then, the
command processor COMMAND.COM is activated and DOS
commands are enabled. Create FLMNE.BAT as follows:

234
B–62884EN/01 3. OPERATION

COMMAND

3.5.9 Selecting [UTILTY] from the off-line menu enables the use of the utility
Utility functions. The following functions are registered at installation:

UTILITY
F1 Dos

om
F2 floadat
F3 View result
F4 Linker

Fig.3.5.9 (a) Utility Screen

r.c
1) Moving to the DOS command line (starting COMMAND.COM)
F1 : Dos

e
2) Data transfer between the P-G and personal computer
(FLOADAT) (For details, see Section 3.4 in Appendix C.)
nt F2

3) Referencing the results of compile or decompile processing

: floadat
ce
F3 : View result
4) Link function
F4 : Linker
nc

3) detailed below.
The user can register any desired command as a utility. For an explanation
of how to perform this registration, see Section 3.1 of Appendix C.
.c

(1) Referencing the results of compile or decompile processing (starting

FLVIEW.BAT)
Upon the completion of compile or decompile processing, an
execution result file and map file are created. These files are of text
w

format, enabling their reference using a commercially available

editor. By using this function, however, these files can be referenced
even before Ladder Editing Package is terminated.
w

[Operation]
1) Press F3 on the utility screen.
w

2) Then, the pop-up screen shown below appears. These files can
now be referenced by pressing the Enter key.

EXEC FILE NAME

FLVIEW, BAT %P.err

The user can specify the type of files to be referenced, simply by changing
the file name extension (.err: Execution result file/.map: Map file).

235
3. OPERATION B–62884EN/01

3.5.10
Selecting On-Line “ON-LINE FUNCTION” can be selected from the off-line menu. For
Function from Off-Line details, see Section “3.4 On-Line Function”.
Function

om
e r.c
nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w

236
B–62884EN/01 4. ERROR MESSAGE LIST

4 ERROR MESSAGE LIST

This chapter describes the general output messages. Messages are output
and categorized:

function–name : E–xxxx : error–message

om
Error number (four digits)
Category (error, warning, etc.)
Name of the processing which caused the error

r.c
(1) Function name
The processing causing the error is represented by a single
alphabetic character.

e
Funcion name Processing

A Initial menu and option setting

nt B
C
D
Title editing
I/O module editing
System parameter editing
ce
E Ladder diagram/step diagram editing
F Symbol and comment editing
G Message editing
H Printing
I Compilation
nc

J Decompilation
K Mnemonic conversion
L Input/Output
N On–line monitor
.c

(2) Message category

Output messages are classified into the following categories. The
categories are represented by single alphabetic characters.
w

D F: Fatal error. The error number is 2xxx.

The system can be operated, but processing of the user program
cannot be continued because of an error.
w

D E: Error. The error number is 3xxx.

Processing is continued, but the results will be lost. Alternatively,
the processing is stopped.
w

D W: Warning. The error number is 4xxx.

Processing is continued. The results will be retained, but cannot be
guaranteed.

237
4. ERROR MESSAGE LIST B–62884EN/01

4.1 (Program Name Selection, Option Setting, On–Line Execution)

A : INITIAL MENU

4.1.1
Fatal Error

Number Message Contents

A:F–2000 INSUFFICIENT MEMORY.

om
A:F–2001 INSUFFICIENT DISK SPACE.
A:F–2004 THIS DATA CAN NOT BE HANDLED
AT THIS VERSION OF FAPT LAD-
DER.
A:F–2005 SOURCE PROGRAM HAS WRONG The source program contains an invalid file or does not contain nec-
FILE (S). essary files.

r.c
Check the source program files.
A:F–2006 NOT FOUND XXXX FILE.
A:F–2007 NOT FOUND XXXX SOURCE PRO-
GRAM.

e
A:F–2008 CANNOT OPEN XXXX FILE.
A:F–2009 CANNOT CLOSE XXXX FILE.
A:F–2010 XXXX SOURCE PROGRAM BRO-
KEN.
nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w

238
B–62884EN/01 4. ERROR MESSAGE LIST

4.1.2
Error

Number Message Contents

A:E–3120 ENTER PROGRAM NAME. The name of the source program has not been input. Input the source
program name.
A:E–3121 THE SOURCE PROGRAM DOES
NOT EXIST.
A:E–3122 PMC MODEL FILE IS NOT FOUND. The specified source program is not compatible with the system. For

om
details of which machine models are compatible, see Section 1.2.2.
Some system files (xxxx.TBL) cannot be found. Reinstall the system.
A:E–3124 CANNOT CREATE NEW PRO- The specified source program cannot be created because a directory
GRAM XXXX. having the same name already exists. Input another source program
name.

r.c
A:E–3125 ILLEGAL PATH OF SOURCE PRO- The specified path does not exist. Check the input source program
GRAM NAME. name.
A:E–3126 SOURCE PROGRAM TYPE DIF- A FORMAT–A/B program was specified when copying a source pro-
FERENT. gram. FORMAT–A/B cannot be used. Convert the program via a
memory card or mnemonic format file. For details, see Appendix D.

e
A:E–3128 XXXX FILE READ ERROR. File xxxx cannot be read.
A:E–3130 XXXX FILE READ ERROR. HIT ANY File xxxx cannot be read.

A:E–3131
A:E–3132
KEY.
XXXX FILE OPEN ERROR.
XXXX FILE CLOSE ERROR.
nt File xxxx cannot be opened.
File xxxx cannot be closed.
ce
A:E–3133 INSUFFICIENT DISK ERROR. The file cannot be output because there is insufficient free space on
the disk. Terminate the system and delete any unnecessary files in
the disk to create more free space.
A:E–3134 INVALID OPTION INITIALIZED. The option file (OPTION) has been initialized because its data was
(XXXX FILE WAS UPDATED.) destroyed.
nc

A:E–3137 CANNOT CREATE FILE XXXX. File xxxx cannot be created.

A:E–3138 ILLEGAL SOURCE PROGRAM
NAME.
.c

A:E–3139 ILLEGAL XXXX SOURCE PRO-

GRAM NAME.
A:E–3140 NOT FOUND FILE.
w

A:E–3143 CANNOT OPEN FILE. File xxxx cannot be opened.

A:E–3144 CANNOT CLOSE FILE. File xxxx cannot be closed.
A:E–3145 FILE I/O ERROR. An error occurred during file access.
w

A:E–3146 XXXX FILE I/O ERROR.

A:E–3147 UNKNOWN PMC SERIES.
w

A:E–3148 XXXX FILE WRITE ERROR. HIT Data cannot be written to file xxxx.
ANY KEY.

239
4. ERROR MESSAGE LIST B–62884EN/01

4.2
B : TITLE EDITING

4.2.1
Error

Number Message Contents

B:E–3020 FILE READ ERROR. HIT ANY KEY The source program title file (TITLE) cannot be read.

om
B:E–3021 FILE WRITE ERROR. HIT ANY KEY Data cannot be written to the source program title file (TITLE) or con-
trol file (CONTROL).
B:E–3022 FILE I/O ERROR. HIT ANY KEY An error occurred during file access.

e r.c
nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w

240
B–62884EN/01 4. ERROR MESSAGE LIST

4.3
C : I/O MODULE
EDITING

4.3.1
Error

Number Message Contents

om
C:E–3021 FILE READ ERROR. HIT ANY KEY The source program I/O module file (IOMODULE) cannot be read.
C:E–3022 FILE WRITE ERROR. HIT ANY KEY Data cannot be written to the source program I/O module file (IOMO-
DULE) or control file (CONTROL).
C:E–3023 INPUT DATA INVALID Input data is invalid. Press F3 [HELP] to confirm the input procedure.
C:E–3024 APPOINTED GROUP NOT EXIST The specified group does not exist. Press F3 [HELP] to confirm the
input value range.

r.c
C:E–3025 APPOINTED BASE NOT EXIST The specified base does not exist. Press F3 [HELP] to confirm the
input value range.
C:E–3026 APPOINTED SLOT NOT EXIST The specified slot does not exist. Press F3 [HELP] to confirm the input
value range.

e
C:E–3027 APPOINTED ID CODE NOT EXIST The specified module does not exist. Press F3 [HELP] to confirm the
module names that can be specified.
C:E–3028
C:E–3030
INPUT KEY NOT USED
ADDRESS APPOINT ILLEGAL
nt The specified module cannot be used at this address. Check whether
the output module is specified at address X and whether the input
module is specified at address Y.
ce
C:E–3032 THE SAME GROUP,BASE AND The specified group, base, and slot have already been assigned
SLOT ARE ALREADY SPECIFIED. modules.
Specify different group, base, and slot numbers.
C:E–3033 INVALID CHANNEL NO. APPOINT The specified channel does not exist. Press F3 [HELP] to confirm
nc

which channels can be specified.

C:E–3034 INVALID DATA, EXCEPT ’0’, IS SPE- For I/O Unit–B (xxx:power–on/off information), a slot other than slot
CIFIED AT THE SLOT OF XXX AS 0 cannot be specified. Specify slot 0.
I/O UNIT B.
.c

4.3.2
w

Warning

Number Message Contents

w

C:W–4020 THE SAME GROUP,BASE AND The specified group, base, and slot have already been assigned
SLOT ARE ALREADY SPECIFIED. modules. Check whether the same numbers can be assigned for the
group, base, and slot.
w

C:W–4021 INVALID DATA, EXCEPT ’0’, IS SPE- For the I/O Unit–B module, a base other than base 0 cannot be speci-
CIFIED AT THE BASE OF I/O UNIT fied. Specify base 0.
B.
C:W–4022 BOTH I/O UNIT–A AND UNIT–B I/O Unit–A and I/O Unit–B cannot be assigned to the same group.
ARE SPECIFIED IN THE SAME Specify different groups.
GROUP.

241
4. ERROR MESSAGE LIST B–62884EN/01

4.4
D : SYSTEM
PARAMETER
EDITING

4.4.1
Error

om
Number Message Contents
D:E–3020 FILE READ ERROR. HIT ANY KEY The source program system parameter file (SYSPARAM) cannot be
read.
D:E–3021 FILE WRITE ERROR. HIT ANY KEY Data cannot be written to the source program system parameter file
(SYSPARAM) or control file (CONTROL).

r.c
D:E–3022 INVALID VALUE
D:E–3023 INPUT DATA INVALID
D:E–3024 OPERATER PANEL ADDRESS When 1 (YES) is set in
ERROR 6) OPERATOR PANEL (which specifies whether the F0 operator

e
panel is used or not), specify the following address:
7) KEY ADDRESS
8) LED ADDRESS
nt 9) KEY BIT IMAGE ADDRESS
10) LED BIT IMAGE ADDRESS
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w

242
B–62884EN/01 4. ERROR MESSAGE LIST

4.5
E : LADDER/STEP
SEQUENCE EDITING

4.5.1
Fatal Error

om
Number Message Contents
E:F–2100 CANNOT READ ∗ FILE.
E:F–2101 CANNOT WRITE ∗ FILE.
E:F–2102 CANNOT SEEK ∗ FILE.

r.c
4.5.2
Error (at Editing
Ladder Diagram)

e
Number Message Contents
E:E–3100
E:E–3101
E:E–3102
INPUT INVALID
ADDRESS BIT NOTHING
RELAY OR COIL NOTHING
nt
ce
E:E–3103 HORIZONTAL LINE ILLEGAL
E:E–3104 VERTICAL LINE ILLEGAL
E:E–3105 ILLEGAL FUNCTION NO.
nc

E:E–3106 FUNCTION LINE ILLEGAL

E:E–3107 PARAMETER NOTHING
E:E–3108 LADDER ILLEGAL
.c

E:E–3109 ERROR NET FOUND

E:E–3110 RELAY OR COIL FORBIT
E:E–3111 PLEASE COMPLETE NET
w

E:E–3112 ILLEGAL NETS CLEAED

E:E–3113 ADDRESS BIT NOTHING
w

E:E–3114 FUNCTION NOT FOUND

E:E–3115 LADDER BROKEN
E:E–3116 ADDRESS BYTE NOTHING
w

E:E–3117 STACK REGISTER OVER(8BIT)

ERR
E:E–3118 PLEASE KEY IN SUB NO.
E:E–3119 PLEASE KEY IN FUN NO.
E:E–3120 SYMBOL/COMMENT DATA TOO
LARGE
E:E–3121 SAME SYMBOL DATA EXIST
E:E–3122 SOURCE PROGRAM OF DIFFER- A Format–B and C programs were found to exist when renaming a
ENT FILE FORMAT Format–A program.

243
4. ERROR MESSAGE LIST B–62884EN/01

Number Message Contents

E:E–3123 ILLEGAL SUBPROGRAM NAME An invalid subprogram name was input.
E:E–3124 TOO DEEP NESTING OF SUB–
PROGRAM
E:E–3125 SAME SUB–PROGRAM NAME
EXISTS
E:E–3126 THE ZOOM NESTING CONDITION
WILL BE CANCELLED, IF YOU
SELECT TO ZOOM ’∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗’.
E:E–3127 SOURCE PROGRAM OF A Format–B and C programs, having the same name as that specified

om
ANOTHER FORMAT EXISTS for the Copy/Move to file function, was found to exist during Format–A
program editing.
E:E–3128 ILLEGAL SYMBOL A value that cannot be used as a symbol was input during symbol
editing.
E:E–3129 PROGRAM OPEN ERROR
E:E–3130 PROGRAM NOT EXIST

r.c
E:E–3131 NOT EXIST APPOINT DATA SIZE
E:E–3132 PROGRAM NOT READ
E:E–3133 PROGRAM NOT WRITE

e
E:E–3134 DIRECTORY NOT EXIST
E:E–3135 LADDER DATA NOT EXIST
E:E–3136
E:E–3137
E:E–3138
PROGRAM IS OPENED
PROGRAM NAMES LIMIT OVER
CAN NOT RENAME LATMP
nt An attempt was made to perform renaming after editing LATMP with
ce
the File function.
E:E–3139 PROGRAM NOT EXIST
nc

4.5.3
Error (at Editing Step
Sequence)
.c

Number Message Contents

E:E–3200 ILLEGAL SOURCE CODE. A read error occurred when reading the specified intermediate code
w

file.
E:E–3201 BUFFER SIZE OVER. An intermediate code exceeds the Edit buffer size.
E:E–3202 NUMBER OF NEST BRANCH TOO The maximum allowable number of branch nests has been
w

BIG. exceeded.
E:E–3203 NUMBER OF BRANCH TOO BIG. The maximum allowable number of branches has been exceeded.
w

E:E–3204 SIZE OF TABLE BUFFER TOO BIG. The maximum allowable number of element tables has been
exceeded.
E:E–3205 UNCONNECTED STEP The step, transition, branch, or line is not continuous.
SEQUENCE DIAGRAM.
E:E–3206 SELECTED BRANCH ERROR. The start side of the select branch does not agree with its end side.
E:E–3207 PARALLEL BRANCH ERROR. The start side of the parallel branch does not agree with its end side.
E:E–3208 SYNTAX ERROR. The sequence in the select branch is other than ”transition to step to
transition.” Or, the sequence in the parallel branch is other than ”step
to transition to step.”

244
B–62884EN/01 4. ERROR MESSAGE LIST

Number Message Contents

E:E–3209 STEP LINE SYNTAX ERROR. The step line contains an element other than initial step, step, block
step, jump (dummy step), and serial move (vertical line).
E:E–3210 TRANSITION LINE SYNTAX The transition line contains an element other than initial step, step,
ERROR. block step, and jump (dummy step).
E:E–3211 CANNOT INSERT. Insertion is not possible at the specified location. Or, if inserted, the
maximum coordinate value is exceeded.
E:E–3212 CANNOT MAKE DIAGRAM. A soft key that cannot be changed was specified when changing an
element.
E:E–3213 HORIZONTAL LINE ILLEGAL. A horizontal line was specified in place of the closing code of the

om
branch.
E:E–3214 JUMP FORWARD CHECK ERROR. The label pointed to by JUMP does not exist.
E:E–3215 CHECK INCOMPLETE ERROR. The intermediate code cannot be created because it has not been
completely checked.
E:E–3216 CHART SEQUENCE ERROR. The step line is not properly connected to the transition line.

r.c
E:E–3217 CHART START CODE ERROR. The chart start code does not exist (step).
E:E–3218 CHART END CODE ERROR. The chart end code does not exist.
E:E–3219 JUMP CLOSE ERROR. JUMP has not been closed correctly.
E:E–3220 HORIZONTAL LINE DUPLICATE A branch contains two or more left end codes. (Invalid data exists

e
ERROR. before and after the branch code.)
E:E–3221 BRANCH UNCONNECTED ERROR. The branch connection is invalid.
E:E–3222

E:E–3223
BRANCH SEQUENCE ERROR.

CANNOT COPY DIAGRAMS.

nt There is an invalid code before or after the branch start and end
codes.
The copy destination is invalid.
ce
E:E–3224 CANNOT MOVE DIAGRAMS. The move destination is invalid.
E:E–3225 ILLEGAL SPECIFIED POSITION. The specified coordinate value does not exist.
E:E–3226 STRINGS NOT FOUND. The specified character string does not exist.
nc

E:E–3227 STEP NUMBER DUPLICATE The specified step number is already in use. Check which step num-
ERROR. bers are already in use.
E:E–3228 LABEL NUMBER DUPLICATE The specified label is already defined.
ERROR.
E:E–3229 CANNOT DELETE TEMPORARY The temporary file cannot be deleted.
.c

FILE.
E:E–3230 SAME SUB–PROGRAM NAME The same file already exists, but with a different extension.
EXISTS.
w

E:E–3231 INPUT INVALID. Data outside the address range is set.

E:E–3232 EXPECTED ADDRESS. No subprogram number is specified.
w

E:E–3233 TOO DEEP NESTING OF SUB– An attempt was made to perform ZOOM for more than eight layers.
PROGRAM.
E:E–3234 ILLEGAL FILE NAME.
w

E:E–3235 SUB–PROGRAM ALREADY The specified subprogram is a file that is currently being edited.
ENTRIED.
E:E–3236 CANNOT DELETE PROGRAM. The intermediate code file cannot be deleted.
E:E–3237 CANNOT CHANGE DATA. Data cannot be converted because it is invalid.

245
4. ERROR MESSAGE LIST B–62884EN/01

4.5.4
Warning (at Editing
Ladder Diagram)
Number Message
E:W–4100 ILLEGAL OPERATION
E:W–4101 EDIT BUFFER OVER
E:W–4102 70LINE/1NET OVER
E:W–4103 LARGE NET APPEARED

om
E:W–4104 MNEMONIC BUFFER OVER
E:W–4105 SET COUNT OVER
E:W–4106 256STEP/1NET OVER
E:W–4107 THE ZOOM NESTING CONDITION WAS CAN-
CELLED

r.c
E:W–4108 THE ZOOM NESTING CONDITION WILL BE CAN-
CELLED, IF YOU SELECT TO SAVE.
E:W–4109 THE ZOOM NESTING CONDITION WILL BE CAN-
CELLED,IF YOU SELECT TO UPDATE/APPEND.

e
E:W–4110 THE ZOOM NESTING CONDITION WILL BE CAN-
CELLED, IF YOU SELECT TO OVERWRITE.
nt
E:W–4111 MACHINE KIND AND INPUT PROGRAM NOT
CONSISTENCY !
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w

246
B–62884EN/01 4. ERROR MESSAGE LIST

4.6
F : SYMBOL &
COMMENT EDITING

4.6.1
Error
Number Message

om
F:E–3100 INPUT DATA ILLEGAL.
F:E–3101 SYMBOL/COMMENT DATA TOO LARGE
F:E–3102 SAME SYMBOL DATA EXIST
F:E–3103 NO DEFINITION ADDRESS APPOINTED
F:E–3104 NOT FOUND DATA ERROR

r.c
F:E–3105 FILE READ ERROR HIT ANY KEY
F:E–3106 FILE WRITE ERROR HIT ANY KEY
F:E–3107 DATA SAVE ERROR

e
F:E–3108 SAME ADDRESS DATA EXISTS.
F:E–3109 INPUT ADDRESS DATA.
nt
F:E–3110 ILLEGAL SYMBOL.
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w

247
4. ERROR MESSAGE LIST B–62884EN/01

4.7
G : MESSAGE
EDITING

4.7.1
Error
Number Message
G:E–3100 ILLEGAL CHARACTERS ARE SPECIFIED AT ∗.

om
G:E–3101 MESSAGE DATA TOO LARGE.
G:E–3102 THE FOLLOWING DATA OF ∗ WERE DELETED.

e r.c
nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w

248
B–62884EN/01 4. ERROR MESSAGE LIST

4.8
H : PRINTOUT

4.8.1
Fatal Error

Number Message Contents

H:F–2005 SOURCE PROGRAM HAS WRONG
FILE(S). ($)

om
H:F–2008 CANNOT OPEN XXXX FILE.

4.8.2

r.c
Error

Number Message Contents

H:E–3100 INSUFFICIENT MEMORY. An attempt was made to reserve memory, but there was insufficient

e
free space.
H:E–3101 CANNOT OPEN XXXX FILE. File xxxx cannot be opened.
H:E–3102
H:E–3103
H:E–3104
CANNOT READ XXXX FILE.
NOT FOUND XXXX FILE.
NOT EXIST XXXX FILE.
nt File xxxx cannot be read.
File xxxx cannot be found.
File xxxx does not exist.
ce
H:E–3105 DATA INVALID XXXX FILE. The format of file xxxx is invalid.
H:E–3106 CANNOT WRITE XXXX FILE. Data cannot be written to the file xxxx.
H:E–3107 OUTPUT FILE NOT DEFINED. An error occurred upon opening the output file.
nc

H:E–3108 WRITE ERROR OUTPUT FILE. An error occurred upon writing to the output file.
H:E–3109 INSUFFICIENT DISK SPACE NEED There is insufficient free space on the disk. Reserve xxxx bytes of
XXXX BYTE FREE free space.
H:E–3110 INSUFFICIENT CURRENT & TMP There is insufficient free space on the disk to perform cross–refer-
DISK SPACE NEED XXXX BYTE ence. Reserve xxxx bytes of free space.
.c

FREE
H:E–3111 STEP NUMBER (XXXX) OVER. The maximum allowable number of steps for the ladder diagram has
been exceeded. The maximum number of steps that can be printed
w

is 32767.
H:E–3112 SYMBOL & COMMENT FILE READ An error occurred upon reading symbol data.
ERROR.
w

H:E–3113 NET COMMENT FILE READ An error occurred upon reading a net comment.
ERROR.
H:E–3114 SYMBOL & COMMENT DATA BRO- The symbol data is invalid.
w

KEN.

249
4. ERROR MESSAGE LIST B–62884EN/01

4.8.3
Warning

Number Message Contents

H:W–4100 CANCEL PRINTER OUTPUT. The <BREAK> key was pressed before the completion of printing.
H:W–4101 CANCEL FILE OUTPUT. The <BREAK> key was pressed during file output.
H:W–4102 SEL SWITCH OFF The SEL indicator on the printer is not lit. Press the SEL button such
that the indicator lights.

om
e r.c
nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w

250
B–62884EN/01 4. ERROR MESSAGE LIST

4.9
I : COMPILE

4.9.1
Fatal Error

Number Message Contents

I:F–2100 NOT ENOUGH DISK SPACE

om
I:F–2101 OUT OF MEMORY

4.9.2
Error

r.c
Number Message Contents
I:E–3100 XXXX READ ERROR The source program cannot be read. (This error normally does not
occur during compilation.)

e
I:E–3101 XXXX WRITE ERROR The compilation results cannot be written.
I:E–3102 XXXX SOURCE PROGRAM NAME An invalid source program name is specified. (This error normally

I:E–3103

I:E–3105
ILLEGAL.
XXXX SOURCE PROGRAM NOT
FOUND.
XXXX SOURCE PROGRAM FOR-
nt does not occur during compilation.)
Source program xxxx does not exist. (This error normally does not
occur during compilation.)
The source program format is FORMAT–A. (This error normally does
ce
MAT IS DIFFERENT. not occur during compilation.)
I:E–3107 SYSTEM PARAMETER READ The source file for the system parameter data does not exist.
ERROR.
I:E–3108 TITLE READ ERROR. The source file for the title data does not exist.
nc

I:E–3109 I/O MODULE READ ERROR. The source file for the I/O module data does not exist.
I:E–3110 VERIFICATION ERROR The input password differs from the registered password.
I:E–3111 THIS WORD CAN NOT BE USED Input the password correctly.
AS PASSWORD. TRY ANOTHER
.c

WORD
I:E–3112 ONLY ALPHABETICAL AND The input password contains a non–alphanumeric character.
NUMERICAL CHARACTERS ARE
ALLOWED
w

I:E–3200 THERE IS AN UNDEFINED An instruction that cannot be run by the specified program exists.
INSTRUCTION.
I:E–3201 THERE IS NO COIL IN THE FUNC- A functional instruction is lacking a required coil.
w

TIONAL INSTRUCTION WHICH

NEEDS THE COIL.
I:E–3220 SPECIFIED VALUE FOR A PARAM- An out–of–range value is specified in a parameter of instruction xxxx.
w

ETER OF THE XXXX INSTRUC-

TION IS OUTSIDE THE RANGE.
I:E–3221 PROGRAM NUMBER IS DIFFER- The parameter of the subprogram start instruction (SP) contains a
ENT FROM PROGRAM NAME. program number that does not correspond to the program name.
I:E–3222 AN ILLEGAL PROGRAM NUMBER An out–of–range program number or an address other than a pro-
IS SPECIFIED FOR THE XXXX gram number is specified in a parameter of instruction xxxx.
INSTRUCTION.
I:E–3223 AN ILLEGAL LABEL NUMBER IS An out–of–range label number or an address other than a label num-
SPECIFED FOR THE XXXX ber is specified in a parameter of instruction xxxx.
INSTRUCTION.
I:E–3250 THERE IS NO LADDER PROGRAM. The ladder program is empty. Specify the END1 or END2 instruction.

251
4. ERROR MESSAGE LIST B–62884EN/01

Number Message Contents

I:E–3251 THE SIZE OF LADDER PROGRAM The size of the ladder program exceeds the maximum size specified
IS TOO LARGE. for the selected program type.
I:E–3252 LADDER PROGRAM IS BROKEN. An unrecognizable instruction exists.
I:E–3253 LADDER EXECUTION TIME AT Because the first level of the main program takes too long to execute,
THE 1ST LEVEL IS TOO LARGE. the ladder cannot be executed. Make the first level smaller, or
increase the ratio of the ladder execution time in the system parame-
ter.
I:E–3254 THE NUMBER OF DIVISION OF Because the number of second level divisions in the main program
LADDER EXCEEDS 99. exceeds the maximum of 99, the ladder cannot be executed. Make
the second level smaller, or increase the ratio of the ladder execution

om
time in the system parameter.
I:E–3270 SP INSTRUCTION CAN NOT BE SP is the start instruction for a subprogram. It cannot be used in the
USED IN THE MAIN PROGRAM. main program.
I:E–3271 SPE INSTRUCTION CAN NOT BE SPE is the end instruction for a subprogram. It cannot be used in the
USED IN THE MAIN PROGRAM. main program.
I:E–3272 JMPC INSTRUCTION CAN NOT BE The JMPC instruction performs a jump from a subprogram to the

r.c
USED IN THE MAIN PROGRAM. second level of the main program. It cannot be used in the main pro-
gram.
I:E–3273 CALL INSTRUCTION CAN NOT BE The CALL instruction cannot be used because a subprogram cannot
USED EXCLUDING THE 2ND be called from other than the second level of the main program.
LEVEL MAIN PROGRAM.

e
I:E–3274 CALLU INSTRUCTION CAN NOT The CALLU instruction cannot be used because a subprogram can-
BE USED EXCLUDING THE 2ND not be called from other than the second level of the main program.
LEVEL MAIN PROGRAM.
I:E–3290

I:E–3291
nt
THERE IS NO SP INSTRUCTION AT
THE TOP OF THE SUBPROGRAM.
THERE IS NO SPE INSTRUCTION
A subprogram must start with the SP instruction to indicate the start
of the subprogram.
A subprogram must end with the SPE instruction to indicate the end
ce
AT THE BOTTOM OF THE SUB- of the subprogram.
PROGRAM.
I:E–3292 LADDER PROGRAM EXISTS No instructions can be placed after the SPE instruction because the
BEYOND SPE INSTRUCTION. SPE instruction indicates the end of a subprogram.
I:E–3293 SP INSTRUCTION IS DETECTED The SP instruction cannot be placed within a subprogram because
nc

IN THE SUBPROGRAM. the SP instruction indicates the start of a subprogram.

I:E–3310 THERE IS NO END1 INSTRUCTION. The END1 instruction is not found at the end of the first level.
I:E–3311 THERE IS NO END2 INSTRUCTION. The END2 instruction is not found at the end of the second level.
I:E–3312 THERE IS NO END3 INSTRUCTION. The END3 instruction is not found at the end of the third level.
.c

I:E–3313 LADDER PROGRAM EXISTS No instructions can be placed after the END1 instruction because the
BEYOND END1 INSTRUCTION. END1 instruction indicates the end of the first level.
I:E–3314 LADDER PROGRAM EXISTS No instructions can be placed after the END2 instruction because the
w

BEYOND END2 INSTRUCTION. END2 instruction indicates the end of the second level.
I:E–3315 LADDER PROGRAM EXISTS No instructions can be placed after the END3 instruction because the
BEYOND END3 INSTRUCTION. END3 instruction indicates the end of the third level.
w

I:E–3316 LADDER PROGRAM EXISTS No instructions can be placed after the END instruction because the
BEYOND END INSTRUCTION. END instruction indicates the end of the entire ladder program.
I:E–3317 END1 INSTRUCTION CAN NOT BE END1 is specified for other than the first level.
w

USED.
I:E–3318 END2 INSTRUCTION CAN NOT BE END2 is specified for other than the second level.
USED.
I:E–3319 END3 INSTRUCTION CAN NOT BE END3 is specified for other than the third level.
USED.
I:E–3320 END INSTRUCTION CAN NOT BE The END instruction is specified for the first level.
USED.
I:E–3330 THERE IS NO COME INSTRUCTION. The COME instruction is not specified when the COM instruction, that
indicates the start of the instruction control range, is specified.

252
B–62884EN/01 4. ERROR MESSAGE LIST

Number Message Contents

I:E–3331 CALL INSTRUCTION CAN NOT BE The CALL instruction cannot be used because a subprogram cannot
USED IN THE RANGE CON- be called from within the COM instruction control range.
TROLED COM INSTRUCTION.
I:E–3332 CALLU INSTRUCTION CAN NOT The CALLU instruction cannot be used because a subprogram can-
BE USED IN THE RANGE CON- not be called from within the COM instruction control range.
TROLED COM INSTRUCTION.
I:E–3333 ANOTHER COM INSTRUCTION The COM instruction, that indicates the start of the instruction control
CAN NOT BE USED IN THE range, is specified twice within the range.
RANGE CONTROLED COM
INSTRUCTION.

om
I:E–3334 COME INSTRUCTION MUST BE The COME instruction, that indicates the end of the instruction control
THE PAIR WITH COM. range, is specified when the COM instruction, used to indicate the
start of the range, is not specified.
I:E–3335 COME INSTRUCTION IS The COME instruction is specified to indicate the end of the instruc-
DETECTED THOUGH THE CASE tion control range when the end of the range has already been
OF THE COIL NUMBER SPECIFI- defined as a number of coils.
CATION.

r.c
I:E–3340 THERE IS NO JMPE INSTRUCTION. The JMP instruction is specified to indicate the start of the jump block,
but the JMPE instruction, that indicates the end of the block, is not
specified.
I:E–3341 ANOTHER JMP INSTRUCTION Another JMP instruction is specified to indicate the start of a jump
CAN NOT BE USED IN THE block before the JMPE instruction is specified to indicate the end of

e
RANGE OF JMP INSTRUCTION. the first block.
I:E–3342 JMPE INSTRUCTION MUST BE A JMPE instruction that indicates the end of a jump block is specified

I:E–3343
THE PAIR WITH JMP. nt
JMPE INSTRUCTION IS DETECTED
THOUGH THE CASE OF THE COIL
when no JMP instruction, that indicates the start of a block, is speci-
fied.
A JMPE instruction is specified to indicate the end of a jump block
when the end of the block has already been defined as a number of
ce
NUMBER SPECIFICATION. coils.
I:E–3350 THERE IS NO LABEL OF XXXX. The JMPB instruction does not contain label xxxx that indicates the
jump destination.
I:E–3351 THE LABEL OF XXXX IS USED Two or more identical label numbers are found when defining jump
TWICE OR MORE. destinations with the LBL instruction. Specify unique label numbers.
nc

I:E–3352 TOO MANY LABELS. The number of jump destinations defined with the LBL instruction
exceeds the maximum allowable number that can be specified for the
selected program type. Decrease the number of defined jump des-
tinations.
.c

I:E–3353 THE DESTINATION OF JMPB The JMPB instruction cannot be used to jump from a point inside to
INSTRUCTION IS BEYOND COM/ a point outside the COM instruction control range, or vice versa.
COME INSTRUCTION. JMPB operations can be performed only entirely within the range or
entirely outside the range.
w

I:E–3400 THERE IS AN UNDEFINED The step sequence program contains a failed instruction or an
INSTRUCTION. instruction that cannot be used with the selected program type.
I:E–3420 PROGRAM NUMBER IS DIFFER- The parameter of the program start instruction (SP) contains a pro-
w

ENT FROM PROGRAM NAME. gram number that does not correspond to the program name.
I:E–3421 AN ILLEGAL STEP NUMBER IS Instruction xxxx contains an out–of–range step number or an address
SPECIFIED FOR THE XXXX other than a step number.
INSTRUCTION.
w

I:E–3422 AN ILLEGAL PROGRAM NUMBER Instruction xxxx contains an out–of–range program number or an
IS SPECIFIED FOR THE XXXX address other than a program number.
INSTRUCTION.
I:E–3423 AN ILLEGAL LABEL NUMBER IS Instruction xxxx contains an out–of–range label number or an
SPECIFED FOR THE XXXX address other than a label number.
INSTRUCTION.
I:E–3440 THERE IS NO SP INSTRUCTION A subprogram must start with the SP instruction to indicate the start
AT THE TOP OF THE SUBPRO- of the subprogram.
GRAM.

253
4. ERROR MESSAGE LIST B–62884EN/01

Number Message Contents

I:E–3441 THERE IS NO SPE INSTRUCTION A subprogram must end with the SPE instruction to indicate the end
AT THE BOTTOM OF THE SUB- of the subprogram.
PROGRAM.
I:E–3442 STEP SEQUENCE PROGRAM No other instructions can be placed after the SPE instruction because
EXISTS BEYOND SPE INSTRUC- the SPE instruction indicates the end of a subprogram.
TION.
I:E–3443 SP INSTRUCTION IS DETECTED The SP instruction cannot be placed within a subprogram because the
IN THE SUBPROGRAM. SP instruction indicates the start of a subprogram.
I:E–3460 THE LABEL OF XXXX IS Two or more defined jump destinations have identical label numbers.
ASSIGNED FOR TWO OR MORE Define a unique label number for each jump destination.

om
STEP PROGRAMS.
I:E–3461 TOO MANY LABELS. The number of defined jump destinations exceeds the number
allowed for step sequence editing. Reduce the number of jump des-
tination definitions.
I:E–3462 DSTEP INSTRUCTION WITHOUT There is no label corresponding to the specified DSTEP instruction.
DLBL.

r.c
I:E–3480 THE STEP NUMBER OF XXXX IS Two or more steps have identical step numbers. Define a unique step
ASSIGNED FOR TWO OR MORE number for each step.
STEP PROGRAMS.
I:E–3570 THE SIZE OF THE MESSAGE DATA The amount of message data exceeds the maximum number of char-
IS TOO LARGE. acters that can be specified for the selected program type. Reduce

e
the total number of characters.
I:E–3600 DATA TOO LARGE. The combined size of the ladder program and the step sequence pro-
(LADDER + STEP SEQUENCE) gram exceeds the maximum allowable size specified for the selected

I:E–3601 DATA TOO LARGE.

(MESSAGE + SYMBOL + COM-
nt program type. Reduce the size of the ladder or step sequence pro-
gram.
The combined size of the message, symbol, comment, ladder, and
step sequence data exceeds the maximum allowable size specified
ce
MENT + LADDER + STEP for the selected program type. Reduce the size of any of these data
SEQUENCE) types.
I:E–3620 THERE IS NO SUBPROGRAM The selected program does not contain any subprogram file numbered
XXXX. xxxx. Create a subprogram file having this number.
nc

I:E–3640 LADDER/STEP SEQUENCE PRO- The END instruction is placed at the end of the second level when it
GRAM EXISTS BEYOND END is followed by a subprogram. Or, the END instruction is placed at the
INSTRUCTION. end of a subprogram when there is a subsequent subprogram having
a higher program number.
I:E–3650 THERE IS NO LABEL OF XXXX. There is no label corresponding to the specified JMPC instruction.
.c

I:E–3651 THE LABEL OF XXXX IS USED In the main program, two or more LBL instruction jump destinations
TWICE OR MORE. have identical label numbers. Define a unique label number for each
jump destination.
I:E–3652 TOO MANY LABELS. The total number of LBL instruction jump destinations defined in the
w

main program exceeds the maximum allowable number specified for

the selected program type. Reduce the total number of jump destina-
tions defined in the main program.
w

I:E–3653 THE LABEL OF XXXX TO REFER Label xxxx, indicating a jump destination, cannot be placed in other
EXISTS IN ANOTHER LEVEL. than the second level because the JMPC instruction specifies a jump
from a subprogram to the second level of the main program. Define
label xxxx in the second level.
w

I:E–3654 THE LABEL OF XXXX EXISTS IN Label xxxx, indicating the jump destination of the JMPC instruction,
THE RANGE OF THE COM is within the COM instruction control range. Place label xxxx outside
INSTRUCTION. the range.

254
B–62884EN/01 4. ERROR MESSAGE LIST

4.9.3
Warning

Number Message Contents

I:W–4100 THE TITLE DATA WHICH COULD The title data contains kana or kanji characters. These characters are
NOT BE DISPLAY ON THE CNC replaced by spaces.
WAS REPLACE WITH SPACE
CODE.
I:W–4101 ILLEGAL OP.PANEL (PARAMETER). Necessary addresses (key address, LED address, etc.) are not set

om
PROCEED TO COMPILE USING when YES is specified for the system parameter indicating whether
’NO’ the F0 operator panel is to be used. The value of this parameter is
changed to NO during compilation.
I:W–4102 EDITING SUB–PROGRAM HAS There is a subprogram for which editing has not yet been completed.
NOT COMPLETED. Complete the editing of this subprogram.
I:W–4103 MULTIPLE SUB–PROGRAMS WITH Two subprograms have identical numbers (e.g., P1.#LA and

r.c
SAME NUMBER EXIST. P1.#SS). The ladder program is the first to be compiled (P1.#LA in
the above example).
I:W–4104 THE SOURCE–PROGRAM IS FOR- Symbols and comments are always output in FORMAT–B.
MAT–B. THIS PARAMETER IS
IGNORED:SYMBOL/COMMENT

e
I:W–4105 THE SOURCE–PROGRAM IS FOR- The FORMAT–B data does not include a net comment. Specifying
MAT–B. THIS PARAMETER IS this item has no effect.
IGNORED: NET COMMENT
I:W–4200

I:W–4201 LADDER EXECUTION TIME AT

nt
THERE IS NO LADDER PROGRAM. The ladder program is empty. This ladder program is not output to a
memory card file.
The first level of the main program takes too long to execute. Make
ce
THE 1ST LEVEL IS TOO LARGE. the first level smaller, or increase the ratio of the ladder execution time
in the system parameter.
I:W–4202 THE COIL NUMBER SPECIFICA- The end of the COM instruction control range cannot be specified as
TION OF COM INSTRUCTION IS a number of coils. The specified number of coils is ignored, the end
NOT ALLOWED. of the range being identified by the COME instruction.
nc

I:W–4203 THE COIL NUMBER SPECIFICA- The end location of a jump cannot be specified as a number of coils.
TION OF JMP INSTRUCTION IS The specified number of coils is ignored, the end location being identi-
NOT ALLOWED. fied by the JMPE instruction.
I:W–4204 UNUSED NET COMMENT The ladder program contains a pointer to a lost net comment character
.c

POINTER FOUND. string. This pointer is not output to a memory card file.
I:W–4400 THERE IS NO STEP SEQUENCE The step sequence program is empty. This step sequence program
PROGRAM. is not output to a memory card file.
w

I:W–4500 THE SYMBOL DATA WHICH The symbol data contains a special character that cannot be handled
COULD NOT BE DISPLAY ON THE by the CNC. This character is replaced by a space.
CNC WAS REPLACED WITH
SPACE CODE.
w

I:W–4501 THE COMMENT DATA WHICH The comment data contains a special character that cannot be han-
COULD NOT BE DISPLAY ON THE dled by the CNC. This character is replaced by a space.
CNC WAS REPLACED WITH
w

SPACE CODE.
I:W–4502 COMMENT DATA SIZE EXCEEDS More than 65,535 characters have been input as comment data.
64KB. SYMBOL/COMMENT DATA None of the symbol and comment data is output to a memory card file.
IS NOT CONVERTED TO THE
MEMORY CARD FORMAT FILE.
I:W–4570 THE MESSAGE DATA WHICH The message data contains a special character that cannot be han-
COULD NOT BE DISPLAY ON THE dled by the CNC. This character is replaced by a space.
CNC WAS REPLACED WITH
SPACE CODE.
I:W–4600 UNREFERENCED SUBPROGRAM Subprogram xxxx is not called by any program. This program is, how-
XXXX. ever, output to a memory card file.

255
4. ERROR MESSAGE LIST B–62884EN/01

4.10
J : DECOMPILATION

4.10.1
Fatal Error

Number Message Contents

om
J:F–2100 FUNCTION CODE ERROR. The function code specified in the memory card file does not match
DATA:xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx, that defined in the system. The file’s function code appears immedi-
SYSTEM:xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx ately after DATA; the system’s function code after SYSTEM. Install
valid system data.
J:F–2101 PMC SERIES IS DIFFERENT FROM The program specified in memory card file xxxx does not match the
’XXXX’ MEMORY CARD FORMAT selected program type. Select a valid program.
FILE.

r.c
J:F–2102 ’XXXX’ MEMORY CARD FORMAT Specified memory card file xxxx does not exist. Create the file.
FILE NOT FOUND.
J:F–2103 MISMATCHED PASSWORD. The entered password is invalid. Enter the password correctly.
J:F–2104 ’XXXX’ MEMORY CARD FORMAT Memory card file xxxx cannot be read. The file is invalid.

e
FILE READ ERROR.
J:F–2105 ’XXXX’ SOURCE PROGRAM Data cannot be written to source program xxxx.
WRITE ERROR. nt
ce
4.10.2
Error

Number Message Contents

nc

J:E–3100 THERE IS AN UNDEFINED There is a failed instruction or an instruction that cannot be used with
INSTRUCTION. the selected program type.
J:E–3101 THERE IS NO SPE INSTRUCTION There is a subprogram in the selected program that does not end with
AT THE BOTTOM OF THE SUB- the SPE instruction.
.c

PROGRAM.
J:E–3200 THE NUMBER OF SYMBOL DATA The symbol data size in a selected program exceeded the system–de-
IN SOURCE PROGRAM EXCEEDS fined limit before the program was executed. The program thus cannot
THE LIMIT. be executed; reduce the symbol data size.
w

J:E–3300 ID CODE (I/O MODULE) An invalid ID code is specified at address xxxx in the I/O module data.
ERROR.(ADDRESS XXXX) The program cannot be executed; prepare a valid memory card file.
w
w

256
B–62884EN/01 4. ERROR MESSAGE LIST

4.10.3
Warning

Number Message Contents

J:W–4100 THE SIZE OF LADDER PROGRAM The number of steps defined in a subprogram in the ladder program
IS TOO LARGE. exceeded the maximum number that can be specified for the selected
program type. The subprogram is output to the source program.
Make necessary corrections by editing the ladder diagram.
J:W–4101 XXXX UNUSED NET COMMENT xxxx net comment pointers do not correspond to any net comment

om
POINTER FOUND. character string. These net comment pointers are not output to the
source program. Edit the ladder diagram as necessary.
J:W–4102 XXXX UNUSED NET COMMENT xxxx net comment character strings do not correspond to any net
STRINGS FOUND. comment pointer. These net comment character strings are deleted.
Edit the ladder diagram as necessary.
J:W–4103 XXXX DUPLICATED NET COM- xxxx identical net comment pointers have been found. Character

r.c
MENT POINTER FOUND. strings are copied so that the same net comment character strings
have the same net comment pointers.
J:W–4104 THE STEP NUMBER OF XXXX IS Step number xxxx is assigned to two or more different steps. Edit the
USED TWICE OR MORE. step sequence as necessary.
J:W–4200 THE NUMBER OF SYMBOL DATA The total number of data items exceeded the system–defined limit

e
EXCEEDS THE LIMIT. when the symbol data merge operation reached the indicated symbol
(ADDRESS XXXX, SYMBOL XXXX) data (address: xxxx/symbol: xxxx). Data subsequent to this symbol
data is not output to the source program.
J:W–4201
CATED ADDRESS FOUND.
nt
XXXX SYMBOL DATA AT DUPLI- xxxx symbol data items are defined for the same address. Either the
source data or the memory card data becomes valid, depending on
the setting of the symbol merge option.
ce
J:W–4202 SAME SYMBOL EXISTS. The symbol character string defined in the indicated symbol data
(ADDRESS XXXX, SYMBOL XXXX) (address: xxxx/symbol: xxxx) is already defined at another address.
This symbol data is not output to the source program.
J:W–4203 ILLEGAL SYMBOL. The indicated symbol data (address: xxxx/symbol: xxxx) was found
(ADDRESS XXXX, SYMBOL XXXX) to be invalid as a result of the IEC–compliant symbol character string
nc

check. This symbol data is not output to the source program. To out-
put it to the source file, change the setting in the %%%FLSET.CNF
file.
J:W–4204 SYMBOL DATA ADDRESS ILLEGAL. The symbol data containing symbol xxxx contains an invalid address.
(SYMBOL XXXX) This symbol data is not output to the source program.
.c

J:W–4300 ILLEGAL OPERATOR PANEL (SYS- The operator panel specification in the system parameter data is
TEM PARAMETER). PROCEED TO invalid. Processing continues while ignoring the operator panel spec-
DECOMPILE USING ’NO’. ification.
w

J:W–4301 THIS MEMORY CARD FORMAT The R/D extension address cannot be used because the PMC ver-
FILE IS NOT FOR EXPANDED R/D sion of PMC–RC is earlier than 3. Change the PMC version in the sys-
ADDRESS. tem parameter.
w

J:W–4800 ’XXXX’ MEMORY CARD FORMAT The header section of memory card file xxxx is invalid. However, pro-
FILE ILLEGAL. cessing continues.
J:W–4900 ’OPTION’ READ FAILED. The file settings have returned to the defaults.
w

SETTING HAS CHANGED INTO The settings in the OPTION file of the selected program cannot be
DEFAULT. read. Create a valid file or modify the file settings. The option reset
function key may be used.
J:W–4901 ’%%%FLSET.CNF’ READ FAILED. Symbol character check is not performed.
SYMBOL CHARACTERS ARE NOT The settings in the %%%FLSET.CNF file cannot be read. Create a
CHECKED. valid file or modify the file settings. When this check is not made, pro-
cessing may be continued even without making the changes.

257
4. ERROR MESSAGE LIST B–62884EN/01

4.11
K : MNEMONIC
CONVERSION

4.11.1
Fatal Error

om
Number Message Contents
K:F–2000 INSUFFICIENT MEMORY.
K:F–2001 INSUFFICIENT DISK SPACE.
K:F–2006 NOT FOUND ’XXXX’ FILE.
K:F–2007 NOT FOUND ’XXXX’ SOURCE

r.c
PROGRAM.
K:F–2100 FILE I/O ERROR.
K:F–2101 SET–UP FILE BROKEN.
K:F–2102 ILLEGAL OPTION(S).

e
K:F–2103 INSUFFICIENT PARAMETER(S). Required system or functional instruction parameters are not speci-
fied.
K:F–2104

K:F–2105
TOO MANY PARAMETERS. nt
ILLEGAL OPTION–SPECIFIED FILE.
The functional instruction contains more parameters than are
required.
ce
K:F–2106 ILLEGAL IDCODE.
K:F–2107 EXPECTED TERMINATOR.
K:F–2108 PMC SERIES IS DIFFERENT FROM
SOURCE–PROGRAM.
nc

K:F–2109 EXPECTED IDCODE.

K:F–2110 ILLEGAL PARAMETER(S).
K:F–2111 CREATE TEMPORARY FILE(S) IN
CURRENT DIRECTORY.
.c

K:F–2112 NOT SPECIFIED ENVIRONMENTAL

VARIABLE ’TMP’.
K:F–2113 ILLEGAL NAME OF SET–UP FILE.
w

K:F–2114 NOT FOUND SET–UP FILE.

K:F–2115 EXPECTED ’/PC’ OPTION.
w

K:F–2116 ’XXXX’ EXECUTABLE FILE NOT

FOUND.
K:F–2117 INPUT DATA ILLEGAL.
w

258
B–62884EN/01 4. ERROR MESSAGE LIST

4.11.2
Error

Number Message Contents

K:E–3100 ’XXXX’ FILE CANNOT EXECUTE.
K:E–3101 ’XXXX’ SYMBOL & COMMENT
DATA BROKEN.
K:E–3102 CANNOT BE HANDLE DATA TYPE The mnemonic of extended symbol ’%@2–C’ is converted when
’%@2–C’. %%%FLSET.CNF is a FORMAT–A/B file.

om
K:E–3103 CANNOT CONVERT FILES OF THE
PMC SERIES SET UP THE SYS-
TEM.
K:E–3104 CANNOT OVERWRITE EXISTING
DATA.

r.c
K:E–3105 CANNOT SPECIFY BIT ADDRESS A bit address is specified in the byte address parameter of the func-
OF PARAMETER. tional instruction.
K:E–3106 CANNOT SPECIFY BYTE ADDRESS A byte address is specified for the basic instruction.
ON BASIC INSTRUCTION.
K:E–3107 CANNOT SPECIFY OUTPUT MOD- An output module is specified as the input address of the I/O module

e
ULE AT INPUT ADDRESS. data.
K:E–3108 CANNOT SPECIFY INPUT MOD- An input module is specified as the output address of the I/O module

K:E–3109
ULE AT OUTPUT ADDRESS.
CANNOT SPECIFY THE ADDRESS
nt
PROHIBITED USING AS PARAME-
TER.
data.
A parameter prohibited address is specified as the address parame-
ter of the functional instruction.
ce
K:E–3110 CANNOT SPECIFY THE BIT
ADDRESS.
K:E–3111 CANNOT SPECIFY THE BYTE
ADDRESS.
nc

K:E–3112 CANNOT SPECIFY THE INPUT An output prohibited address is specified as the output address
ADDRESS. parameter of the functional instruction.
K:E–3113 CANNOT SPECIFY THE INPUT An output prohibited address is specified for the coil.
ADDRESS WITH COIL.
.c

K:E–3114 CANNOT SPECIFY THE ODD An odd–number prohibited address is specified as an odd–number
ADDRESS. address.
K:E–3117 EXPECTED A MULTIPLE OF 2. The system parameter contains a value that is other than a multiple
w

of 2.
K:E–3118 EXPECTED A MULTIPLE OF 5. The system parameter contains a value that is other than a multiple
of 5.
w

K:E–3119 EXPECTED ADDRESS. The basic instruction has no address.

K:E–3120 EXPECTED FUNCTION NUMBER.
w

K:E–3121 EXPECTED PARAMETER(S). The functional instruction has no parameter.

K:E–3122 IDCODE NOT FOUND IN ’XXXX’.
K:E–3123 ILLEGAL ADDRESS. An invalid address or an address that cannot be specified is specified in
the symbol and comment data, or message data.
K:E–3124 ILLEGAL ADDRESS IN DATA An invalid address is specified in the functional instruction data table.
TABLE.
K:E–3125 ILLEGAL ADDRESS OF PARAME- An invalid address is specified in the functional instruction address
TER. parameter.
K:E–3126 ILLEGAL CHARACTER(S). The system parameter, title data, symbol and comment data, or mes-
sage data contains invalid character data.

259
4. ERROR MESSAGE LIST B–62884EN/01

Number Message Contents

K:E–3127 ILLEGAL SOURCE–PROGRAM
NAME.
K:E–3128 ILLEGAL MNEMONIC FILE NAME.
K:E–3129 ILLEGAL PARAMETER NUMBER. The system parameter contains an invalid data number.
K:E–3130 ILLEGAL TITLE NUMBER. The data number of the data identifier is invalid.
K:E–3131 ILLEGAL VALUE. The system parameter contains an invalid value.
K:E–3132 ILLEGAL VALUE IN BASE DATA. An invalid value is specified in the base data of the I/O module data.
K:E–3133 ILLEGAL VALUE IN GROUP DATA. An invalid value is specified in the group data of the I/O module data.

om
K:E–3134 ILLEGAL VALUE IN SLOT DATA. An invalid value is specified in the slot data of the I/O module data.
K:E–3135 ILLEGAL VALUE OF PARAMETER. An invalid value is specified in the data table of the functional instruc-
tion.
K:E–3136 INCLUDE KANA OR KANJI CHAR-
ACTER(S).

r.c
K:E–3137 INPUT MNEMONIC FILE NAME.
K:E–3138 INPUT SOURCE–PROGRAM
NAME.
K:E–3139 INVALID A NUMBER OF CONVERT

e
DATA.
K:E–3140 INVALID FUNCTION’S NAME. An unsupported functional instruction is specified.
K:E–3141
K:E–3142
K:E–3143
INVALID FUNCTION NUMBER.
INVALID MODULE NAME.
RETURN STATUS FROM SPAWN IS
nt The module name of the I/O module data is invalid.
ce
E2BIG(=7).
K:E–3144 INVALID PMC SERIES OF SPECI-
FIED SOURSE–PROGRAM.
K:E–3145 INVALID QUALIFIER. The system parameter, title data, symbol and comment data, ladder,
nc

or I/O module data is followed by an invalid character.

K:E–3146 LACK OF XXXX FILE.
K:E–3147 MESSAGE DATA TOO LARGE.
K:E–3148 MNEMONIC FILE NOT FOUND.
.c

K:E–3149 NOT ENOUGH PARAMETER(S). Required system or functional instruction parameters are not speci-
fied.
K:E–3150 NOT FOUND BASE DATA. The base data of the I/O module is not found.
w

K:E–3151 NOT FOUND GROUP DATA. The group data of the I/O module is not found.
K:E–3152 NOT FOUND MODULE NAME. The module name of the I/O module is not found.
w

K:E–3153 NOT FOUND SLOT DATA. The slot data of the I/O module is not found.
K:E–3154 NOT FOUND ’XXXX’ PROCESS
INTERFACE FILE.
w

K:E–3155 NOT FOUND ’XXXX’ SOURCE–

PROGRAM MANAGEMENT FILE.
K:E–3156 NOT FOUND ’XXXX’ SUB PRO-
GRAM FILE.
K:E–3157 OUT OF ADDRESS LIMITS. The address of the mnemonic data or I/O module data is specified.
K:E–3158 OUT OF ADDRESS LIMITS IN DATA An out–of–range address is specified in the functional instruction
TABLE. data table.
K:E–3159 OUT OF ADDRESS LIMITS OF An out–of–range address is specified as a message setting address.
ADDRESS.

260
B–62884EN/01 4. ERROR MESSAGE LIST

Number Message Contents

K:E–3160 OUT OF ADDRESS LIMITS OF An out–of–range address is specified in the functional instruction
PARAMETER. parameter.
K:E–3161 OUT OF PARAMETER VALUE. An out–of–range value is specified in the functional instruction
parameter.
K:E–3162 OUT OF VALUE. An out–of–range value is specified in the system parameter.
K:E–3163 OUT OF VALUE IN BASE DATA. An out–of–range value is specified in the base data of the I/O module
data.
K:E–3164 OUT OF VALUE IN DATA TABLE. An out–of–range value is specified in the functional instruction data
table.

om
K:E–3165 OUT OF VALUE IN GROUP DATA. An out–of–range value is specified in the group data of the I/O module
data.
K:E–3166 OUT OF VALUE IN SLOT DATA. An out–of–range value is specified in the slot data of the I/O module
data
K:E–3167 PLEASE SHORTEN FILE NAME.

r.c
K:E–3168 PROCESS ERROR.
K:E–3172 SOURCE–PROGRAM NOT FOUND.
K:E–3173 SPECIFIED CONVERT DATA NOT
FOUND.(XXXX)

e
K:E–3174 SPECIFY THE VALUE(SLOT)
EXCEPT 0 AT I/O UNIT–B ’XXXX’.
K:E–3176
K:E–3177
K:E–3178
SYMBOL DATA COUNT OVER.
SYMBOL DATA NOT FOUND.
SYMBOL OR COMMENT DATA
nt Although comment data exists, there is no symbol data.
Only symbol or comment data was converted to the address.
ce
NOT FOUND.
K:E–3179 THE SAME GROUP,BASE,AND The group, base, and slot data of the I/O module data all have the
SLOT ARE ALREADY SPECIFIED. same number.
K:E–3181 TOO LONG STRINGS. The length of the system parameter, message data, or title data
exceeds the maximum.
nc

K:E–3187 TOO MANY CHARACTERS IN 1 The number of characters entered on a line of the system parameter,
LINE. message data, title data, symbol and comment mnemonic data, mne-
monic data, or I/O module data exceeds the limit.
K:E–3188 TOO MANY PARAMETERS. The functional instruction contains more parameters than are
.c

required.
K:E–3189 TOTAL VALUE OF BASE AND SLOT The sum of the base data and slot data values of the I/O module data
IS OVER. exceeds the maximum.
w

K:E–3190 UNDEFINED INSTRUCTION. The data contains an undefined instruction.

K:E–3191 UNEXPECTED ADDRESS. An address is specified in a location where it is not required.
w

K:E–3192 UNEXPECTED PARAMETER(S). A parameter is specified for an instruction that requires no parame-
ters.
K:E–3193 UNKNOWN DATA NUMBER. A nonexistent data number is specified for a system parameter or
data identifier.
w

K:E–3194 DATA ENTRY ERROR. An attempt to register symbol and comment data failed.
K:E–3195 INCLUDE KANA OR KANJI CHAR- The symbol data contains a double–byte character. Double–byte
ACTER(S) IN SYMBOL DATA. characters cannot be used in symbol data.

261
4. ERROR MESSAGE LIST B–62884EN/01

4.11.3
Warning

Number Message Contents

K:W–4100 COMMENT DATA NOT FOUND. Only symbol data was converted to the address.
K:W–4101 DATA NOT FOUND. The system parameter, title data, symbol and comment data, mes-
sage data, or I/O module data does not exist.
K:W–4102 DELETED KANJI CHARACTERS.

om
K:W–4103 EXPECTED CONTROL CONDITION No control condition is specified for the functional instruction.
(S).
K:W–4104 ILLEGAL CHARACTERS ARE SPE- Invalid character data exists in ’xxxx.’
CIFIED AT ’XXXX’.
K:W–4105 ILLEGAL OP.PANEL(PARAMETER). System parameter ’OP.PANEL’ contains an invalid value; the value is
PROCEED TO DISCOMPILE converted to ”NO.”

r.c
USING ’NO’.
K:W–4106 ILLEGAL SYMBOL. The symbol data is nonstandard (check level–1). (For FORMAT–C
only)
K:W–4107 INCLUDE KANA OR KANJI CHAR- The message data contain a double–byte character.
ACTER(S).

e
K:W–4108 INCLUDE KANA OR KANJI CHAR- Comment data containing a double–byte character was converted
ACTER(S) IN COMMENT DATA. without the double–byte character conversion option (J option).
K:W–4109

K:W–4110
LOGICAL OPERATED WITH
UNUSED REGISTER(S).
nt
LOGICAL PRODUCT REMAINS IN
An operation was performed using a register that is not registered in
the ladder data.
A register exists that has not been output to the ladder data.
ce
REGISTER(S).
K:W–4111 MESSAGE DATA INCLUDE KANA Message data xxxx contains a double–byte or single–byte katakana
OR KANJI CHARACTERS AT character.
’XXXX’.
nc

K:W–4112 NOT ENOUGH CONTROL CONDI- Control conditions required for the functional instruction are not speci-
TION (S). fied.
K:W–4113 NOT FOUND DATA AT XXXX No message is defined for address xxxx.
ADDRESS.
K:W–4114 NOT FOUND PARAMETER NUM-
.c

BERED XXXX.
K:W–4115 NOT FOUND TITLE NUMBERED
XXXX.
w

K:W–4116 NOT FOUND ’XXXX’ PMC–OS FILE.

K:W–4117 NOT USED NET COMMENT
POINTER EXIST. XXXX
w

K:W–4118 OUTPUT UNUSED REGISTER(S).

K:W–4119 OVERWROTE EXISTING DATA.
w

K:W–4120 INVALID QUALIFIER. An invalid character follows the end code ”%” of the system parame-
ter, title data, symbol and comment data, ladder data, message data,
or I/O module data.
K:W–4121 REGISTERS OVERFLOW.
K:W–4122 SOME GARBAGE DATA ARE During conversion to Format–B, data that does not belong to level 1
FOUND AT END OF LADDER to 3, or to any subprogram, is found. This indicates that there is data
DATA. subsequent to the last SPE.
K:W–4123 SPECIFY SAME GROUP,BASE, The group, base, and slot data of the I/O module data all have the
AND SLOT. same number.

262
B–62884EN/01 4. ERROR MESSAGE LIST

Number Message Contents

K:W–4124 SPECIFY SAME NUMBER(GROUP)
AT I/O UNIT–B AS I/O UNIT–A.
K:W–4125 SPECIFY THE VALUE(BASE)
EXCEPT 0 AT I/O UNIT–B.
K:W–4126 THE FOLLOWING DATA OF ’XXXX’
WERE DELETED, BECAUSE OF
EXCEEDING THE LIMIT.
K:W–4127 TOO MANY CONTROL CONDI- The functional instruction is subject to too many control conditions.
TIONS.

om
K:W–4128 UNEXPECTED COIL(S). A coil was specified when not required by the functional instruction.
K:W–4129 UNEXPECTED CONTROL CONDI- A basic instruction was specified in a functional instruction for which
TION(S). no control conditions are required.
K:W–4130 REDEFINITION OF ADDRESS Two or more symbol definitions exist for a single address. When the
DATA. start code of the symbol data is ”%@2,” the symbol definition must not
be specified more than once. The second and subsequent definitions

r.c
are ignored. For information relating to the start code, see Section
3.5.8.3.
K:W–4131 REDEFINITION OF SYMBOL DATA. The same symbol is specified for two or more different addresses.
Symbols other than the first specified symbol are replaced by spaces.
K:W–4132 TOO LONG STRINGS FOR SYM- The character string length of the symbol data exceeds the maximum

e
BOL DATA. (six characters for FORMAT–A and FORMAT–B; 16 characters for
FORMAT–C). The symbol data is replaced by spaces.
K:W–4133

K:W–4134
TOO LONG STRINGS FOR COM-
MENT DATA.
SYMBOL DATA ALREADY EXIST.
nt The comment data length exceeds 30 characters. The comment
data is replaced by spaces.
Two or more different symbols are specified for the same address.
(For FORMAT–C, an identical symbol may be specified in more than
ce
one location.) Symbols other than that specified first are replaced by
spaces.
K:W–4135 RELAY COMMENT DATA ALREADY Two or more different character strings are specified for the same
EXIST. relay comment at the same address. (For FORMAT–C, an identical
character string may be specified in more than one location.) Relay
nc

comments other than that specified first are replaced by spaces.

K:W–4136 COIL COMMENT DATA ALREADY Two or more different character strings are specified for the same coil
EXIST. comment at the same address. (For FORMAT–C, an identical char-
acter string may be specified in more than one location.) Coil com-
ments other than that specified first are replaced by spaces.
.c

K:W–4137 COMMENT TITLE DATA ALREADY Two or more different character strings are specified for the same
EXIST. comment title at the same address. (For FORMAT–C, an identical
character string may be specified in more than one location.) Com-
w

ment titles other than that specified first are deleted.

K:W–4138 TOO LONG STRINGS FOR RELAY The relay comment data length exceeds 16 characters. (For FOR-
COMMENT DATA. MAT–C only) The relay comment data is replaced by spaces.
w

K:W–4139 TOO LONG STRINGS FOR COIL The coil comment data length exceeds 30 characters. (For FOR-
COMMENT DATA. MAT–C only) The coil comment data is replaced by spaces.
K:W–4140 TOO LONG STRINGS FOR COM- The comment title data length exceeds 30 characters. (For FOR-
w

MENT TITLE DATA. MAT–C only) The comment title data is replaced by spaces.

263
4. ERROR MESSAGE LIST B–62884EN/01

4.12
L : INPUT/OUTPUT

4.12.1
Error

Number Message Contents

L:E–3100 NOT EXIST ’XXXX’ FILE. File xxxx does not exist.

om
L:E–3101 ROM ID UNMATCH ERROR The currently set cassette or module does not match the currently
selected machine model.
L:E–3102 FILE OPEN ERROR The specified file cannot be opened.
L:E–3103 FILE READ ERROR The specified file cannot be read.
L:E–3104 FILE WRITE ERROR Data cannot be written to the specified file.

r.c
L:E–3105 FILE CLOSE ERROR The specified file cannot be closed.
L:E–3106 INVALID RECEIVE DATA Data other than an ISO code has been received.
L:E–3107 TIME OUT ERROR No response was received within a specified period after the PC
issued an instruction. Check the destination’s power source, set-
tings, cable connections and parameters (baud rate and stop bit), and

e
whether the contents of CONFIG.SYS are valid.
L:E–3108 ACCESS CANCELED Access has been interrupted.
L:E–3109
L:E–3110
L:E–3120
FILE–ROM UNMATCH ERROR
CONTROL CODE ERROR
FIRST RECORD INFORMATION
nt The file contents do not match the ROM data.
The control code is invalid.
The contents of the first record are invalid.
ce
ERROR
L:E–3121 ROM DATA CAN’T CONDENSE The ROM data cannot be compressed.
ERROR
L:E–3122 PART OF ROM DATA INVALID The ROM file data is invalid.
nc

L:E–3123 ROM FILE > ROM ERROR The ROM file exceeds the size of ROM itself.
L:E–3124 ROM FILE FORMAT ERROR The ROM file format is invalid.
L:E–3125 ROM PARITY ERROR OF APPOINT The ROM parity of the specified file is invalid.
FILE
.c

L:E–3126 ROM COUNT ERROR The ROM count is invalid.

L:E–3150 ROM FILE OPEN ERROR The ROM file cannot be opened.
L:E–3151 WORK FILE OPEN ERROR The work file cannot be opened.
w

L:E–3152 WORK FILE INITIALIZE ERROR The work file cannot be initialized.
L:E–3153 WORK FILE CLOSE ERROR The work file cannot be closed.
w

L:E–3154 S RECORD FORMAT ERROR The S record format is invalid.

L:E–3155 WORK FILE SEEK ERROR A seek operation cannot be performed for the work file.
L:E–3156 WORK FILE WRITE ERROR Data cannot be written to the work file.
w

L:E–3157 ROM FILE WRITE ERROR Data cannot be written to the ROM file.
L:E–3158 WORK FILE READ ERROR The work file cannot be read.
L:E–3159 ROM FILE READ ERROR The ROM file cannot be read.
L:E–3160 ROM FILE FORMAT ERROR The ROM file format is invalid.
L:E–3180 ROM SET ERROR The EROM is mounted improperly.
L:E–3181 DIAGNOSIS ERROR An error was detected during EROM diagnosis.
L:E–3182 EROM OUT LEVEL ERROR The EROM is faulty.
L:E–3183 COMPARE ERROR The EROM data does not match the ROM file contents.

264
B–62884EN/01 4. ERROR MESSAGE LIST

Number Message Contents

L:E–3184 DATA FILE WRITE ERROR Data cannot be written because the EROM is not deleted.
L:E–3185 BLANK CHECK ERROR The EROM is not yet deleted.
L:E–3186 DATA SEND ERROR The number of data items is invalid.
L:E–3187 PARITY ERROR A parity error occurred during data transmission.
L:E–3188 ROM WRITER IS OCCAPIED The writer is in use.
L:E–3189 ROM TYPE ERROR The ROM type is invalid.
L:E–3190 COMPARE ERROR ADDRESS = ,
INPUT DATA = , FILE DATA =

om
L:E–3191 ’FLIO _AT.DAT’ FILE FORMAT The format of the FLIO_AT.DAT file is invalid.
ERROR. HIT ANY KEY.
L:E–3192 MEMORY CARD ERROR An error occurred during memory card format conversion.
L:E–3193 NUMBER ERROR OF INPUT An error occurred during memory card format conversion.
PARAMETER
L:E–3194 NO.3 PARAMETER ERROR The third parameter specified for memory card format conversion is

r.c
invalid.
L:E–3195 INSUFFICIENT MEMORY There is insufficient memory to activate memory card format conver-
sion.
L:E–3196 NO.4 PARAMETER ERROR The fourth parameter specified for memory card format conversion is

e
invalid.
L:E–3197 INVALID PMC TYPE The activated machine is other than a model that can perform
memory card format conversion.
L:E–3198

L:E–3199
INVALID ROM COUNT(OUT OF
CASSETTE SIZE)
INVALID ROM COUNT(OUT OF
nt The ROM count for memory card format conversion is invalid (the
count falls outside the allowable range).
The ROM count for memory card format conversion is invalid (the file
ce
FILE SIZE) size falls outside the allowable range).
L:E–3200 PMC TYPE FILE READ ERROR The machine model setting file cannot be read.
L:E–3201 INITIALIZE ERROR Memory card format conversion cannot be initialized.
L:E–3202 NOT EXIST FILE The memory card format conversion file does not exist.
nc

L:E–3203 FILE READ ERROR The memory card format conversion file cannot be read.
L:E–3204 INSUFFICIENT DISK SPACE There is insufficient free space on the disk to activate memory card
format conversion.
L:E–3205 OUT OF MEMORY There is insufficient memory to activate memory card format conver-
.c

sion.
L:E–3206 NOT MAKE FILE The memory card format conversion file cannot be created.
L:E–3207 NOT OPEN WORK FILE The work file for memory card format conversion cannot be opened.
w

L:E–3208 CONVERT TABLE MAKE ERROR An error occurred upon creating a conversion table for memory card
format conversion.
L:E–3209 PMC TYPE I/O ERROR An I/O error occurred for the machine model setting file.
w

L:E–3210 BREAK PMC TYPE FILE The machine model setting file was destroyed during an I/O opera-
tion.
w

L:E–3211 IMPOSSOBLE PROSESS ERROR The child process cannot be executed.

L:E–3212 ROM FILE TYPE ERROR The ROM file format is invalid.
L:E–3213 FILE SEEK ERROR A seek operation cannot be performed for the specified file.
L:E–3214 FILE READ ERROR The specified file cannot be read.
L:E–3215 FILE OPEN ERROR The specified file cannot be opened.
L:E–3216 NOT EXIST SOURCE CONVERT The source file for which format conversion is to be performed does
FILE not exist.
L:E–3217 INVALID ROM COUNT(OUT OF The ROM count for memory card format conversion is invalid (the
ROM SIZE) ROM size falls outside the allowable range).

265
4. ERROR MESSAGE LIST B–62884EN/01

Number Message Contents

L:E–3218 FILE SIZE GAIN ERROR The file size cannot be obtained.
L:E–3219 FILE SIZE CHANGE ERROR The file size cannot be changed.
L:E–3220 DATA SEEK ERROR A seek operation cannot be performed in the file data section.
L:E–3221 ROM INFORMATION ERROR Data cannot be written to the ROM file data section.
L:E–3222 FILE WRITE ERROR Data cannot be written to the specified file.
L:E–3223 OBJECT FILE I/O ERROR An I/O error occurred in the object file.
L:E–3224 DATA MAX OVER The data exceeds the maximum allowable size.
L:E–3225 DATA SIZE IS LESS THAN ROM Execution cannot be continued because the data size is smaller than

om
SIZE that of the count.
L:E–3226 INVALID DATA SIZE OF MEMORY The size of the memory card data section is invalid.
CARD
L:E–3227 INVALID MEMORY CARD FILE The memory card file is invalid (the identification data is invalid).
L:E–3228 INVALID ROM COUNT IN ROM FILE The ROM count in the ROM file is invalid.

r.c
L:E–3229 ROM PARITY ERROR The parity value in the ROM file is invalid.
L:E–3230 PARAMETER ERROR An invalid parameter exists (memory card format).
(MEMORY CARD TYPE)
L:E–3300 ERROR OF INPUT FILE NAME The name of the source file for which format conversion is to be per-
(1ST FILE NAME) formed is invalid.

e
L:E–3301 ERROR OF INPUT FILE NAME The name of the destination file for source file conversion is invalid.
(2ND FILE NAME)
L:E–3302

L:E–3303
ERROR OF INPUT FILE NAME
(1ST/2ND FILE NAME)
CANNOT EXECUTE CONVERSION
nt The source and destination file names are both invalid.

The child process cannot be executed.

ce
L:E–3304 INVALID PMC NAME The machine model name cannot be determined.
L:E–3306 MEMORY CARD FILE DOES NOT The MCARD format file does not exist.
EXIST
L:E–3320 THE NUMBER OF PARAMERTERS The number of parameters specified in the text file is invalid.
nc

IN FILE ARE WRONG

L:E–3321 ERROR OF FUNCTION NO. The function number is invalid.
L:E–3322 FILE DOES NOT EXIST The file does not exist.
L:E–3323 ERROR OF MEMORY ALLOCATION There is insufficient memory.
.c

L:E–3324 ’LF’ DOES NOT EXIST No line feed code exists.

L:E–3325 CANNOT SEARCH STRING IN The search character string is not found in the text file.
TEXT FILE
w

L:E–3326 ERROR OF PORT SET COUNT The specified number of ports is invalid.
L:E–3328 THERE ARE MORE PARAMETERS The text file contains too many parameters.
IN TEXT FILE IT IS NEEDED
w

L:E–3329 ERROR OF MODE COMMAND The MODE command cannot be executed (the specified argument
(FOR MORE THAN 128BITES) is longer than 128 bites).
L:E–3330 ERROR OF MODE COMMAND The MODE command cannot be executed (the command interpreter
w

(COULD NOT FILD COMMAND is not found).

INTERPRETER)
L:E–3331 ERROR OF MODE COMMAND The MODE command cannot be executed (the command interpreter
(FOR INVALID COMMAND INTER- format is invalid).
PRETER)
L:E–3332 ERROR OF MODE COMMAND The MODE command cannot be executed (there is insufficient
(FOR FEW MEMORIES)” memory).
L:E–3333 INVALID ’PORT NO.’ IN TEXT FILE ’Port No.’ in the text file is invalid.
L:E–3334 INVALID ’BAUD RATE’ IN TEXT FILE ’Baud Rate’ in the text file is invalid.
L:E–3335 INVALID ’PARITY’ IN TEXT FILE ’Parity’ in the text file is invalid.

266
B–62884EN/01 4. ERROR MESSAGE LIST

Number Message Contents

L:E–3336 INVALID ’DATA BITS’ IN TEXT FILE ’Bit Length’ in the text file is invalid.
L:E–3337 INVALID ’STEP BITS’ IN TEXT FILE ’Stop Bit’ in the text file is invalid.
L:E–3338 INVALID ’X PARAMETER’ IN TEXT ’X Parameter’ in the text file is invalid.
FILE
L:E–3339 ERROR OF MODE COMMAND The MODE command cannot be executed.
L:E–3340 PORT INITIALIZE IS COMPLETE The port has been successfully initialized.
END
L:E–3341 TEMPORARY FILE FORMAT The temporary file format is invalid.
ERROR

om
L:E–3342 COULD NOT DELETE TMPORARY The work file cannot be deleted (the pathname is invalid).
FILE(FOR INVALID PASS NAME)
L:E–3343 COULD NOT DELETE TMPORARY The work file cannot be deleted (the specified file is not found).
FILE(FOR COULD NOT FIND FILE)
L:E–3344 UNKNOWN PMC TYPE The specified machine model is an undefined PMC model.

r.c
L:E–3345 PORT INITIALIZE ERROR Port initialization failed.
L:E–3350 PORT ERROR(OVER RUN) A port overrun occurred (detected by the I/O port status check).
L:E–3351 PORT ERROR(PARTY) A parity error occurred (detected by the I/O port status check).
L:E–3352 PORT ERROR(FRAMING) A framing error occurred (detected by the I/O port status check).

e
L:E–3353 PORT ERROR A break interrupt error occurred (detected by the I/O port status
(BREAK INTERRUPT) check).
L:E–3354

L:E–3355
PORT ERROR
(TIME OUT)
PORT ERROR
(DATA OUTPUT)
nt A time out error occurred (detected by the I/O port status check).

A data transmission error occurred (detected by the I/O port status

check).
ce
L:E–3356 TIMER SET/CANCEL ERROR The system timer is invalid. Change the data in the text file
(FLIO_AT.DAT). For details, see the comment section of
FLIO_AT.DAT.
L:E–3400 ILLEGAL XXXX PROGRAM NAME. – Unpermitted character is used in specified program name.
– The program name is over 8 characters.
nc

L:E–3401 SOURCE PROGRAM TYPE IS Format–A/B source program is specified. Specify Format–C source
DIFFERENT. program.
L:E–3402 XXXX FILE I/O ERROR.
L:E–3403 UNKNOWN PMC SERIES. Specified source program’s PMC type is unknown.
.c

L:E–3404 XXXX DIRECTORY DOES NOT Specified directory for backup does not exist.
EXIST.
L:E–3500 NOT EXIST ’XXXX’ FILE. File xxxx does not exist.
w

L:E–3501 INPUT PARAMETER COUNT The number of input parameters is invalid.

ERROR
w

L:E–3502 INPUT PARAMETER MACHINE The machine model label of the input parameter is invalid.
LABEL NAME ERROR
L:E–3503 DATA FILE OPEN ERROR The data file cannot be opened.
w

L:E–3504 DATA FILE READ ERROR The data file cannot be read.
L:E–3505 CONVERT SOURCE FILE OPEN The source file for which format conversion is to be performed cannot
ERROR be opened.
L:E–3506 CONVERT OBJECT FILE OPEN The destination file for source file conversion cannot be opened.
ERROR
L:E–3507 PARAMETER COUNT ERROR IN The number of parameters specified in the data file is invalid.
DATA FILE
L:E–3508 PARAMETER ERROR IN DATA FILE The data file contains an invalid parameter.
L:E–3509 INVALID DATA FILE INFORMATION The contents of the data file are invalid.

267
4. ERROR MESSAGE LIST B–62884EN/01

Number Message Contents

L:E–3510 CONVERT SOURCE FILE READ The source file cannot be read.
ERROR
L:E–3511 MEMORY ALLOCATE ERROR There is insufficient memory to continue processing.
L:E–3512 CONVERT SOURCE FILE FORMAT The ROM file format is invalid.
ERROR
L:E–3513 CONVER OBJECT FILE WRITE Data cannot be written to the destination file.
ERROR
L:E–3514 DATA FILE DOSN’T EXIST The data file does not exist.
L:E–3515 COCNVERT CANCEL Conversion has been canceled.

om
L:E–3516 INSUFFICIENT DISK SPACE There is insufficient free space on the disk to continue processing.
L:E–3600 NOT EXIST ’XXXX’ FILE. File xxxx does not exist.
L:E–3601 INPUT PARAMETER COUNT The number of input parameters is invalid.
ERROR
L:E–3602 INPUT PARAMETER MACHINE The machine model label for the input parameter is invalid.

r.c
LABEL NAME ERROR
L:E–3603 DATA FILE OPEN ERROR The data file cannot be opened.
L:E–3604 DATA FILE READ ERROR The data file cannot be read.
L:E–3605 CONVERT SOURCE FILE OPEN The source file cannot be opened.
ERROR

e
L:E–3606 CONVERT OBJECT FILE OPEN The destination file cannot be opened.
ERROR
L:E–3607

L:E–3608
PARAMETER COUNT ERROR IN
DATA FILE
nt The number of parameters specified in the data file is invalid.

PARAMETER ERROR IN DATA FILE The data file contains an invalid parameter.
ce
L:E–3609 INVALID DATA FILE INFORMATION The contents of the data file are invalid.
L:E–3610 CONVERT SOURCE FILE READ The source file cannot be read.
ERROR
L:E–3611 MEMORY ALLOCATE ERROR There is insufficient memory to continue processing.
nc

L:E–3612 CONVERT SOURCE FILE FORMAT The ROM file format is invalid.
ERROR
L:E–3613 CONVER OBJECT FILE WRITE Data cannot be written to the destination file.
ERROR
L:E–3614 DATA FILE DOSN’T EXIST The data file does not exist.
.c

L:E–3615 COCNVERT CANCEL Conversion has been canceled.

L:E–3516 INSUFFICIENT DISK SPACE There is insufficient free space on the disk to continue processing.
w

L:E–3617 SUM CHECK ERROR OF S The S record check sum is erroneous.

RECORD
L:E–3618 FORMAT ERROR OF S0 RECORD The S0 record format is invalid.
w

L:E–3619 PMC TYPE CODE ERROR The machine model code for the S0 record is invalid.
L:E–3620 DATA CONVERT ERROR A data conversion error occurred.
L:E–3621 FORMAT ERROR OF S RECORD The S record format is invalid.
w

L:E–3622 PMC ADDRESS ERROR The specified PMC address falls outside the allowable range.
L:E–3700 NUMBER ERROR OF INPUT An error occurred during memory card format conversion.
PARAMETER
L:E–3701 NO.3 PARAMETER ERROR The third parameter specified for memory card format conversion is
invalid.
L:E–3702 INSUFFICIENT MEMORY There is insufficient memory to activate memory card format conver-
sion.
L:E–3703 NO.4 PARAMETER ERROR The fourth parameter specified for memory card format conversion is
invalid.

268
B–62884EN/01 4. ERROR MESSAGE LIST

Number Message Contents

L:E–3704 INVALID PMC TYPE The activated machine is other than a model that supports memory
card format conversion.
L:E–3705 INVALID ROM COUNT The ROM count for memory card format conversion is invalid (the
(OUT OF CASSETTE SIZE) count falls outside the allowable range).
L:E–3706 INVALID ROM COUNT The ROM count for memory card format conversion is invalid (the file
(OUT OF FILE SIZE) size falls outside the allowable range).
L:E–3707 PMC TYPE FILE READ ERROR The machine model setting file cannot be read.
L:E–3708 INITIALIZE ERROR Memory card format conversion cannot be initialized.
L:E–3709 NOT EXIST FILE The memory card format conversion file does not exist.

om
L:E–3710 FILE READ ERROR The memory card format conversion file cannot be read.
L:E–3711 INSUFFICIENT DISK SPACE There is insufficient free space on the disk to activate memory card
format conversion.
L:E–3712 OUT OF MEMORY There is insufficient memory to activate memory card format conver-
sion.

r.c
L:E–3713 NOT MAKE FILE The memory card format conversion file cannot be created.
L:E–3714 NOT OPEN WORK FILE The work file for memory card format conversion cannot be opened.
L:E–3715 CONVERT TABLE MAKE ERROR An error occurred upon creating a conversion table for memory card
format conversion.
L:E–3716 PMC TYPE I/O ERROR An I/O error occurred for the machine model setting file.

e
L:E–3717 BROKEN PMC TYPE FILE The machine model setting file was destroyed during an I/O opera-
tion.
L:E–3718
L:E–3719
L:E–3720
IMPOSSIBLE PROSESS ERROR
ROM FILE TYPE ERROR
FILE SEEK ERROR
nt The child process cannot be executed.
The ROM file format is invalid.
A seek operation cannot be performed for the specified file.
ce
L:E–3721 FILE READ ERROR The specified file cannot be read.
L:E–3722 FILE OPEN ERROR The specified file cannot be opened.
L:E–3723 NOT EXIST SOURCE CONVERT The source file for which format conversion is to be performed does
FILE not exist.
nc

L:E–3724 INVALID ROM COUNT The ROM count for memory card format conversion is invalid (the
(OUT OF ROM SIZE) ROM size falls outside the allowable range).
L:E–3725 FILE SIZE GAIN ERROR The file size cannot be determined.
L:E–3726 FILE SIZE CHANGE ERROR The file size cannot be changed.
.c

L:E–3727 DATA SEEK ERROR A seek operation cannot be performed in the file data section.
L:E–3728 ROM INFORMATION ERROR Data cannot be written to the ROM file data section.
L:E–3729 FILE WRITE ERROR Data cannot be written to the specified file.
w

L:E–3730 OBJECT FILE I/O ERROR An I/O error occurred in the object file.
L:E–3731 DATA MAX OVER The amount of data exceeds the allowed maximum.
w

L:E–3732 DATA SIZE IS LESS THAN ROM Execution cannot be continued because the data size is smaller than
SIZE that of the count.
L:E–3733 INVALID DATA SIZE OF MEMORY The size of the memory card data section is invalid.
w

CARD
L:E–3734 INVALID MEMORY CARD FILE The memory card file is invalid (the identification data is invalid).
L:E–3735 INVALID ROM COUNT IN ROM FILE The ROM count in the ROM file is invalid.
L:E–3736 ROM PARITY ERROR The parity value in the ROM file is invalid.
L:E–3737 PARAMETER ERROR There is an invalid parameter (memory card format).
(MEMORY CARD TYPE)

269
4. ERROR MESSAGE LIST B–62884EN/01

4.12.2
Warning

Number Message Contents

L:W–4100 ROM PARITY WARING OF
APPOINT FILE, CONTINUE TO
TRANSFER? (Y/N)
L:W–4101 ROM PARITY WARING OF
APPOINT FILE

om
L:W–4102 XXXX IS A PROGRAM OF Restoring program PMC type and system PMC type is not same.
DIFFERENT PMC TYPE.
L:W–4200 ∗ NORMAL END Processing ended normally.
L:W–4201 ∗ D _PROGOPT _DRAM UNMATCH The DRAM does not match.
L:W–4202 ∗ PARITY UNMATCH The parity does not match.

r.c
L:W–4203 ∗ CASSETTE SIZE = XXXX Cassette size = xxxx
L:W–4204 ∗ ROM COUNT = XXXX ROM count = xxxx
L:W–4205 ∗ THE LAST 120H BYTES OF THE The last 120h bytes of the ROM file have been deleted.
OBJECT FILE ARE DELETED

e
L:W–4206 ∗ ADJUST OBJECT FILE SIZE TO The ROM count is appropriate for the object file size.
ROM COUNT SIZE
L:W–4207 ∗ ADD OBJECT FILE SIZE
(XXXX BYTE)
nt The object file size has been increased by xxxx bytes.
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w

270
B–62884EN/01 4. ERROR MESSAGE LIST

4.13
N : ON–LINE
MONITOR

4.13.1
Error

Number Message Contents

om
N:E–3001 FLASH ROM WRITE ERROR
N:E–3003 FLASH ROM ERASE ERROR The F–ROM is faulty.
Replace the F–ROM.
Contact FANUC Service.
N:E–3006 FLASH ROM SIZE ERROR The size of the sequence program is greater than that of F–ROM.
Increase the size of F–ROM.

r.c
Try using the off–line CONDENSE function.
N:E–3007 FLASH ROM NOT EMG STOP The CNC is not in emergency stop status.
Set the CNC to emergency stop status.
N:E–3008 FLASH ROM PROGRAM DATA The PMC sequence program has failed.
ERROR

e
Input the sequence program again.
N:E–3030 LADDER SIZE ERROR The sequence program is too large to be written to the PMC.
Check the size of the sequence program.
N:E–3031

N:E–3036 PROGRAM SIZE ERROR

nt
PMC CONTROL TYPE BSI (RA1). When the PMC control module type is RA1, on–line editing cannot be
performed.
The size of the sequence program exceeds the option–specified size.
ce
(OPTION). Reduce the size of the sequence program.
N:E–3037 PMC TYPE UNMATCH. The PMC type is invalid.
Convert the machine model using the off–line function.
N:E–3038 NO OPTION (LADDER STEP). The ladder step number option does not exist.
nc

N:E–3041 THE COMMUNICATION TO PMC IS Communication with the PMC has not been established.
NOT READY. Start communication with the PMC.
N:E–3042 AN ALARM OCCURS ON PMC. Processing cannot be continued because of a PMC alarm.
Clear the cause of the PMC alarm.
.c

N:E–3045 LADDER SIZE OVER (PMC) The ladder program being edited is too large to be written to the PMC.
ERROR STATUS = nn Reduce the size of the ladder program.
N:E–3046 THE PROGRAM IS NOT The program being edited does not match that of the PMC.
w

CORRESPONDING (PMC). STA- Load, store, or restore the program such that it matches the PMC pro-
TUS=NN gram.
N:E–3047 AN ALARM OCCURS ON PMC Processing cannot be continued because a PMC alarm is issued.
w

ERROR STATUS = nn Check whether the ladder data being edited is valid.
N:E–3048 LADDER DATA ERROR (PMC) The program being edited does not match that of the PMC.
ERROR STATUS = nn Load, store, or restore the program such that it matches the PMC pro-
w

gram.
N:E–3050 INPUT INVALID An invalid value has been entered.
Enter a valid value.
N:E–3051 OBJECT BUFFER OVER The sequence program is full.
Reduce the size of the ladder program.
N:E–3054 COM FUNCTION MISSING The usage of the COM (SUB9) functional instruction is invalid.
Check whether the usage of COM and COME (SUB29) is valid.
N:E–3055 JUMP FUNCTION MISSING The usage of the JMP (SUB10) functional instruction is invalid.
Check whether the usage of JMP and JMPE (SUB30) is valid.

271
4. ERROR MESSAGE LIST B–62884EN/01

Number Message Contents

N:E–3056 END FUNCTION MISSING The usage of the END1, END2, END3, and END functional instruc-
tions is invalid.
Check whether these instructions have been entered in the correct
order.
N:E–3058 LADDER BROKEN Data cannot be updated because the ladder program has failed.
Input the ladder program again.
N:E–3060 CALL CALLU FUNCTION MISSING The usage of the CALL and CALLU functional instructions is invalid.
Enter these instructions in the second ladder level, or in a subpro-
gram.
N:E–3061 COM FUNCTION MISSING The CALL or CALLU functional instruction is specified between the COM

om
(CALL,SP) (SUB9) and COME functional instructions.
Do not specify CALL or CALLU between COM and COME.
N:E–3062 JMP FUNCTION MISSING (SP) Within the subprogram, the usage of the JMP (SUB10) functional
instruction is invalid.
Check whether the usage of JMP and JMPE (SUB30) is valid.
N:E–3063 SUB PROGRAM MISSING The usage of the SP functional instruction is invalid.

r.c
Check whether the usage of SP and SPE is valid.
N:E–3064 SP NO. DUPLICATE The specified subprogram number already exists.
Specify another subprogram number.
N:E–3065 SUB PROGRAM NOTHING No subprogram exists.

e
Create a subprogram.
N:E–3066 END FUNCTION NOTHING The END functional instruction does not exist.

N:E–3068 LBL COUNT OVER

nt Enter the END functional instruction.
The number of labels exceeds the allowed maximum.
Reduce the number of labels.
N:E–3069 LBL NO. DUPLICATE The specified label number is already in use.
ce
Specify another label number.
N:E–3070 LBL FUNCTION NOTHING (JMPB) The LBL functional instruction specified by JMPB does not exist.
Enter the LBL functional instruction.
N:E–3071 COM FUNCTION MISSING (JPMB) The JMPB functional instruction is specified between the COM and
nc

COME functional instructions. This instruction cannot be used to per-

form a jump from between COM and COME.
Do not insert JMPB between COM and COME. Or, enter the LBL
functional instruction, together with JMPB, between COM and
COME.
.c

N:E–3072 JMPB FUNCTION MISSING The JMPB instruction cannot jump to other than a subprogram.
Ensure that it jumps to a subprogram.
N:E–3073 LBL FUNCTION NOTHING (JMPC) The LBL functional instruction specified by JMPC does not exist.
w

Enter the LBL functional instruction.

N:E–3074 COM FUNCTION MISSING (LBL) The specified LBL functional instruction is specified between COM
and COME. This instruction cannot be used to perform a jump from
w

between COM and COME.

Do not insert LBL between COM and COME. Or, enter the JMPC
functional instruction, together with LBL, between COM and COME.
w

N:E–3075 JMPC FUNCTION MISSING The JMPC functional instruction is specified in other than a subpro-
gram.
Specify the JMPC functional instruction in a subprogram.
N:E–3076 LBL FUNCTION MISSING (JMPC) The LBL functional instruction specified by JMPC exists in a level
other than the second ladder level.
Enter the LBL functional instruction in the second ladder level.
N:E–3077 SYMBOL UNDEFINE The entered symbol is not yet defined.
Enter a valid symbol name.
N:E–3080 LADDER ILLEGAL The ladder program is invalid.
Input the ladder program again.

272
B–62884EN/01 4. ERROR MESSAGE LIST

Number Message Contents

N:E–3082 ILLEGAL OPERATION An invalid operation was performed (e.g., an attempt was made to
create a relay or coil in a functional instruction).
Be careful to specify operations correctly.
N:E–3084 DATA TABLE COUNT OVER The number of data tables exceeds the allowed maximum.
Reduce the number of data tables.
N:E–3085 EDIT BUFFER OVER There is no free space in the buffer in which editing can be performed.
Reduce the size of the net being edited.
N:E–3090 RELAY OR COIL FORBIT An unnecessary relay or coil exists.
Delete the unnecessary relay or coil.

om
N:E–3091 ADDRESS BIT NOTHING The specified address is not found.
Check the specified address.
N:E–3092 HORIZONTAL LINE ILLEGAL The horizontal lines of the net are not connected.
Connect the horizontal lines.
N:E–3093 FUNCTION LINE ILLEGAL There is an invalid connection between functional instructions.
Ensure that the connections between functional instructions are spe-

r.c
cified correctly.
N:E–3094 RELAY OR COIL NOTHING No relay or coil exists.
Add a relay or coil.
N:E–3095 VERTICAL LINE ILLEGAL The vertical lines of the net are not connected.

e
Connect the vertical lines.
N:E–3096 PARAMETER NOTHING No parameters are specified for a functional instruction.
Specify the required parameters.
N:E–3097

N:E–3100
ADDRESS NOT DETECTED

NET TOO LARGE

nt No address is specified.
Specify an address.
The net being edited exceeds the size of the editing buffer.
ce
Reduce the size of the net being edited.
N:E–3102 LARGE NET APPEARED The net is too large to be displayed.
Reduce the size of the net.
N:E–3111 ERROR NET FOUND An invalid net exists.
nc

Correct the invalid net.

N:E–3113 FUNCTION NOT FOUND The specified functional instruction is not found.
Check the number of the functional instruction.
N:E–3114 ILLEGAL FUNCTION NO Search for a functional instruction has been performed using the
.c

wrong number.
Check the number specified for the functional instruction.
N:E–3123 ROM FILE OPEN ERROR The MCARD file cannot be opened.
ERROR STATUS = nn
w

Check whether the program name has been entered correctly. Alter-
natively, the MCARD file may have been destroyed.
N:E–3124 SYMBOL FILE OPEN ERROR The symbol file cannot be opened.
ERROR STATUS = nn Check whether the program name has been entered correctly.
w

Alternatively, the source program may have been destroyed.

N:E–3125 ROM FILE READ ERROR The MCARD file cannot be read.
ERROR STATUS = nn The MCARD file may have been destroyed.
w

N:E–3126 ROM FILE READ ERROR (VMEM) An error occurred when reading data from extended memory.
ERROR STATUS = nn Memory management may have been disabled.
Reboot the personal computer.
N:E–3130 ROM FILE WRITE ERROR There is insufficient memory to perform writing to the MCARD file.
NOT ENOUGH MEMORY Memory management may have been disabled.
Reboot the personal computer.
N:E–3131 ROM FILE WRITE ERROR Data cannot be written to the MCARD file.
ERROR STATUS = nn Check the amount of free space available on disk, and the name of
the program to be saved.

273
4. ERROR MESSAGE LIST B–62884EN/01

Number Message Contents

N:E–3132 NET COMMENT FILE OPEN ERROR The net comment file cannot be opened.
ERROR STATUS = nn Check whether the program name has been entered correctly.
Alternatively, the source program may have been destroyed.
N:E–3140 FAIL TO ALLOCATE MEMORY FOR There is insufficient memory.
DATA TABLE CONTROL DATA. Reserve an area in conventional memory.
N:E–3141 FAIL TO READ FROM PMC DATA An error occurred while reading data table control data from the PMC.
TABLE CONTROL DATA. Check the connection with the PMC and whether the specified
machine model matches that of the connected PMC.
N:E–3142 FAIL TO WRITE TO PMC DATA An error occurred while writing data table control data to the PMC.
TABLE CONTROL DATA.

om
Check the connection with the PMC and whether the specified
machine model matches that of the connected PMC.
N:E–3143 THIS DATA TABLE GROUP IS An attempt was made to change a value in a data table group, but that
WRITE–PROTECTED. data table group is write–protected.
First, check whether the correct data table group is specified, then set
that data table group to write–enabled status.
N:E–3144 ADDRESS NOT FOUND. The specified address is not found.

r.c
Check whether the address is specified correctly.
N:E–3150 LADDER DIAGRAM HAS NOT An attempt was made to update or restore the ladder diagram when
BEEN MODIFIED. it had not been modified.
N:E–3151 AN ERROR OCCURS IN THE LAD- An error occurred in the ladder diagram.

e
DER DIAGRAM. The system cannot switch to update or monitor.
Correct the error in the diagram.
N:E–3153

N:E–3155
TEMPORARY FILE LOAD ERROR.
NOT ENOUGH PROGRAM
MEMORY
PROGRAM READ ERROR.
nt There is insufficient memory.
Reserve an area in conventional memory or on disk.

There is insufficient memory.

ce
NOT ENOUGH PROGRAM Reserve an area in conventional memory.
MEMORY
N:E–3158 LADDER DIAGRAM HAS BEEN The system cannot switch to store or monitor because the ladder dia-
MODIFIED. gram has been modified.
Update the ladder diagram.
nc

N:E–3160 SELECTED PROGRAM IS The specified program does not match that in the PMC memory.
UNMATCH. Specify the correct program, or load or store the program such that
it matches the PMC memory program.
N:E–3161 TRANSFER WAS ABORTED. The user has canceled the transfer.
If the storing of a program is canceled, the program in PMC memory
.c

may be destroyed. Store the program again to load it into the PMC.
If program loading is canceled, the program remains as is. If the pro-
gram does not match that in PMC memory, load or store the program
such that it matches the PMC memory program.
w

N:E–3162 NOT CONNECTED TO PMC. Communication with the PMC has not yet been established. Set up
CAN NOT TRANSFER PROGRAM. communication with the PMC.
N:E–3163 MISMATCH PASSWORD The entered password is invalid.
w

Enter a valid password.

N:E–3164 TOO LARGE PROGRAM. The size of the specified program exceeds that of the PMC program
NOT ENOUGH PMC’S PROGRAM memory.
w

MEMORY Check the sizes of the specified program and the PMC program
memory.
N:E–3167 INVALID PROGRAM NAME. The program name is invalid.
Check the program name.
N:E–3170 CUT BUFFER SIZE OVER. The specified range is too great.
Specify a narrower range.
N:E–3171 CUT BUFFER ALLOCATION There is insufficient memory.
ERROR. Reserve an area in extended memory, conventional memory, or on
disk.

274
B–62884EN/01 4. ERROR MESSAGE LIST

Number Message Contents

N:E–3172 NET COMMENT CUT ERROR (nn). When nn = –1:
There is insufficient memory.
Reserve an area in extended memory, conventional memory, or on
disk.
When nn = –2:
The net comment file contains invalid data.
Check the net comments using the off–line function.
N:E–3173 NET COMMENT COPY ERROR When nn = –1:
(nn). There is insufficient memory.
Reserve an area in extended memory, conventional memory, or on

om
disk.
When nn = –2:
The net comment file contains invalid data.
Check the net comments using the off–line function.
N:E–3174 NET COMMENT PASTE ERROR When nn = –1:
(nn). There is insufficient memory.

r.c
Reserve an area in extended memory, conventional memory, or on
disk.
When nn = –2:
The net comment file contains invalid data.
Check the net comments using the off–line function.

e
N:E–3175 NET COMMENT APPEND ERROR. The net comment file contains erroneous data.
Check the net comments using the off–line function.
N:E–3176 NET COMMENT DELETE ERROR. The net comment file contains erroneous data.

N:E–3177 NET COMMENT DATA WRITE

ERROR.
nt Check the net comments using the off–line function.
The net comment file contains erroneous data.
Check the net comments using the off–line function.
ce
N:E–3178 NOTHING NET COMMENT DATA. The net comment file contains no net comment within the specified
range.
Check the net comments using the off–line function.
N:E–3183 THIS FUNCTION IS PROTECTED. – On-line editing function and I/O menu functions are protected. Con-
firm keep relay.
nc

– Data table control data screen is protected. Confirm keep relay.

N:E–3184 WRITE PROTECT. (NOT MDI MODE PMC parameter is write protected.
NOR EMERGENCY STOP.) Set CNC mode to MDI or emergency stop, or stop the sequence pro-
gram.
.c

N:E–3185 WRITE PROTECT. (CHECK PWE.) PMC parameter is write protected.

Set CNC parameter PWE=1, or stop the sequence program.
N:E–3186 WRITE PROTECT. (CHECK PWE PMC parameter is write protected.
w

AND KEY4.) Set CNC parameter PWE=1, or set KEY4=1, or stop the sequence
program.
N:E–3187 WRITE PROTECT. Signal status is write protected.
Confirm keep relay.
w
w

275
4. ERROR MESSAGE LIST B–62884EN/01

Number Contents
N:E–3300 Signal trigger unavailable
[Cause] Trigger data on PMC side is invalid.
[Remedy] Please re–start signal trigger.
N:E–3301 Signal trigger buffer allocation error
[Cause] The memory is insufficient.
[Remedy] Please secure an extended memory, conventional memory, and the disk space.
N:E–3302 Reject signal trigger
[Cause] Online editor is selected.
[Remedy] Please re–start signal trigger after online editor was finished.

om
N:E–3303 Debug ladder is executing. Cannot execute signal trigger
[Cause] Signal trigger cannot be executed because debug ladder is executing on PMC side.
[Remedy] Please re–start signal trigger after debug ladder was finished.
N:E–3304 Signal trigger buffer size error
[Cause] The memory buffer for signal trigger on PMC side is insufficient.

r.c
N:E–3305 Signal trigger data unavail
[Cause] Signal trigger parameter is not corrected.
[Remedy] Please confirm the data of signal trigger parameter.
N:E–3310 Signal trace is unavailable

e
[Cause] Signal trace is not supported on PMC side.
[Remedy] It is necessary to exchange a system ROM of PMC.
N:E–3311 Signal trace parameter error nt
[Cause] Signal trace parameter is not corrected .
[Remedy] Please confirm the address of signal trace parameter.
ce
N:E–3312 Signal analysis is executing. Signal trace cannot be executed
[Cause] Signal trace cannot be executed because signal analysis is executing on PMC.
[Remedy] Please re–start signal trace after signal analysis was finished.
N:E–3320 PMC parameter file read error.
nc

[Cause] Fail in reading the PMC parameter file.

[Remedy] A hard error may occur. Please confirm following cases.
a) Whether drive is ready.
b) Whether disk format is right.
.c

N:E–3321 PMC parameter file read error. Specified file not found.
[Cause] The specified file is not found.
[Remedy] Please confirm whether the file name is correct.
w

N:E–3322 PMC parameter file write error.

[Cause] Fail in writing the PMC parameter file.
[Remedy] A hard error may occur. Please confirm following cases.
w

a) Whether drive is ready.

b) Whether disk is not write–protected.
c) Whether disk format is right.
w

N:E–3323 PMC parameter file write error. Specified path not found.
[Cause] The specified path is not found.
[Remedy] Please confirm whether the file name is correct.
N:E–3324 PMC parameter file write error. Insufficient disk space.
[Cause] Insufficient disk space.
[Remedy] Please secure the disk space.
N:E–3325 PMC parameter file write error. File is write protected.
[Cause] The file is write–protected.
[Remedy] Please cancel the write–protect.

276
B–62884EN/01 4. ERROR MESSAGE LIST

Number Contents
N:E–3326 Illegal PMC parameter file name.
[Cause] The mistake is found in the file name.
[Remedy] Please confirm the file name.
N:E–3327 This file format is not PMC parameter file format.
[Cause] There is a part of illegal format in the PMC parameter file.
[Remedy] Please confirm whether the file format is correct.
N:E–3328 Can not save.(Not EDIT mode.)
[Cause] PMC parameter file can not be saved if NC is not EDIT mode while Ladder is running.
[Remedy] Please put NC into EDIT mode. Or, please stop the Ladder.

om
N:E–3329 Can not restore.(Not emergency stop nor PWE = ”1”.)
[Cause] PMC parameter file can not be restored if NC is not stopping emergency or Parameter Write Enable
(PWE) is not ”1” while Ladder is running.
[Remedy] Please put NC into the state of emergency stop and set Parameter Write Enable (PWE) ”1”. Or,
please stop the Ladder.

r.c
N:E–3341 Step cannot be executed. Ladder program is running
[Cause] Step cannot be executed because the ladder program is running.
[Remedy] Please stop the ladder program.
N:E–3342 Block cannot be executed. Ladder program is running
[Cause] Block cannot be executed because the ladder program is running.

e
[Remedy] Please stop the ladder program.
N:E–3343 Step cannot be executed. Signal trigger is executing

N:E–3344
nt
[Cause] Step cannot be executed because signal trigger is executing.
[Remedy] Please stop the execution of signal trigger function.
Block cannot be executed. Signal trigger is executing
ce
[Cause] Block cannot be executed because signal trigger is executing.
[Remedy] Please stop the execution of signal trigger function.
N:E–3345 Trigger cannot be executed. Ladder program is running
[Cause] Trigger cannot be executed because the ladder program is running.
nc

[Remedy] Please stop the ladder program.

N:E–3346 Scan cannot be executed. Ladder program is running
[Cause] Scan cannot be executed because the ladder program is running.
[Remedy] Please stop the ladder program.
.c

N:E–3347 Trigger cannot be executed. Signal trigger is executing

[Cause] Trigger cannot be executed because signal trigger is executing.
[Remedy] Please stop the execution of signal trigger function.
w

N:E–3348 Scan cannot be executed. Signal trigger is executing

[Cause] Scan cannot be executed because signal trigger is executing.
[Remedy] Please stop the execution of signal trigger function.
w

N:E–3349 Ladder debug parameter error. (Address %s?)

[Cause] In ladder debug parameter, trigger address is not correct.
w

[Remedy] Please confirm trigger address.

N:E–3350 Ladder debug parameter error. (Count %s?, Min=1 Max=32767)
[Cause] In ladder debug parameter, trigger count or scan count is not correct.
[Remedy] Please confirm trigger count or scan count.
N:E–3351 Block execution aborted !
[Cause] Block execution is aborted by the following operations.
– Select Online editor
– Run the ladder program
– Enter or exit online monitor

277
4. ERROR MESSAGE LIST B–62884EN/01

Number Contents
N:E–3352 Address cannot be changed. Debug trigger is executing
[Cause] Trigger address cannot be changed because debug trigger is executing.
[Remedy] Please stop the execution of debug trigger.
N:E–3353 Count cannot be changed. Debug trigger is executing
[Cause] Trigger count cannot be changed because debug trigger is executing.
[Remedy] Please stop the execution of debug trigger.
N:E–3354 Count cannot be changed. Debug scan is executing
[Cause] Scan count cannot be changed because scan is executing.
[Remedy] Please stop the execution of scan.

om
N:E–3370 Signal analysis is unavailable
[Cause] Signal analysis not supports on PMC side.
[Remedy] It is necessary to exchange a system ROM of PMC.
N:E–3371 Signal analysis parameter error
[Cause] Signal analysis parameter is not corrected.

r.c
[Remedy] Please confirm the data of signal analysis parameter.
N:E–3372 Signal trace is executing. Cannot execute signal analysis
[Cause] Signal analysis cannot be executed because signal trace is executing on PMC side.
[Remedy] Please re–start signal analysis after signal trace was finished.

e
N:E–3373 Disable init for sampling
[Cause] Signal analysis cannot be initialized because signal analysis is executing on PMC side.

N:E–3374
nt
[Remedy] Please re–try parameter initialized after signal analyz was finished.
Aborted signal analysis execution and initialize ?
[Cause] Signal analysis cannot be initialized because signal analysis is executing on PMC side by the keep
memory data of the old edition.
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w

278
w
w
w
.c
nc
ce
APPENDIX

nt
er.c
om
 A. FUNCTIONS SPECIFIC TO INDIVIDUAL
B–62884EN/01 PMC MODELS

A FUNCTIONS SPECIFIC TO INDIVIDUAL PMC MODELS

Those functions which vary depending on the PMC model are described
below. Read this appendix in conjunction with Section 1.2.2.

om
e r.c
nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w

281
A. FUNCTIONS SPECIFIC TO INDIVIDUAL
PMC MODELS B–62884EN/01

A.1
SYSTEM
PARAMETERS

A.1.1 The system parameter editing screens for all of the PMC models are
Editing shown below. For a detailed explanation of editing, see Section 3.5.2.6.
(1) PMC–RB3/RB4/RB5/RB6

om
EDIT (SYSTEM PARAMETER) PMC–RB3 <0>[C: ¥FLADDER¥]

1) COUNTER DATA TYPE : 0 (0:BINARY, 1:BCD)

2) (UNUSED)
3) (UNUSED)
4) (UNUSED)
5) OPERATOR PANEL : 0 (0:NO, 1:YES)
6) KEY ADDRESS :
7) LED ADDRESS :

r.c
8) KEY BIT IMAGE ADDRESS :
9) LED BIT IMAGE ADDRESS :

PMC TYPE = RB3

e
nt1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 END
ce
(2) PMC–RC3/RC4

EDIT (SYSTEM PARAMETER) PMC–RC4 <0>[C: ¥FLADDER¥]

1) COUNTER DATA TYPE : 0 (0:BINARY, 1:BCD)

nc

2) LADDER EXEC : 100% (1–150%)

3) (UNUSED)
4) LANGUAGE EXEC RATIO : 50% (0–99%)
5) LANGUAGE ORIGIN : 000000H
6) OPERATOR PANEL : 0 (0:NO, 1:YES)
7) KEY ADDRESS :
8) LED ADDRESS :
9) KEY BIT IMAGE ADDRESS :
.c

10) LED BIT IMAGE ADDRESS :

PMC TYPE = RC4

w
w

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 END
w

282
 A. FUNCTIONS SPECIFIC TO INDIVIDUAL
B–62884EN/01 PMC MODELS

A.1.2 The system parameter mnemonic formats for the PMC models are shown
Examples of Mnemonic below. For information about the mnemonic editing function, see Section
3.5.8.
Files (Single–Format)
(1) PMC–RB4/RB5/RB6

%@0↓
2 BINARY↓ 2. Counter data type (Binary or BCD)
3 NO↓ 3. Whether an operator’s panel is used (YES: Used, NO: Not used)

om
4 PMC – RB4↓ 4. PMC model (PMC-RB4/PMC-RB4 (STEP SEQ) /
%↓ PMC-RB5/PMC-RB6 (STEP SEQ) )
[EOB]

Note When specifying YES in Item 3 above (whether an operator’s panel is used), specify the KEY address, LED address,
KEY image address, and LED image address as follows:

r.c
3 YES X0000 Y0000 R0000 R0010↓

(2) PMC–RB3

e
%@0↓
2
3
4
BINARY↓
NO↓
PMC – RB3↓
2.
3.
nt
Counter data type
Whether an operator’s panel is used
(Binary or BCD)
(YES: Used, NO: Not used)
4. PMC model (PMC-RB3)
ce
7 100↓ 7. Ladder execution time (100% (fixed))
%↓
[EOB]
nc

Note When specifying YES in Item 3 above (whether an operator’s panel is used), specify the KEY address, LED address,
KEY image address, and LED image address as follows:

3 YES X0000 Y0000 R0000 R0010↓

.c

(3) PMC–RC3/RC4
w

%@0↓ 2. Counter data type (Binary or BCD)

w

2 BCD↓ 3. Whether an operator’s panel is used (YES: Used, NO: Not used)
3 NO↓ 4. PMC model (PMC-RC3/PMC-RC4/PMC-RC4
4 PMC – RC4↓ (STEPSEQ))
5 000000 5. Start address of language program link control statement data
w

6 50↓ (0 or 800000 to 8FFFFF (hexadecimal))

7 100↓ 6. Percentage of language program execution time
%↓ (1% to 99%)
[EOB] 7. Ladder execution time (Always 100%)

Note When specifying YES in Item 3 above (whether an operator’s panel is used), specify the KEY address, LED address,
KEY image address, and LED image address as follows:

3 YES X0000 Y0000 R0000 R0010↓

283
A. FUNCTIONS SPECIFIC TO INDIVIDUAL
PMC MODELS B–62884EN/01

A.2 During linking, load modules created in the C language are linked with
a ROM format file. The C language can be used only with
LINK PMC-RC3/RC4/RC4 (STEP SEQ)/QC/NB/NB2. Linking is not
required when the C language is not used.

ROM
Transferred
format file
Link ROM to the ROM
format file writers and

om
PMC
Load modules
in C language

Notes

r.c
This function enables linking to be performed on a personal
computer. In addition, with this function, an object and C
language load modules can be separately transferred to
and linked on the PMC (dotted line in the figure below).

e
nt

C program development environment for PMC-RC (/RC3/RC4/QC/NB)

Personal computer
ce
Link control statement FAPT LADDER
creation tool

C language source Link control source

Convert
nc

Object file (Note 2)

ROM format file
(MCARD file)
iC286 (compiler) FANUC
distribution
library
.c

BND386 (binder)
Convert
BLD386 (binder) (Note 2)
w

ROM format file Object file

OJ386 (converter) Link with C language (MCARD file)

Intel hexadecimal HEX2SREC

w

load module (Note 1)

w

PMC – RC3

Debug

ROM writer

284
 A. FUNCTIONS SPECIFIC TO INDIVIDUAL
B–62884EN/01 PMC MODELS

Notes
1 Intel hexadecimal load modules cannot be linked. Before
link operation, convert the file format by referring to the
HEX2SREC User’s Manual.
2 With FAPT LADDER-II, ROM format files are no longer
used. This means that a ROM format file cannot be created
by compile processing alone, conversion between an object
file and ROM format file being required. A detailed
description is given below.

om
(a) Using method of HEX2SREC
Intel hexadecimal load modules cannot be directly linked. Perform
the below operation before linking.
[Operation]

r.c
1) Execute HEX2SREC.EXE in response to the DOS prompt.
Specify as follows:

C:\FLADDER\APPENDIX> HEX2SREC input-file-name output-file-name

e
2) Conversion is performed.
nt3) Check that specified file names have been created using the DIR
command.
4) Specify an output file name (for example, SAMPLE.SR) as the
load module file name for linking.
ce
Note
When the extension of an input file name is omitted, the
nc

extension “.HEX” is assumed. Output is directed to a file

with the same name but the extension is changed to ”.SR.”
The specification of the following files has the same effect
in input/output:
.c

HEX2SREC SAMPLE.HEX SAMPLE.SR

HEX2SREC SAMPLE SAMPLE.SR
w

HEX2SREC SAMPLE.HEX
HEX2SREC SAMPLE
w

(b) Converting between an object file and ROM format file

A ROM format file cannot be created by compiling a source program.
Instead, in the case of link processing, the following extra work is
w

required.
· Before link processing: Conversion from an object file (MCARD
file) to a ROM format file
· After link processing: Conversion from a ROM format file to an
object file (MCARD file)
For the method of conversion, see 3.5.6.6.

285
A. FUNCTIONS SPECIFIC TO INDIVIDUAL
PMC MODELS B–62884EN/01

(c) Starting link processing

[Operation]
1) Press F4 on the utility screen.

2) Then, the pop-up screen shown below appears. Pressing the Enter

key displays the link screen.

EXEC FILE NAME

i _lipmcr – p fl03400. tbl

om
↑
Model file name

Specify the model to be used for link processing, by changing the

r.c
model file name.
The table below indicates the correspondence between the PMC
models and model file names.

PMC model Model file name

e
PMC-RC3 fl03400.tbl (Initial value)
PMC-RC4 fl04000.tbl
nt
PMC-RC4 (STEP SEQ)

3) The link screen appears.

fl04200.tbl
ce
Linker PMC–RC3 <0>[A:¥FLADDER¥]

Load module file name : A:¥DATA¥C–MODULE.SR

ROM format file name : A:¥DATA¥SAMPLE.#EX
nc

Series Edition Machine tool name

NC & PMC name Program no.
.c
w
w

1 EXEC 2 MAP 3 ERROR 4 P 5I 6 7 8 9 10 END

Note
w

If an invalid model file is specified, the status line of the link

screen does not display a model name. In such a case,
check the following:
· When the newly entered file name is invalid
→ Enter a valid file name.
· When the specified model file is not installed
→ Install the model file.

286
 A. FUNCTIONS SPECIFIC TO INDIVIDUAL
B–62884EN/01 PMC MODELS

(d) Linking
[Operation]
1) Specify the load module file name and ROM format file name to
link. The load module file name must conform to DOS
specifications. Here the load module file name should be
specified with its extension (--------.***). (Specity an output
program name for HEX2SREC.)
2) Select [EXEC].
(4) Termination
[Operation]

om
1) Select [END].
2) The screen display returns to the main menu screen.

e r.c
nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w

287
B. AUTOMATIC COMPILATION
AND DECOMPILATION B–62884EN/01

B AUTOMATIC COMPILATION AND DECOMPILATION

(1) Conditions for starting automatic compilation or decompilation

When [ON–LINE (SELECTED PROGRAM)] has been selected
from the initial menu, automatic compilation or decompilation is
performed according to the following conditions:

om
[Conditions/results]
The start conditions are determined from the results of comparing the
time stamps of the CONTROL and MCARD files for the source
program. The conditions under which these files are updated and the
results of updating are described below.

r.c
[File updating conditions]
1) CONTROL file
The CONTROL file is updated once the source program has been
modified by using the off–line editing function.
2) MCARD file

e
The MCARD file is updated once the source program has been
input by using the off–line input/output function (for example,
nt after being transferred from the PMC or converted from a
memory–card or Handy–File format file), or once processing has
been terminated after modifying the ladder program by using the
on–line function.
ce
[Results]
1) When the CONTROL file has the most recent time stamp
→ Automatic compilation is performed.
nc

[Applicable cases]
D When no compilation is performed after the program is
edited by using the off–line function
D etc
.c

2) When the MCARD file has the most recent time stamp
→ Automatic decompilation is performed.
[Applicable cases]
w

D When no decompilation is performed after the program is

transferred from the PMC by using the off–line input/output
function
w

D When processing is terminated after the ladder program is

edited by using the on–line function
D etc
w

3) When both files have the same time stamp

→ Automatic start processing is not performed.
[Applicable cases]
D When compilation is performed after the program is edited
by using the off–line function
D etc

288
 B. AUTOMATIC COMPILATION
B–62884EN/01 AND DECOMPILATION

Note
The options applied to automatic compilation or
decompilation, started under the above conditions, are
those specified with [PROGRAM OPTION SETTING] of the
off–line function. Before attempting to select [ON–LINE
FUNCTION], confirm the set options. For details of how to
set options, see Section 4.5.7.

om
e r.c
nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w

289
C. CHANGE OF EACH SETTING FILE B–62884EN/01

C CHANGE OF EACH SETTING FILE

om
e r.c
nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w

290
B–62884EN/01 C. CHANGE OF EACH SETTING FILE

C.1 “%%%FLSET.CNF” is a file of the text form and some setting parameters, by
which the behavior of system is decided, are described there.
SYSTEM
The file exits in the directory in which the system is installed.
CONFIGURATION
And the parameters can be changed by a text editor on the market.
FILE “%%% FLSET.
CNF”
Note
%%%FLSET.CNF contains the set values used to
determine system operation. If data in this file is not
modified correctly, the functions described in this manual

om
may not be performed correctly. Do not, therefore, attempt
to modify any data other than the items described below.

(1) Sample of “%%%FLSET.CNF”

r.c
;
; FAPT LADDER Initial Setting File
; ( ‘key word =’ ⇐ 9characters)
;

e
;
*V; System information
;
verl=A08B–9201–J503

*S;
Version 01.0;
rights=Copyrigth (C) 1991–1995 FANUC LTD.;
System Setup
nt
ce
;
editor =; Text Editor
;
ladkey = 1; Ladder editing key buffer size
; (1 ⇐ ladkey ⇐ 16)
nc

;
IEC_SYM=2 1:Check symbol (level–1) for IEC standard
; 2:No check
;
.c

*U; Utility Information

;
N = UTILITY; Utility Guidance
;
w

F1 = Dos / command.com; [F1] Soft Key Guidance & EXE

F2 = flOadat / FLOADAT; [F2] Soft Key Guidance & EXE
F3 = View result / FLVIEW.BAT %p.err; [F3] Soft Key Guidance & EXE
w

F4 =Linker / i_lipmcr–pf103400b.tbl; [F4] Soft Key Guidance & EXE

F5 =; [F5] Soft Key Guidance & EXE
F6 =; [F6] Soft Key Guidance & EXE
w

F7 =; [F7] Soft Key Guidance & EXE

F8 =; [F8] Soft Key Guidance & EXE
F9 =; [F9] Soft Key Guidance & EXE
F10=; [F10] Soft Key Guidance & EXE
;
[EOF]

291
C. CHANGE OF EACH SETTING FILE B–62884EN/01

(2) Registering a command in the utility

(a) Function
A tool which is executed under DOS can be registered in the
[UTILITY] function on the initial or off–line menu.
(b) Key word
Items “F5=” to “F10=” are displayed under
“ *U ; Utility Information ” For these items, describe the
tool to be assigned to each function key. Do not modify currently
displayed characters, such as *U and F5=. If such a character is
modified, the system does not recognize the assignment.
(c) Format

om
Tool name displayed on the utility screen
Characters to the right of ; are assumed to be a comment.
[F1] Soft Key Guidance & EXE
F1 = Dos / command. com ; !

Registered tool

r.c
Delimiter between displayed name and command
Function key to which the tool is assigned

The maximum number of characters which can be used to specify

the tool name and registered tool are as follows:

e
D Tool name : 70 characters
(or 35 double–byte characters)
nt D Registered tool : 40 characters
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w

292
B–62884EN/01 D. CONVERSION OF SEQUENCE PROGRAM

D CONVERSION OF SEQUENCE PROGRAM

om
e r.c
nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w

293
D. CONVERSION OF SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–62884EN/01

D.1 (1) Source program types

FAPT LADDER supports three source program types: FORMAT–A,
DIFFERENCES FROM FORMAT–B, and FORMAT–C, while FAPT LADDER–II Ladder
FAPT LADDER Editing Package supports only the FORMAT–C type.
Supported source program type
Software model
FORMAT–A FORMAT–B FORMAT–C
FAPT LADDER f (NOTE) f (NOTE) f (NOTE)
FAPT LADDER–II

f


f

om
Ladder Editing Package

Note
The supported source program types also vary with the
PMC model. For details, refer to the relevant FAPT
LADDER manual.

r.c
SAMPLE MANAGEMENT OF FORMAT–C
1) FORMAT–C

e
This source program type is used on Ladder Editing Package.
The FORMAT–C source program is organized by below files.
nt
C:¥
<A case of specifying “C:¥DATA¥PRG_C” as source program>
ce
data¥
PRG _C¥
S CONTROL Source program managing file
S SYSPARAM System parameter data file
S
nc

TITLE Title data file⋅

S XSYMBOL.xxx Symbol & Comment data file (Note 1)
S MESSAGE Message data file
S IOMODULE I/O Module data file
S LEVEL1.#LA First level ladder data file
S LEVEL2.#LA Second level ladder data file
.c

S LEVEL3.#LA Third level ladder data file (Note 2)

S Pyyy.#LA Sub–program ladder data file (Note 3)
S Pzzz.#SS Sub–program step sequence data file (Note 3)
S
w

NETCMT.xxx Net comment data file (Note 1)

S OPTION Setting of option
S MCARD Memory card format file
w

Notes
w

1 ’xxx’ is number of multi file managing.

2 Only for use LEVEL3 ladder.
3 ’yyy’, ’zzz’ is number of sub–program.

2) FORMAT–A
This source program type is only used on FAPT LADDER.
The source program is managed using the following names. A
single directory can contain two or more source programs.

294
B–62884EN/01 D. CONVERSION OF SEQUENCE PROGRAM

xxxxxxxx.#CN : File managing user programs

xxxxxxxx.#PA : File storing system parameters

xxxxxxxx.#TA : File storing the title data

xxxxxxxx.#SY : File storing symbols

xxxxxxxx.#C1 : File storing comments

xxxxxxxx.#C2 : File storing comments (reserve)

xxxxxxxx.#ME : File storing messages

xxxxxxxx.#IO : File storing the I/O module data

xxxxxxxx.#LA : File storing ladder

(xxxxxxxx is the specified source program name.)

om
3) FORMAT–B
This source program type is only used on FAPT LADDER.
A directory is created with the specified source program name.
In the directory, the program is managed under the following
names. A single directory cannot contain two or more source

r.c
programs.

CONTROL : File managing the source program

SYSPARAM : File storing system parameters

e

TITLE : File storing the title data

SYMBOL : File storing symbols

COMMENT1 : File storing comments
nt







COMMENT2
MESSAGE
IOMODULE
LEVEL1.#LA
: File storing comments (reserve)
: File storing messages
: File storing the I/O module data
: File storing ladder of the first level
ce

LEVEL2.#LA : File storing ladder of the second level

LEVEL3.#LA : File storing ladder of the third level

Pyyyyy.#LA : File storing ladder subprograms

Pyyyyy.#SS : File storing step sequence subprograms
nc

(yyyyy is a subprogram number.)

(2) Elimination of ROM format files

FAPT LADDER supports ROM format object files. Ladder Editing
.c

Package, FAPT LADDER–II, however, does not use ROM format

files because an object file called an MCARD file (memory–card
format file) is added to the source program. The data flow is outlined
w

below.
Some FAPT LADDER operating procedures require the input of
ROM format files. FAPT LADDER–II, however, does not require the
input of ROM format files.
w

(a) FAPT LADDER

w

FAPT LADDER
1) 3) External devices
Source file → ROM format → CNC
← file ← Memory–card format file
2) 4) Handy–File format file

1) Compile 2) Decompile
3) Output (in ROM format) 4) Input (in ROM format)

295
D. CONVERSION OF SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–62884EN/01

(b) FAPT LADDER–II/Ladder Editing Package

FAPT LADDER–II
Source file 3) External devices
1) → CNC
Each data file MCARD file Memory–card format file
← 2)
4) Handy–File format file

1) Compile 2) Decompile

om
3) Output (in object format) 4) Input (in object format)

e r.c
nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w

296
B–62884EN/01 D. CONVERSION OF SEQUENCE PROGRAM

D.2 When converting data created with FAPT LADDER for use with the
Ladder Editing Package, use a method that is appropriate for the data
CONVERSION FROM format, as described below.
FAPT LADDER [Data types]
– Source file of FORMAT–C
– Source file of FORMAT–A and –B
– Mnemonic format file
– Memory–card format file
– ROM format file

om
(1) Source file conversion (with the backup function)
(a) FORMAT–C
A file can be converted with the “Restore” of the backup function.
For details of this function, see Section 3.5.6.5.
All FAPT LADDER–II source files are of FORMAT–C type,
allowing this method to be used for conversion.

r.c
(b) FORMAT–A/B
First, using FAPT LADDER, convert a file of to FORMAT–C
type. Then, perform program conversion as explained in (a),
above.
(2) Conversion using a mnemonic format file

e
Convert a program to a mnemonic format file, using the mnemonic
editing function of FAPT LADDER, before using the program.
ntFor details of this function, see Section 3.5.8.
Note, however, that this method cannot be used to convert a step
sequence program. (See Section 3.5.8.6.)
ce
(3) Conversion using a memory–card format file
Convert a program to a memory–card format file, using the FAPT
LADDER I/O function of “Memory card,” before using the program.
For details of the function, see Section 3.5.6.3.
(4) Conversion using a ROM format file
nc

First, convert a ROM format file, created with a FAPT LADDER

function such as the compile function, to a memory–card format file
by using the I/O function of “ROM format file.” Then, apply method
(3), above.
.c

For details of the function, see Section 3.5.6.6.

w
w
w

297
D. CONVERSION OF SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–62884EN/01

D.3 By changing the mnemonic file, it is possible to convert some PMC type
sequence program to another type of it.
CONVERT THE PMC
TYPE OF SEQUENCE
PROGRAM

D.3.1 On the following PMC type, it is possible to edit the different PMC type
Converting by System data by changing system parameter of the mnemonic data.
Parameter Editing However, format of the system parameter, usable functional instructions
and range of address are different.

om
Conversion source Conversion
Remarks
(PMC) destination (PMC)

PMC-RA1/RA2/RA3 Step sequence data

RB/RB2/RB3 → PMC-RB3/RB4/RB5/RB6 cannot be converted.

r.c
RB4/RB5/RB6 RC3/RC4
RC/RC3/RC4
PMC-PA1/PA3/NB/NB2

[Example: PMC–RB3 → PMC–RC3]

e
(1) Set the PMC type to PMC–RB3 and convert the original source
program to mnemonic file.
nt
(2) Change the system parameter of the mnemonic file to PMC–RC3
with a standard text editor.
(3) Convert the mnemonic file(→(2)) to source program by the open
ce
CNC of PMC–RC3 model.

Original file (PMC–RB3) Converted file (PMC–RC3)

nc

%@A %@A
%@0 %@0
2 BCD 2 BCD
3 NO 3 NO
4 PMC–RB3 Change system parameter 4 PMC–RC3
.c

7 100 5 000000
% 6 50
%@1 7 100
w

01 ABC–KIKAI %
02 S–DRILL %@1
01 ABC–KIKAI
02 S–DRILL
w

%
%@5
w

X000 1 0 1 ID16C %
Y008 1 0 4 OD32A %@5
% X000 1 0 1 ID16C
%@E Y008 1 0 4 OD32A
%
%@E

298
B–62884EN/01 D. CONVERSION OF SEQUENCE PROGRAM

D.3.2
Conversion Using a
Conversion source Conversion Converter
Signal Address (PMC) destination (PMC) file name
Converter
PMC-L/M/M (MMC) → PMC-RB3/RB4/RB5/RB6 FS0T_CNV.SYM
(FS0-T) RC3/RC4

PMC-L/M/M (MMC) → PMC-RB3/RB4/RB5/RB6 FS0M_CNV.SYM

(FS0-M) RC3/RC4

om
Note
A converter file is included under the APPENDIX
subdirectory on the system floppy disk (Vol. 5).

r.c
[Example operation: PMC–M → PMC–RB4]
(1) Set FAPT LADDER for PMC–M, then convert the program subject
to conversion to a mnemonic file. (→ A.)
(2) On the OPEN CNC of the PMC–RB4 model, convert the source

e
program to a mnemonic file with the off–line function for
“MNEMONIC EDIT”. (→ B.)
nt
(3) Start your text editor (any commercially available text editor can be
used.) (Specify the name of the mnemonic file created in (2) as the
edit file name.)
ce
(4) Replace the symbol data of the conversion destination mnemonic file
(PMC–RB4) with the converter file (FS0T_CNV.SYM). (→ C.)
(5) Replace the ladder data of the conversion destination mnemonic file
(PMC–RB4) with the ladder data of the conversion source mnemonic
file (PMC–M). (→ D.)
nc

(6) Terminate the text editor, then start the Ladder Editing Package.
(7) Convert the mnemonic format file created in (5), above, to a source
program.
.c

(8) On the symbol editing screen, delete all symbol and comment data.
w
w
w

299
D. CONVERSION OF SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–62884EN/01

A. Conversion source Converter file

(FS0T_CNV.SYM) B. Conversion destina-
mnemonic format file tion mnemonic format
(PMC–M) file (PMC–RB4)
%@2
G0000.0 G100.0
%@A %@A
G0000.1 G100.1
%@0 %@0
G0000.2 G100.2
1 400 2 BINARY
20 3 NO
4 PMC–RB4
F0135.4 F275.4
%@1
F0135.5 F275.5

om
7 100 C.Insertion %
F0135.6 F275.6
80 %@2
F0135.7 F275.7
90 %
%
%@1 %@3
% %
%@2 D.Insertion %@4
% %

r.c
%@3 %@5
RD X21.4 %
WRT G121.4 %@E
RD. NOT X22.3
WRT. NOT G122.3

e
SUB 1
SUB 2
%
%@4
%
%@E
nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w

300
B–62884EN/01 D. CONVERSION OF SEQUENCE PROGRAM

D.3.3 Data (such as title, symbol & comment, ladder, message, and I/O module
Using Data in a data) in a sequence program can be used for another sequence program,
by the following method.
Sequence Program for
The range of addresses used varies from one model to another. They may
Another Program
have to be modified. Refer to the programming manual of the respective
models.

[Example : Using the symbols & comment data of the PMC–RB for the PMC–RC3]

om
%@A %@A
%@0 %@0
2 BCD 2 BCD
3 NO 3 NO
4 PMC–RB 4 PMC–RC3

r.c
7 100 5 000000
9 YES 6 50
% 7 100
%@1 %
%@1

e
%@2
X000 .0 ZPX. M %@2
X0001.1 ZPY. M
%
nt Insert X0000.0 ZPX. M
X0001.1 ZPY. M
%
ce
%
%@E %
%@E
nc
.c
w
w
w

301
D. CONVERSION OF SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–62884EN/01

D.4
TRANSFER FROM
P–G

D.4.1 This function is used to transfer data in ASCII (mnemonic) format

Function for between a P–G (including the Mate and Mark II) and a PC via an
RS–232–C cable. [FLOADAT] is for IBM PC/AT.
Transferring Data
between the P–G and

om
PC

D.4.1.1 (1) Uploading

Command Input During Loads the FAPT LADDER mnemonic data into the PC from the P–G
via the RS–232–C port.

r.c
Startup
FLOADAT [name of file for storing uploaded data] –u (for IBM PC/AT)

When a file with the same name as the file specified for receiving data

e
already exists in the current directory, the following message is
displayed.
ntFile is exist. Over write? <Y/N>
ce
(2) Downloading
Loads the FAPT LADDER mnemonic data into the P–G from the PC
via the RS–232–C port.
nc

FLOADAT [name of file for storing downloaded data] –d (for IBM PC/AT)

As shown above, the load commands have the following two

parameters:
.c

–u: Uploads data from the P–G to the PC.

–d: Downloads data from the PC to the P–G.
w

Note
The above parameters can be specified with either
lowercase or uppercase characters.
w
w

302
B–62884EN/01 D. CONVERSION OF SEQUENCE PROGRAM

D.4.1.2 PC side
Communications IBM PC/AT series MODE COM1: 4800,E,7,2
Settings (PC DOS MODE MODE COM1: 9600,E,7,2
command) (for 9600 baud)
P–G side
IO NC,CN1,F1,F6
IO NC,CN1,F1,F6,BR10 (for 9600 baud)

Notes

om
1 The baud rate can be set to either 4800 or 9600. However,
note that when the PC baud rate is set to 9600, the
parameter BR10 must be added to the baud rate setting for
the P–G.
2 It is necessary to set these communications setting only for

r.c
doing this operation. After using this function, please
restore the communications settings as the section 2.1
(Chapter 1).

e
The CN number is not fixed. For the P–G or P–G Mark II, the CN
number can be any setting from CN1 to CN4. For the P–G Mate, the
nt
CN number can be any setting from CN1 to CN3. However, note that
the CN number selected here must match the CN number of the IO
command. Use the cables specified in Appendix H.
Operation example
ce
During uploading
Operation procedure Example of input and screen contents
<PC> <PG> Turn on power.
nc

<PG> Enter IO command settings. IO NC, CN1, F1, F6 (, BR10)

<PC> IBM PC/AT Series : Enter MODE command settings. (See Section 2 of Communications Settings)
<PG> Store transmission data in P–G memory. Press the [F2] key to select menu item no.2.
.c

<PC> Execute FLOADAT. Enters waiting state. FLOADAT FILENAME –u

<PC> “LOADER START” is displayed.
w

<PG> Set [F6] ON. Select no.4 on the menu.

<PC> Select any entry from 1 to 7 on the submenu.
Begins transmission. <PG> “EXECUTING” is displayed.
w

Completes transmission.
<PG> Returns to the menu. <PC> “Operation Complete” is displayed.
w

<PC> The message “Operation Complete” is displayed, “HIT ANY KEY” is displayed.
followed by the prompt “HIT ANY KEY”. Hit any key
to end operation.

303
D. CONVERSION OF SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–62884EN/01

During downloading
Operation procedure Example of input and screen contents
<PC> <PG> Turn on power.
<PG> Enter IO command settings. IO NC, CN1, (BR10,) F1, F6
<PC> IBM PC/AT Series : Enter MODE command setting. (See Section 2 of Communications Settings)
<PG> Turn on [F1] key. Select no.2 on the menu. <PG> “EXECUTING” is displayed.
Enters waiting state.
<PC> Execute FLOADAT. FLOADAT FILENAME –d

om
Begins transmission. <PC> “Output Start” is displayed.
Completes transmission.
<PG> Returns to the menu.
<PC> The message “Operation Complete” is displayed, <PC> “Operation Complete” is displayed.

r.c
followed by the prompt “HIT ANY KEY”. Hit any key “HIT ANY KEY” is displayed.
to end operation.

e
D.4.1.3 During uploading
Protocol When the FLOADAT command is executed on the PC side, a
nt
communications request is issued for the P–G and reception begins.
After all data has been received, DC 3 is sent and transmission is
completed.
1) DC 1 code is sent to the P–G (data transmission request).
ce
2) Data is received.
3) Completion code is received and reception is completed.
4) DC 3 code is sent.
Transmission and reception both use the 1–byte machine–dependent
nc

BIOS call for input and output.

During downloading
After the P–G issues a transmission request, the P–G enters the
waiting state. FLOADAT is activated in the PC, then transmission
.c

begins. After all data has been sent, DC 4 is sent and transmission
is completed.
1) The P–G issues DC 1.
w

2) DC 2 code is sent to the P–G.

3) Data is sent.
4) DC 4 code is sent.
w

Transmission and reception both use the 1–byte machine–dependent

BIOS call for input and output.
w

304
B–62884EN/01 D. CONVERSION OF SEQUENCE PROGRAM

D.4.1.4 When the transmission speed is faster than reception processing, BUSY
BUSY Control control is performed by issuing the DC 1 and DC 3 codes. In the IBM
PC/AT series, there is no X parameter, which effectively has the same
result.

D.4.1.5 The system will automatically determine which of the following seven
Data Start and End pairs of start and end codes is used. When none of these codes are used,
an error message is displayed and operation terminates.
Codes

om
Start code End code
1 %@A %@E
2 %@0 %
3 %@1 %

r.c
4 %@2 %
5 %@3 %
6 %@4 %

e
7 %@5 %

nt
Notes
1 The end codes shown here must appear at the beginning of a line.
In other words, strictly speaking, a data reception end code is
ce
actually denoted by the sequence CR + LF + an end code. End
codes (% etc.) appearing within comments are ignored.)
nc

D.4.1.6 (1) When an LF code (0AH) is received, it is converted into two

characters, the first of which is CR (0DH) followed by LF (0AH).
Data Conversion (Return
.c

Codes) (2) When a CR code (0DH) is received, it is discarded.

(3) When an end code (DE) is received, CR (0DH) and LF (0AH) are
appended to it in that order.
w

D.4.1.7 Until a data start code (DS) is received, data is discarded.

w

Transmission and
Receive Data
ŸŸ
ŸŸ
w

... CR LF DS CR LF CR LF DS CR LF

ŸŸŸŸ ŸŸŸŸ
ŸŸ
ŸŸŸŸ Discarded
ŸŸŸŸ Valid data

After the end code (DE) has been sent or received, DC 3 is sent for
uploading or DC 4 is sent for downloading, then the file is closed.

305
D. CONVERSION OF SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–62884EN/01

D.4.1.8 This software detects the following four types of errors.

Error Detection and (1) When there is an error in the command line
Messages Error in the file name, –u, or –d.

Parameter Error
FLOADAT FILENAME –u/–d set parameter. (FILNAME, upload or download.)

(2) When the specified file cannot be found

om
Output file cannot be found or file for receiving cannot be opened.

Cannot open output file

(3) When data not in the FAPT LADDER format is sent or received

r.c
Wrong data received

(4) When there is a definite problem with the start code,

e
Start Code error detected
ntor there is a definite problem with the end code
ce
End code error detected

This software only detects errors in the command line and in the FAPT
LADDER format.
nc

This software does not support detection of errors in the contents of FAPT
LADDER data.
Messages
.c

When the file name specified as the file for receiving data already exists
in the current directory, the following message is displayed.
w

File is exist. Over write? <Y/N>

w
w

306
B–62884EN/01 D. CONVERSION OF SEQUENCE PROGRAM

D.4.1.9 1. Incorrect entry found in the command line.

Error Detection and 2. Specified file cannot be opened.
Handling 3. Data not in the FAPT LADDER format was sent or received.
The following causes can be considered for the above errors:
D The end code has been omitted (% or %@E was omitted).
D The start code has been omitted (%@*, where * is A or 0 to 5, was
omitted).
D Garbage data exists at the beginning of the file.

om
D Garbage data exists between each unit of data.
D The file format is completely different from the FAPT LADDER
format.
When any of the above errors is detected, the current operation is
canceled.

r.c
During downloading, if an error is detected on the PC, the system will
return to the DOS screen. At the same time, a %, %@E or other end
code is sent to the P–G to return it to the menu screen.
4. Others
D When, for some reason, data transfer is interrupted

e
(When the power to the PC or P–G is interrupted during operation,
etc.)
ntWhen data transfer is interrupted during uploading, the system will
enter a waiting state until data transfer is restarted. (To interrupt the
waiting state, press Ctrl + C ).
ce
When data transfer is interrupted during downloading, the data
becomes corrupt and data transfer must be started over from the
beginning.
nc
.c
w
w
w

307
E. STANDARD SYMBOL DATA B–62884EN/01

E STANDARD SYMBOL DATA

When a mnemonic file and the standard symbol data are combined, it is possible
to use the standard symbol name provided by FANUC.

CNC TYPE DATA FILE NAME

om
FS16/18–T F16&F18–T. SYM
FS16/18–M F16&F18–M.SYM

Note

r.c
The standard symbol data is stored in the directory APPENDIX of
system floppy (Vol. 5).

e
nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w

308
 F. TOOL FOR CHANGING MESSAGE DATA
B–62884EN/01 (CHGMES)

F TOOL FOR CHANGING MESSAGE DATA (CHGMES)

This function is a tool(CHGMES) for easy changing the message data

incorporating sequence program of FANUC PMCs .
This tool extracts only message data from Handy file format file.

om
The message data in CNC(PMC) can be replaced with this extracted data,
if both message data size are the same.
This tool is usefull when it is necessary to use some message data files in
one ladder program.(For example: Supporting multi–lingual message.)

e r.c
nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w

309
F. TOOL FOR CHANGING MESSAGE DATA
(CHGMES) B–62884EN/01

<Method of Message size Check>

1) Memory map information is output when the source program is
compiled.
Please check each symbol top address of the original changing
ladder and the ladder for changing to be the same value.
2) This tool for changing the message data execute with the
“compare file”, then this tool execute the same check of the
message data size.
1. PROCEDURE OF THE MESSAGE DATA CHANGING
1) Load the basic message ladder file of handy file format to the NC

om
by using the memory card or floppy disk on the PMC
input/output operation ([I/O] screen).
2) Input the “CHGMES” command with the message data for
changing and dummy ladder file(handy file format).
3) The message data on the NC is changed by loading the output file
of this tool on the PMC input/output operation ([I/O] screen).

r.c
2. OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
It is necessary to use following operating environment for this tool.
1) Memory
235Kbytes or more main memory is required when activating

e
this function.
2) Temporary files
nt This function generates following temporary files for work area
on the drive/directory which is set by environmental variable
“TMP” of DOS.
ce
This function generate temporary files on the route directory of
current drive when environmental variable “TMP” is not set.
It is necessary to free max.65KBytes disk space for these
temporary files.
$TMPD.T**, $TMPW.T** (**=00 to 99)
nc

(These temporary files are deleted by this function

automatically.)
3) Hard disk
It is necessary to use following disk space.
.c

S For installation 68KBytes

S To generate temporary files 65KBytes
w

S (In case of environmental variable “TMP”

of DOS set on hard disk)
w

TOTAL 133KBytes

3. INSTALLATION
w

Please copy EXE–FILE (_CHGMES.EXE) to any directory from

system floppy disk(Vol.5).
Key in “_CHGMES” on the installed directory, then following files
are generated.
D CHGMES.EXE ⋅ ASC2IMG.EXE ⋅ IMG2ASC.EXE :
Execute files (.EXE)
D RB3DUMMY.SFM ⋅ RB3BASIC.SFM ⋅ RB3MES.SFM :
example files(.SFM)

310
 F. TOOL FOR CHANGING MESSAGE DATA
B–62884EN/01 (CHGMES)

Example files(.SFM) are used to confirm the installation of this function

by activating example command.
4. ACTIVATION
Key in following command at the DOS prompt activated in the
utility.(No.9 of FAPT LADDER main menu).
Or,Please change the directory in which this tool is installed.
(It is not necessary to change the directory when the “PATH” is set.)
Then key in following command.
CHGMES [INPUT FILE] [OUTPUT FILE] [PMC TYPE]

om
( [COMPARE FILE] ) Return

INPUT FILE : : A handy file format file that consists of a

dummy ladder and message data to replace the
message data in the basic message ladder file.

r.c
Create this file by compiling the source file and
converting to a handy file format file using
FAPT LADDER.
OUTPUT FILE : : A handy file format message file created by this

e
tool.
This file contains only message data.
nt
PMC TYPE
By loading this file to the CNC, message data in
the CNC memory can be substituted.
: : PMC TYPE (RB3 or RB4)
ce
Error will occur at key in other than applied
PMCs.
COMPARE FILE : : Basic message ladder file (Handy file format)
(Optional) Please refer to the Fig.“Operation outline”.
nc

This tool compares message size of the “INPUT

FILE” and the “COMPARE FILE” to determine
if there is a match. Then, you can guarantee that
only the message will be correctry replaced
.c

without crashing other data when you load the

‘OUTPUT FILE’ to CNC.
w
w
w

311
F. TOOL FOR CHANGING MESSAGE DATA
(CHGMES) B–62884EN/01

<Outline of Operation>

Basic message ladder Message for changing+Dummy ladder

Source format Source format

program Generation, Editing program

om
Check the SYMBOL top
COMPILATION address by memory map
display.

r.c
Object file Object file

e
INPUT/OUTPUT (F4: Handy File)

*3

Handy file format

file
nt *1 Handy file format
file
ce
FLOPPY MEMORY CARD

ŸŸ
ŸŸ
nc

Changing to message ROM data(Using this function)

↓ ↓
(Note) CHGMES [In. file] [Out. file] [pmc type] ([Comp. file])
*1 *2 *3
.c

*2
FLOPPY MEMORY CARD
w

ŸŸ
. (Note) Handy file
. format file OR
CNC
w

Loading at [I/O]screen operation of PMC. Only message data for changing of ROM file
w

Note
It is possible to load by memory card only for FS16–B, FS18–B, FS–20, FS21–B, and FS15–B
(PMC–NB).
Please refer to the following manual about detailed operation of loading by the memory card
or handy file. It is not possible to load on boot screen.
FANUC PMC MODEL PA1/PA3/RA1/RA2/RA3/RB/RB2/RB4/RC/RC3/RC4/NB
PROGRAMMING MANUAL (LADDER LANGUAGE) (B–61863E/06)

312
 F. TOOL FOR CHANGING MESSAGE DATA
B–62884EN/01 (CHGMES)

5. USING EXAMPLE
Check the installation of this function by using the following example.
There are some sample files in system floppy disk for checking this
function.

RB3DUMMY.SFM : : Message data and dummy ladder file (Handy

file format)
(Message data (50KB)+Ladder
(END1+END2))
RB3BASIC.SFM : : Basic message ladder file (Handy file format)

om
(Message data (50KB)+Ladder
data+Symbol&Comment data)
RB3MES.SFM : : Data for checking the result (Message
data(50KB))
(This file is a normal output file, when this tool

r.c
execute for above sample data. It is possible to
check result by comparing “OUTPUT FILE”
and this file.)
Execute as the following (In this case the system

e
is installed in main body.)
1) Please key in the following command.
nt A:¥>CHGMES RB3DUMMY.SFM USERTEST.SFM RB3
RB3BASIC.SFM Return
ce
You can specify any name for “OUTPUT FILE”. In this
example,“USERTEST.SFM” is used.
2) Following file is generated on current drive.
USERTEST.SFM (Message data (50KB))
3) Check the result by using “FC/A”(DOS COMMAND).
nc

C:¥>FC/A USERTEST.SFM RB3MES.SFM

If “NO DIFFERENCES ENCOUNTERED” is displayed, the
result is correct.
6. ERROR MESSAGES
.c

Message Meaning and countermeasure

chgmes : PMC type unmatch (pmc type) PMC type does not match between applied PMCs.
w

chgmes : PMC type unmatch (input file) PMC type of input file and key in PMC type do not match.
chgmes : PMC type unmatch (compare file) PMC type of compare file and key in PMC type do not match.
w

chgmes : Message sizes of (input file) and (compare file) are Message size of input file and compare file do not agree.
mismatched Please adjust the message size by adding some dummy
message to the input file. Please comfirm the MAP display on
w

the compile function of FAPT LADDER.

chgmes : Cannot start ASC2IMG ASC2IMG.EXE does not exist not in the same directory of
CHGMES.EXE.
chgmes : Cannot start IMG2ASC IMG2ASC.EXE does not exist in the same directory of
CHGMES.EXE.
chgmes : Cannot make temporary file $tmpd.t** It is impossible to make temporary file.
chgmes : Cannot make temporary file $tmwd.t** ⋅ Disk is insufficient.
⋅ It is impossible to set the file name, because $tmp*.t00 to
$tmp*.t99 exist.

313
F. TOOL FOR CHANGING MESSAGE DATA
(CHGMES) B–62884EN/01

Message Meaning and countermeasure

chgmes : Cannot close file $tmpd (w).t** Temporary file cannot be closed.
Please check the disk space.
asc2img : Cannot allocate memory (**bytes) Memory is insufficient. Please free up 235KB of more
memory, and re-activate.
asc2img : Conversion area in input is conflicted Ladder header of the input file is crushed.
Please re-make the input file, and re-activate.
asc2img : Unknown file type Illegal format of the input file. Please change the fomat, and
re-active.
asc2img : (input file) : Record No.**has There is an invalid data of input file.

om
********************** Please correct as error message, and reactivate.
asc2img : Cannot open file There is no input file.
asc2img : Cannot close file It is impossible to close the file.
Please check the disk space.
asc2img : Cannot write It is impossible to write the temporary file.

r.c
Please check the disk space.
img2asc : Cannot allocate memory (**bytes) Memory is insufficient. Please free up 235KB or more
memory, and re-activate.
img2asc : Cannot write It is impossible to write the output file.
Please check the disk space.

e
nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w

314
B–62884EN/01 G. CAUTIONS FOR USING THE O/S

G CAUTIONS FOR USING THE O/S

(1) Windows 3.1

1) SMARTDRV.EXE
When SMARTDRV.EXE is used with write caching enabled, pay
attention to the following:

om
Enable write caching SMARTDRV.EXE
Be careful especially when the AUTOEXEC.BAT contains a
command line of SMARTDRV.EXE.
[Symptom]
When SMARTDRV.EXE is used with write caching enabled, the

r.c
following symptom occurs.
D The following alarm occurs during a read from the PMC or
FA/PMC writer, disabling entry.
Alarm message : “Received data invalid”

e
“OVERRUN”
[Measure]
nt When SMARTDRV.EXE is used, disable write caching for the
following disk drives:
a. Drive where the FAPT LADDER system exists
b. Drive where ROM format files are created
ce
Example) When the FAPT LADDER system is on drive A, and
a ROM format file is to be created on drive B
SMARTDRV a b → disable write caching for
drives A and B
nc

Refer to the Microsoft Windows 3.1 Function Guide, supplied

from Microsoft, for detailed descriptions about how to use
SMARTDRV.EXE.
.c
w
w
w

315
H. DATA TRANSFER CABLES B–62884EN/01

H DATA TRANSFER CABLES

Use the cables below to transfer data from a PC to a CNC, ROM writer
(FA writer or PMC writer), or P–G (P–G Mark II or P–G Mate).
1. For IBM PC/AT

om
IBM PC/AT
On–line cable
9–pin female 25–pin male
connector connector

r.c
25–pin female 25–pin male
connector connector
IBM PC/AT cable
CNC, ROM writer, or P–G

e
2. For IBM PS/2
nt IBM PS/2
On–line cable
ce
9–pin female 25–pin male
connector connector

25–pin female 25–pin male

nc

connector connector
IBM PS/2 cable
CNC, ROM writer, or P–G
.c
w
w
w

316
B–62884EN/01 H. DATA TRANSFER CABLES

D On–line cable (A08B–0031–K801/K802)

2 2
SD SD
3 3
RD RD
4 4
RS RS
5 5
CS CS
25–pin male 20 20 25–pin male
connector ER ER connector

om
6 6
DR DR
8 8
CD CD
7 7
SG SG
1 1
FG FG

r.c
D IBM PC/AT cable

e
1 8
nt CD
RD
SD
2
3
3
2
CD
RD
SD
4 20
ce
ER ER
9–pin female 5 7 25–pin fe-
connector SG SG male con-
6 6
DR DR nector
7 4
RS RS
nc

8 5
CS CS
9 22
CI CI
.c

D IBM PS/2 cable

w

2 2
w

SD SD
3 3
RD RD
4 4
RS RS
w

5 5
CS CS
25–pin female 20 20 25–pin female
connector ER ER connector
6 6
DR DR
8 8
CD CD
7 7
SG SG
1 1
FG FG

317
I. INQUIRY FORM B–62884EN/01

I INQUIRY FORM

om
e r.c
nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w

318
B–62884EN/01 I. INQUIRY FORM

Company name Section

Person in charge Phone No. ( )

Address Fax No. ( )

FANUC
sales person

om
Version Date of
No. Product name Ordering code
No. purchase

r.c
2

e
[Usage environment]

Machine type used (PC)

nt (Manufacturer: )
ce
OS Version (Manufacturer: )

EMS board: Yes / No (Manufacturer: )

Other equipment (printer, etc.) (Manufacturer: )

Please print out the CONFIG.SYS and AUTOEXEC.BAT files on a sheet and attach it to this form.
nc

[Details of inquiry]
.c
w
w

Please use this form when you have any questions about this product.
w

319
B–62884EN/01 Index
[A] Decompilation, 202
Decompile, 222
A : Initial Menu, 238
Decompile Option, 204
About PMC Program, 10
Diagnose, 47
About Symbol & Comment Data, 12
Differences from Fapt Ladder, 294
Automatic Compilation and Decompilation, 288 Directory Configuration after Installation, 25
Display System Information, 100

[B]
[E]

om
B : Title Editing, 240
Backup of User Program, 218 E : Ladder/Step Sequence Editing, 243
BUSY Control, 305 Editing, 115, 282
Error, 239, 240, 241, 242, 247, 248, 249, 251, 256,
259, 264, 271

r.c
Error (at Editing Ladder Diagram), 243
[C] Error (at Editing Step Sequence), 244
C : I/O Module Editing, 241 Error Detection and Handling, 307
Cautions for Using the O/S, 315 Error Detection and Messages, 306

e
Change of Each Setting File, 290 Error Message List, 237
Changing the Printer Specification, 194 Examples of Mnemonic Files (Single–Format), 283
Command Input During Startup, 302
Common System Operations, 35
Communication, 105
nt Examples of Operation, 106
Executing or Stopping a Program, 91
Exit, 46
ce
Communications Settings, 303
Compilation, 195 [F]
Compile, 221
F : Symbol & Comment Editing, 247
nc

Compile Options, 199 Fatal Error, 238, 243, 249, 251, 256, 258
CONFIG.SYS, 26 File, 43
Configuration and Installation of Package, 14 File Configuration, 28
Conversion from FAPT LADDER, 297 File System, 28
.c

Conversion of a Mnemonic File to a Source Program, Function for Transferring Data between the P–G and
226 PC, 302
Function Overview, 5
w

Conversion of a Source Program to a Mnemonic File,

224 Functions Specific to Individual PMC Models, 281
Conversion of Sequence Program, 293
w

Conversion Using a Signal Address Converter, 299

Convert the PMC Type of Sequence Program, 298 [G]
Converting by System Parameter Editing, 298 G : Message Editing, 248
w

Converting ROM Format File, 220

[H]
H : Printout, 249
[D] Handy File+3.5” Floppy Disk (MS–DOS Format), 216
D : System Parameter Editing, 242
Data Conversion (Return Codes), 305
Data Start and End Codes, 305 [I]
Data Transfer Cables, 316 I : Compile, 251
 Index B–62884EN/01

I/O Module Editing, 170 [O]

I/O Port Setting, 209 Off–Line Function, 115
Input/Output, 101, 209 On–line editing, 53
Inquiry Form, 318 On–Line Functions, 37
Installation, 18 OPEN CNC System Configurations, 5
Installing the Software to Invoke from the DOS Com- Operating Environment, 15
mand Prompt, 22
Operation, 30, 203
Output Item Setting, 176

om
Outputting to Split Files, 208
[J] Overview of Operation, 33
J : Decompilation, 256 Overview of the On–Line Functions, 37

r.c
[K] [P]
K : Mnemonic Conversion, 258 Package Configuration, 17
Password, 207

e
Password Set Function, 200
[L] PMC Alarm Status, 89
L : Input/Output, 264
Ladder Debugging Function, 64
nt PMC Parameter, 76
PMC Programming Method, 10
PMC Status Window, 90
ce
Ladder Diagram/Step Sequence Editing, 118
Print Format–1: SETUP Menu, 184
Ladder Monitor, 47
Print Format–2 (AMOFTRP, DAT/* .INF/Message
Ladder monitor, 47 File), 185
Link, 284 Printout, 174
nc

Loading of Program, 101 Program Backup, 103

Protocol, 304
.c

[M]
Memory Card Interface in the Personal Computer and
[R]
Memory Card, 212 Registering the Software in the Windows [Programs]
w

Menu, 18
Menu Structure, 33
Restoring PMC Parameter, 44
Message Editing, 169
w

Mnemonic Editing, 224

Mnemonic File Format, 227 [S]
w

Modifying Program Option Initial Values (OP-

TION.CNF), 223 Sample Mnemonic Files (All–format), 233
Sample Mnemonic Files (Single–format), 229
Monitoring a Ladder, 106
Saving PMC Parameter, 43
MS–DOS, 45
Selecting Off–Line Function from On–Line Function,
45
Selecting On–Line Function from Off–Line Function,
[N] 236
Sequence Program Creation, 8
N : On–Line Monitor, 271
Setting Program Options, 220
B–62884EN/01 Index

Signal Analysis Function, 95 The Note if the Step Sequence Function is Selected
When Setting a Model, 234
Signal Status Window, 73
Signal Trace Function, 92 The Overview of Ladder Editing Package, 4

Signal Trigger Function, 61 Title Data Editing, 117

Standard Symbol Data, 308 Tool for Changing Message Data (CHGMES), 309
Start and Terminate, 197 Transfer from P–G, 302
Starting and Ending Printing, 175 Transfer to and from PMC, 211
Starting the Ladder Editing Package, 31 Transmission and Receive Data, 305
Starting the On–Line Functions, 38

om
Storing to the Program, 102
Supported PMC Functions, 7 [U]
Symbol & Comment Editing, 165 User Batch File Execution, 234
System Configuration File “%%% FLSET. CNF”, 291 Using Data in a Sequence Program for Another Pro-

r.c
System Parameter Editing , 172 gram, 301

System Parameters, 282 Utility, 235

e
[T] [W]
The Constitution of Source Program, 29 Warning, 241, 250, 255, 257, 262, 270
The Major Functions, 4
nt Warning (at Editing Ladder Diagram), 246
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w
 Revision Record

FANUC OPEN CNC Ladder Editing Package OPERATOR’S MANUAL (B–62884EN)

w
w
w
.c
nc
ce
nt
e r.c
01 Sep., ’96
om
evision Date Contents Revision Date Contents
 om
r.c
· No part of this manual may be
reproduced in any form.

e
· All specifications and designs
nt
are subject to change without
notice.
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w